city of phoenix · 2019-02-14 · city of phoenix: water services department project name: west...

CITY OF PHOENIX

WATER SERVICES DEPARTMENT

West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main and Water Main

PROJECT NUMBER WS90400067 and WS90501005

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISIONS 16 THRU 18

VOLUME 3 OF 5

2019

MAYOR Thelda Williams

CITY COUNCIL District 1 - Thelda Williams District 5 - Vania GuevaraDistrict 2 - Jim Waring District 6 - Sal DiCiccioDistrict 3 - Debra Stark District 7 - Michael NowakowskiDistrict 4 - Laura Pastor District 8 - Felicita Mendoza

CITY MANAGER Ed Zuercher

CITY ENGINEER Kini L.E. Knudson, PE

WATER SERVICES DIRECTORKathryn Sorensen

26866 - i - 1/30/2019

VOLUME 3 OF 5

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section No. Section Name

16050 General Provisions 16061 Grounding Systems 16121 Instrumentation Cable 16122 600 Volt Cable

16131 PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing

16132 Flexible Conduit 16133 Sealing Fittings 16134 Expansion/Deflection Fittings 16135 Pull Boxes 16136 Outlet Boxes 16137 Underground Duct Banks 16138 Manholes and Handholes 16139 Cable Trays 16141 Receptacles 16142 Snap Switches 16143 Disconnect Switches 16144 Control Stations 16215 Power System/Arc Flash Analysis 16231 480 Volt Standby Power Generator System 16271 Dry Type Transformers 16282 Surge Protection Devices 16412 Automatic Transfer Switches 16422 Combination Magnetic Motor Starters 16423 Motor Control Centers 16441 Service Entrance Section - Low-Voltage Distribution Switchboards 16442 Lighting, Instrumentation and Distribution Panelboards 16443 Uninterruptable Power System

26866 - ii - 1/30/2019

Section No. Section Name

16501 Lighting Fixtures and Controls 16911 Power Monitoring System 17001 Process Control System - General Requirements 17051 Process Control Descriptions 17052 Process Control System Primary Sensors and Field Instruments 17053 Process Control System Instrument Index 17101 Process Control System Fiber Optic Cabling 17226 Process Control System I/O List 17260 Control Panels 17262 PLC’s – Software and Programming 18005 Integrated Security Management System – General Requirements 18007 Integrated Security Management System – Start-up, Commissioning and Field Testing 18008 Integrated Security Management System – Training 18121 Security Systems Cable 18260 Integrated Security Management System – Enclosures 18822 Security Gate Operator 18910 Integrated Security Management System

CITY OF PHOENIX: Water Services Department PROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main and Water Main PROJECT NUMBER: WS90400067 and WS90501005

26866 16050-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16050

GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the

Drawings, specified, and required to complete the electrical Work.2. Equipment shall be rated and labeled by the manufacturer for the

environmental conditions in which it is installed including the powerdisconnects, control stations, and wiring systems.

3. Conduits and circuits within electrical distribution or utilization equipmentand cabinets shall be identified and labeled as specified and as shown.

B. Coordination:1. Review installation procedures, drawings and schedules under other Sections

and coordinate with other trades the installation of electrical items that must beinstalled with or within formwork, walls, partitions, ceilings and panels.

2. Responsible for the installation of all conduits, inserts, and other items to beembedded in the concrete, or built into walls, partitions, ceilings or panelsconstructed by other contractors. Provide other contractors with detailed plansor sketches of the location of said conduits and other built-in items as may berequired. Stay fully informed of the construction where conduits and other built-in items are to be installed. Install said conduits and other built-in items in sucha manner and within such time periods as will not unnecessarily delay the workof the other contractors.

3. Arc Flash Coordination: Review Electrical Pre-Submittal coordination effortsduring the Pre-Construction Conference, section 01301 with CONTRACTOR,STUDY FIRM, ARC FLASH FACILITATOR and the ENGINEER.a. Agenda items for Pre-Construction Conference shall include:

1) Submittal review routing protocols.2) Discuss procedures to handling equipment found to have an incident

energy level that requires above a Level 2 PPE.3) Electrical safety label installation, as identified in specification 16215.4) Single Line Diagram and Power Panel Schedule Record Documents.

C. General:1. Interpretation of Drawings:

a. Dimensions shown on the Drawings that are related to equipment are basedon the equipment of one manufacturer. Confirm the dimensions of theequipment furnished to the space allocated for that equipment.


26866 16050-2 12/20/2018

b. The Drawings show the principal elements of the electrical Work. They are not intended as detailed working drawings for the electrical Work, but as a complement to the Specifications to clarify the principal features of the electrical systems.

c. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications that all equipment and devices, furnished and installed under this Contract, be properly connected and interconnected with other equipment and devices so as to render the installations complete for successful operation, regardless of whether all the connections and interconnections are specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings.

d. It also is the intent of the Contract Documents that similar products are provided by the same manufacturer for uniformity on the Project.

D. Temporary Power and Lighting:

1. Refer to Section 01511, Temporary Electricity, for temporary power during construction.

2. Refer to Section 01512, Temporary Lighting, for temporary lighting during construction.

3. If utilizing existing facility power, provide updated panel schedules and/or load summaries to the ENGINEER and OWNER identifying the recommended power sources and circuits for temporary services. ENGINEER and OWNER must provide approval prior to connecting to the services.

E. Utilities:

1. Furnish and install empty conduits and ground for telephone service per utility shop drawings. Plywood backboards and punch-blocks shall be furnished and installed for telephone service, as required for contractor’s job-site trailers. Coordinate with City of Phoenix, Information Technology Services (ITS) Department and Telephone Utility. Plywood backboards shall be painted with approved fire retardant paint. Coordinate with City of Phoenix ITS project requirements and apply for service. Submit all necessary documents and fees required to Telephone Utility.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Permits: Obtain all permits and pay fees required to commence Work and, upon

completion of the Work, obtain and deliver to the ENGINEER a Certificate of Inspection and Approval from the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Codes: Material and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the current standards and recommendations of the National Electrical Code, the National Electrical Safety Code and with local codes which apply. Where discrepancies arise between codes, the most restrictive regulation shall apply.

3. Tests by Independent Regulatory Agencies: Electrical material and equipment shall be new and shall bear the label of the Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., or


26866 16050-3 12/20/2018

other nationally-recognized, independent testing laboratory, wherever standards have been established and label service regularly applies.

4. Utilities: a. Power Company: Work in connection with the electric service and utility

metering shall be done in strict conformance with the requirements of APS. b. Telephone Company: Work in connection with the telephone lines for the

telephone service shall be done in strict conformance with the requirements of AT&T. Telephone system within the Plant is a private system and shall be coordinated with the City of Phoenix, Information Technology Department.

c. City of Phoenix, Information Technology Department.

B. Reference Standards: Electrical material and equipment shall conform in all respects to the latest approved standards of the following: 1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 2. The American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 4. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC). 7. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM). 8. The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society (ISA). 9. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA). 10. Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 11. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

C. Wiring Coordinator:

1. Retain the services of a Wiring Coordinator who shall prepare complete point-to-point interconnection wiring termination sheets. The sheets shall identify all external interconnecting wiring associated with all new and modified existing equipment. a. Qualifications: Coordinator shall have experience in the development of

the point-to-point interconnection wiring termination sheets and shall have served in a similar role on a project of similar size and complexity. 1) Present qualifications and approach for the project at Pre-Construction

Conference specified under Section 01301, Pre-Construction Conference.

2) Prepare the items listed below for presentation at the Pre-submittal Meeting. Submit to ENGINEER three weeks prior to date of meeting. a) List of projects where the Wiring Coordinator developed point-to-

point wiring termination sheets. b) Samples of diagrams that were developed for the listed projects. c) Example wiring diagram proposed for the Work with a

preliminary list of drawings to be produced. d) Plan of how information will be obtained and documented.


26866 16050-4 12/20/2018

b. Responsibilities: 1) Develop point-to-point interconnection wiring termination sheets for

performance of the Work and to document terminations. 2) Use information obtained from approved Shop Drawings, Record

Drawings and field inspections as required to complete the sheets. 3) Attend Pre-submittal Meeting and periodic coordination and progress

meetings specified in Section 17001, Process Control System General Requirements for Process Instrumentation.

4) Conduct point-to-point wiring checks to determine wires and terminations are per the point-to-point interconnection wiring termination sheets. CONTRACTOR to sign-off on the sheets to document the checks were performed. After confirmation by the CONTRACTOR, submit the signed sheets to the OWNER/ENGINEER. a) Point-to-Point Interconnection Wiring Termination Sheets:

Include the following: i. External wiring for each piece of equipment, panel,

instrument and other devices and conduit wiring to control stations, lighting panels and motor controllers.

ii. Numbered terminal block identification for each wire termination.

iii. Identification of the assigned wire numbers for all interconnections.

iv. Identification of all conduit wiring by the conduit tag in which the wire is installed.

v. Terminal and pull boxes through which wiring is routed. vi. Identification of all equipment and the Shop Drawing

transmittal numbers for equipment from which the wiring requirements and termination information was obtained.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 01330, Submittals and Section 01332, Shop Drawing Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings shall include the following information to the extent applicable to the particular item: 1. Manufacturer’s name and product designation or catalog number, including

environmental rating such as “Rated for Outdoor Use” or “Rated for Hazardous Location”.

2. Electrical ratings. 3. Conformance to applicable standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM, ICEA,

IEEE, ISA, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA, UL, or other organizations. 4. Dimensioned plan, section, elevations and panel layouts showing means for

mounting, conduit connection, and grounding. 5. Materials and finish specification, including paints.


26866 16050-5 12/20/2018

6. List of components including manufacturer’s names and catalog numbers. 7. Internal wiring diagram and drawings indicating all connections to components

and numbered terminals for external connections. 1.4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit complete manuals including: 1. Copies of all Record Drawings and Wiring Diagrams, test reports, Power

System Study, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information.

2. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the requirements of Section 01781, Operation and Maintenance Data.

B. Record Drawings:

1. Furnish 3 hard copies and 3 digital copies of Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Section 01782, Record Documents, including: a. System Record Drawings: Include the following:

1) One line wiring diagram of the distribution system. 2) Accurate and detailed in place conduit and cable layouts with schedule

of conduit sizes and number and size of conductors. 3) Layouts of the power and lighting arrangements and the grounding

system. 4) Control schematic diagrams, with terminal numbers and all control

devices identified, for all equipment. 5) Point-to-Point Interconnection Wiring Termination Sheets

2. The Record Drawings shall reflect final equipment and field installation information.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials: Instruct the manufacturers and vendors as to the maximum shipping sizes of equipment that can be accommodated at the site.

B. Storage of Materials: Refer to and comply with the requirements of Section 01661,

Storage of Materials and Equipment.

C. Handling of Materials: Refer to and comply with the requirements of Section 01651, Transportation and Handling of Materials and Equipment.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: 1. Examine the site and existing facilities in order to compare them with the

Contract Documents with respect to the conditions of the premises, location of


26866 16050-6 12/20/2018

and connection to existing facilities and any obstructions which may be encountered.

2. Perform the Work with due regard to safety and in a manner that will not interfere with the existing equipment or in any way cause interruption of any of the functions of the plant.

3. Work shall be carried out with a minimum amount of disruption to the operation of the existing plant and with prior approval of OWNER. Submit for approval by OWNER, a detailed written procedure for work which affects operation of the existing plant, a detailed procedure for modifying any existing electrical equipment, including appropriate Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) required if equipment must remain energized while conducting work, anticipated time required to complete the Work, and the required shutdown time, if any.

4. Where the Work of CONTRACTOR ties in with existing installations, take prior precautions and safeguards in connecting the Work with the existing operating circuits so as to prevent any interruption to the existing operating circuits. The tying in of Work, installed under this Contract, with the existing circuits shall be performed only in the presence of OWNER. Advance notice will be required before any equipment is removed from service. Notify OWNER, in writing, of his intention to do such work, providing full details.

B. Demolition:

1. The demolition of electrical power distribution equipment, instrumentation/ control equipment, conduit, wire and appurtenances shall be in accordance with Section 02220, Demolitions.

1.7 CONTROL CABINETS AND PANELS

A. All outdoor panels: 1. With electronics and temperature sensitive instruments, shall be provided with

sunshade structures. Sunshade structures shall be constructed as shown on drawings.

2. Shall be Free-Stand Enclosures B. All control cabinet and panel materials shall meet the area classifications as stated is

Section 1.9, unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings. Proved the following types of enclosures:

1. NEMA 3R, 4 or 12 2. Corrosive Locations, NEMA 4X 3. Hazardous Locations, NEMA 7

C. Provide the following enclosure features: 1. NEMA 3R, 4 or 12 Enclosures:

a. Fabricate enclosures using minimum 14 gage steel for wall or frame mounted enclosures and minimum 12 gage for free standing enclosures. Keep steel free of pitting and surface blemishes.

b. Continuously weld all exterior seams and grind smooth. Also, surface grind complete removal of corrosion, burrs, sharp edges and mill scale.


26866 16050-7 12/20/2018

c. Reinforce sheet steel with steel angles where necessary to adequately support equipment and ensure rigidity and to preclude resonant vibrations.

d. Provide control panel with flatness within 1/16-inch over a 24-inch by 24-inch area, or flat within 1/8-inch for a larger surface. Verify flatness by using a 72-inch long straight edge. Limit out-of-flatness to gradual and in one direction only with no obvious depressions or wavy sections.

e. Use pan type construction for doors. Door widths are not to exceed 36-inches.

f. Mount doors with heavy duty hinge(s) with stainless steel hinge pins. g. Provide handle-operated, oil-tight, key-lockable three point stainless steel

latching system with rollers on latch-rods for easy door closing. h. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Hoffman 2) Hammond

i. Painting: 1) Completely clean all interior and exterior surfaces so they are free of

corrosive residue, oil, grease and dirt. Apply zinc phosphate for corrosion protection.

2) Apply one coat of primer interior and exterior surfaces immediately after corrosion protection has been applied.

3) Coat exterior surfaces with primer surface applied with sanding and cleaning between coats, until a Grade 1 finish can be produced on the finish coat.

4) Paint all exterior surfaces minimum of three finish coats of polyurethane enamel to ultimately produce a Grade 1 finish (super smooth; completely free of imperfections). Color to be selected by ENGINEER from complete selection of standard and custom color charts furnished by the manufacturer. Provide one extra quart of touch-up paint for each exterior finish color.

5) Provide compatible primer and finish paint with a low VOC, high solids polyurethane enamel. Paint interior surfaces with two coats of semi-gloss white polyurethane enamel.

6) Product and Manufacturer: a) Hi-Solids Polyurethane B65 W300 Series as manufactured by

Sherwin Williams, Inc b) Or equal.

3. NEMA 4X Enclosures:

a. Provide enclosures with Type 316 stainless steel construction. Wall or frame mounted enclosures fabricate using a minimum 14 gage steel. Free standing enclosures fabricate using a minimum 12 gage steel. Enclosures smaller than 14”x 12”x 6” fabricate using a minimum of 16 gage steel. Keep steel free of pitting and surface blemishes. Provide all surfaces with a smooth brushed finish.

b. Provide stainless steel fast-operating clamp assemblies on three sides of each


26866 16050-8 12/20/2018

door. c. Rolled lip around three sides of door and along top of enclosure opening. d. Provide a hasp and staple for padlocking. e. Provide 3-inch high channel base assembly, with solid bottom, drilled to mate

the panel to its floor pad for free-standing panel. f. Provide 5/16-inch diameter copper ground studs for the ground connection

points for all panel equipment and panel doors. g. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Hoffman 2) Hammond

4. NEMA 7 Enclosures;

a. House monitoring and measuring devices located in hazardous environments in explosion-proof control enclosures.

b. Enclosures rated for use in NEC Class 1, Groups C&D or Class II, Groups E, F & G applications and comply with UL and CSA standards.

c. Required Features: 1) Light weight and corrosion resistant copper-free aluminum 2) Integral, cast-on mounting lugs 3) Left side door hinges 4) Viewing windows sized to suit internally mounted components 5) Stainless steel cover bolts 6) Cad-plated steel mounting pans

d. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1) Adalet 2) Killark 3) Crouse-Hinds

4) Hoffman

1.8 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. All electrical equipment shall be capable of operating successfully at full-rated load, without failure, with an ambient outside air temperature range of -10 F to 131 F and an elevation of 2000 feet (MSL).

B. All electrical devices and equipment shall have ratings based on 75 C terminations. C. Mounting of electrical equipment on handrails is not allowed.

1.9 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS

A. Materials and equipment shall conform to the area classification(s) shown on the Drawings, specified and required.

B. Corrosive Locations: The following areas shall be considered corrosive locations:


26866 16050-9 12/20/2018

1. All outdoor areas.

C. Hazardous Locations: The following areas shall be considered hazardous areas as shown on the Drawings. 1. Interior of Wetwell Class 1, Division 1. 2. Exterior of Wetwell Class 1, Division 2.

Materials, equipment and incidentals in areas identified as hazardous locations shall meet NEC requirements for the Class and Division designated.

1.10 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

A. Schematic diagrams are provided for CONTRACTOR’S guidance in fulfilling the operational intent of the Contract Documents.

B. Responsibility belongs to CONTRACTOR to meet all safety and electrical codes, and

to provide all equipment, appurtenances and specialty items required to provide for complete and operable systems.

C. Review of control schemes submitted by CONTRACTOR does not relieve

CONTRACTOR of his contractual responsibility to provide complete and successfully operating systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Material: Laminated phenolic, engraved to show 1/2-inch high letters, Arial Font, unless stated else where in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS for a specific piece of equipment. The letters shall be black with white background or match existing.

B. Border: Minimum 1/8-inch around engraved print with extra length for fastening

devices.

C. Fasteners: Secured with #4-40, round-head, stainless steel, self-tapping screws. 2.2 WIRE MARKERS

A. Refer to Section 16122, 600 Volt Cable. 2.3 CONDUIT TAGS


26866 16050-10 12/20/2018

A. Refer to Section 16131, Rigid Conduit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide identification of each electrical item, in addition to the manufacturer’s nameplates, to identify the item’s function, and the equipment or system which it serves or controls.

B. Identify equipment by means of nameplates. Re-label existing equipment whose

designation has been changed. Identify potential arc flash hazard levels on equipment with the label specified in Section 16215 – Power Study.

C. Identify pull and terminal boxes with nameplates. Identify each box by a unique

number. Numbering system shall reflect the actual designations used in the field and as documented on wiring diagrams.

D. Process/Mechanical/Electrical equipment located outdoors shall be labeled by the

manufacturer: “For Outdoor Use”. E. Equipment Voltage Labels: 1. Voltage labels shall be installed on all equipment that has voltage in the

equipment. 2. Where applicable, install voltage label below the Arc Flash Warning label. 3. If the equipment has access to the backs or side of the gear, apply voltage labels

on all access panels. 4. Provide standard 3.5-inch by 5-inch, Black/Red on White rectangular labels to

match Figure 2.2.C below. 5. Apply a “Danger High Voltage” label to all medium equipment greater than 600

volts. 6. Product and Manufacture: Provide the following:

a. BRADY 1) DANGER 120 VOLTS, Part # 86784 2) DANGER 208 VOLTS, Part # 86782 3) DANGER 240 VOLTS, Part # 86785 4) DANGER 480 VOLTS, Part # 86783 5) DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE INSIDE, Part # 86861 b. Or Equal.


26866 16050-11 12/20/2018

Figure 2.2.C

F. Service Entrance Sections: 1. Install a Danger Electrical Hazard & Voltage placard on the front side of all

Service Entrance Sections. a. Placard to be Black/Red on White on aluminum and size to be 7 – inch by

10 – inch to match Figure 2.2.D below. b. Install 1.75 inch x 3.5 inch, type printed, high performance polyester

appropriate voltage level labels on the placard. Hand written is not allowed 2. If the Service Entrance Section has access to the backs or side of the gear, apply

voltage labels per Paragraph 2.2.C above and Arc Flash Potential Warning labels per Paragraph 2.2.B.2 on all access panels at each main breaker.

3. Product and Manufacture: Provide the following: a. BRADY

1) DANGER _____ VOLTS, Part # 43141 b. Or Equal .

Figure 2.2.D

G. Utility Sections: 1. When the Utility Sections has access to the back, apply a standard 3.5-inch by 5-

inch, Black/Red on White rectangular “DANGER” label stating to match Figure 2.2.E below and Arc Flash Potential Warning labels per Paragraph 2.2.B.2.

2. Product and Manufacture: Provide the following:


26866 16050-12 12/20/2018

a. BRADY b. Or Equal

Figure 2.2.E

H. Additional Sources of Power: 1. When more than one source of power is located inside the equipment apply

standard 3.5-inch by 5-inch, Black/Red on White rectangular “DANGER” label stating to match Figure 2.2.F below.

2. Product and Manufacture: Provide the following: a. BRADY b. Or Equal

Figure 2.2.F I. Generator Power Sources:

1. There are to be no Arc Flash Potential Labels printed or applied pertaining to any system that has generation power as an alternate source. For these sites apply at the automatic transfer switch a standard 3.5-inch by 5-inch, Black on Orange “WARNING” label stating to match Figure 2.2.G below

2. Product and Manufacture: Provide the following:


26866 16050-13 12/20/2018

a. BRADY b. Or Equal

+ + END OF SECTION + +


26866 16061-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16061

GROUNDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the Drawings,

specified and required to furnish and install complete grounding for the electricalsystems, structures and equipment.

2. Pump cans and buried piping shall be bonded to the ground grid.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of thefollowing, except where otherwise shown or specified:1. National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 250, Grounding.2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard No. 467, Electrical Grounding and Bonding

Equipment.3. ANSI-J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding [Earthing] and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:1. Manufacturer’s technical information for grounding materials proposed for use.2. Listing of grounding connector types identifying where they are to be used.3. Layouts of each structure ground grid.4. Test point construction details.5. Ground resistance test procedure.6. Results of ground resistance tests at each test point. Provide the test information and

results as required on form 16000-N in Specification 01331 – Reference Forms.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Bare Ground Cable:1. Material: Annealed, bare, stranded copper.2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide ground cable of one of the following:

a. Southwire Corporation.


26866 16061-2 12/20/2018

b. Service Wire Corporation.c. Encore Wire Company.

B. Ground Rods:1. Material: Copperclad rigid steel rods, 3/4-inch diameter, ten feet long.2. Manufacturer: Provide ground rods by one of the following:

a. ERICO.b. A.B. Chance Company.c. South Atlantic, L.L.C.d. Harger.

C. Grounding Connectors:1. Material: Pressure connectors shall be copper alloy castings, designed specifically for

the items to be connected, and assembled with Durium or silicone bronze bolts, nuts andwashers. Welded connections shall be by exothermic process utilizing molds, cartridgesand hardware designed specifically for the connection to be made.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide grounding connectors of one of the following:a. Pressure Connectors:

1) O.Z./Gedney, Division of General Signal Corporation.2) Burndy Corporation.

b. Welded Connections:1) Cadweld by Erico Products, Incorporated.2) Therm-O-Weld by Burndy Corporation.

D. Concrete Boxes:1. Material: High density reinforced concrete box with non-settling shoulders positioned

to maintain grade and facilitate back filling with steel checker plate screw down cover.2. Size:

a. Outside Locations: 15” x 22” minimum.b. Inside Locations: 10” x 17” minimum.

3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide box assembly from one of the following:a. Concrete Box:

1) Christy Concrete Products, Inc. Model #B1017.2) Or Equal.

b. Steel Cover:1) Christy Concrete Products, Inc. Model #B61JH labeled “GROUND”.2) Or Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 STRUCTURE GROUND SYSTEM

A. Provide ground grids as shown on the Drawings.


26866 16061-3 12/20/2018

B. Install No. 4/0 AWG bare copper cable. Install the cable around the exterior perimeter ofstructures, minimum 2 feet-6 inches below grade, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

C. Install ground rods where shown on the Drawings. Install additional ground rods, ifnecessary, to attain a resistance to ground of less than twenty five (25) ohms for each groundgrid.

D. For structures with steel columns, install 4/0 AWG ground cable. Install cable from grid toeach column around the perimeter of the structure. Connect cable to steel using exothermicwelds.

E. Connect grids to a continuous underground water pipe system, when practical.

F. Provide concrete ground test wells for measuring the ground resistance of each separatelyderived power source, including generators, prior to terminating in equipment. Provide 12”ground conductor slack loop in each well. Route ground conductor from test well toequipment in PVC conduit.

G. Weld all buried connections. Test points connections shall utilize pressure connectors.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Ground all electrical equipment in compliance with the National Electrical Code and the City of Phoenix Electrical Code.

B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be bare stranded copper cable of adequate sizeinstalled in metal conduit where necessary for mechanical protection. Ground conductors,pulled into conduits with non-grounded conductors, shall be insulated. Insulation shall begreen.

C. Panel Grounding:1) A minimum size of 4/0 AWG bare stranded copper cable shall be installed between the

ground grid and the panel enclosure grounding lug. The mounting frame for panelsshall be grounded to the ground grid.

2) A minimum size of 6 AWG insulated green stranded copper cable shall be installedbetween the ground grid and the isolated DC Ground Bus located on the enclosure sub-panel. This ground shall be installed in all panels that provide an isolated DC GroundBus.

D. A separate green insulated ground conductor sized per conduit schedule as shown onDRAWINGS or NEC requirements shall be pulled into conduits and connected utilizinggrounding conduit bushings.

E. Connect ground cable to piping by welding or brazing. Use copper bonding jumpers on allgasketed joints.


26866 16061-4 12/20/2018

F. Connect ground cable to equipment by means of lug compressed on cable end. Bolt lug toequipment frame using holes or terminals provided on equipment specifically for grounding.Do not install with hold down bolts. Where grounding provisions are not included, drillsuitable holes in locations designated by ENGINEER.

G. Connect to motors by bolting directly to motor frames, not to sole plates or supportingstructures.

H Connect to service water piping by means of copper clamps. Use copper bonding jumpers on gasketed joints.

I. Scrape bolted surfaces clean and coat with a conductive oxide- resistant compound.

J. Test all system grounding conductors for continuity of connection and electrical equipment.Provide in the final report a statement on equipment that was tested and document anydiscrepancies noted during the tests.

3.3 GROUND GRID TESTING

A. The CONTRACTOR shall contract the firm Arcadis as the Testing Firm to provide testing ofthe grounding electrode system as shown on DRAWINGS.

1. Performing the following ground single point test:a. Conduct test at the testing point(s) locations as shown on the DRAWINGS

using a clamp-on ground tester.1) Utilize the following test equipment:

a) Fluke, Model 1625 Kitb. Visually inspect the installed ground reference electrode or ground rods.

Verify that they are intact and accessible. Measure the ground system at thesetest points with the clamp-on meter. The results shall be recorded on theGround Test Point Data Sheet 16000-N as provided in Specification 01331 –Reference Forms.

c. Proved a Serial Key number for each test point shown on the DRAWINGS.Coordinate with OWNER to determine the Serial Key number. Update theRECORD DRAWINGS with the Serial Key number.

d. Install metal ground test point tags identified with a Serial Key number at eachtest point using stainless steel wire and zinc wire clamps. For any test pointswithin equipment, attach test point tag to exterior of equipment with epoxy.

e. Digitally Photograph clamp-on meter in place during test and include with testdata sheets. Digital images shall have the Serial Key identified for reference.Digital images of these test points with the clamp-on tester in place are toprovide a visual representation of the proper clamp-on testing placement andmethod and shall be inserted into the ground test sheet document.


26866 16061-5 12/20/2018

B. The grounding system maximum resistance shall not exceed twenty five (25) ohms undernormally dry conditions when measured by the resistance tester.

C. Install grounding test tags for each grounding test. Provide the following for each tag.Install tag with epoxy if unable to utilize wire and clamp.

Item Description Part No. Manufacturer1 Two Part Non-Sag Epoxy Hardman 2 Stainless Steel Wire/ 30 ft roll 38091 Brady 3 Zinc Wire Clamps 50/pk 38090 Brady 4 Aluminum Tag - Green 49908 Brady

D. Tests shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER and OWNER.



26866 16121-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16121

CONTROL (INSTRUMENTATION) CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install instrumentation,telephone cables and security system fiber cables.

2. The types of cable include the following:a. Single Conductor Control Cableb. Shielded Cablec. Unshielded Cabled. Telephone Cablee. Intercom and Paging System Cablef. Security Cable

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:1. Manufacturer's technical information for instrumentation cable proposed for use.2. Manufacturer’s technical information for telephone cable and underground

splicing for approval by the City of Phoenix, Information TechnologyDepartment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. 120 Volt or less Single Conductor Control Cables see Section 16122.2.1.A

B. Single Shielded Pair Cable:1. Tinned copper, nineteen strand, PVC insulated conductors, No. 16 AWG

minimum, twisted with aluminum-polyester shield, stranded tinned 16 AWGcopper drain wire and PVC black or gray outer jacket. Wire conductor colorsshall be black (-neg) and red (+pos). 600 Volt Tray Cable (TC) rated.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:a. Belden Company (No. 9342).b. Okonite Company.c. Dekoron Wire and Cable Company.


26866 16121-2 1/24/2019

E. Telephone Cable: 1. Bare, solid annealed copper, No. 22 AWG twisted pairs with solid polyolefin

insulation, color coded to telephone industry standards. Cable core shall be filled with a water proofing compound and wrapped with a non-hygroscopic core tape. Shielding shall be constructed of 0.005-inch solid copper. Cable shall be finished with a black polyethylene jacket. Cable shall contain the number of pairs as shown on the Drawings.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Anixter. b. Or equal.

F. Intercom and Paging System Cable:

1. Cable for the connection of the remote staff stations associated with the intercom or paging system shall be single pair shielded audio and data cable insulated for 600 volt, as manufactured by Belden, No. 8719, Mohawk equivalent, or equal.

2. Where paging system cables are shown on the Drawings, two single pairs of the specified cable shall be installed in the indicated conduit, one shall serve as a spare.

3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Belden, No. 8719. b. Mohawk. c. Or equal.

G. Cable Terminals: 1. Provide ferule compression fittings or UL listed fork type copper compression

terminals with nylon insulation for termination of cable at all terminal blocks. 2. For Panels provided under 17260, see Section 17260 - Field Wire Termination

for termination methods, product and manufacturer. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. T&B Sta-Kon. b. Burndy Insulug.

H. Cable/Wire Markers: 1. Provide only heat shrinkage type cable/wire identification, which shall be type-

written. 2. Wire number shall include the conduit number and be a consecutive number

based on the number of wires in a conduit, starting with number 1; example C18J – 1, where as C18J is the conduit number and 1 is the first wire. If ten wires are in a conduit, the numbering would be C18J-1 through C18J-10. No two wires are to have the same number.

3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide the following: a. W.H. Brady Company. (Part # PSPT-187 for a single conductor) b. W.H. Brady Company. (Part # PSPT-500-1W for a twisted pair shielded

cable)


26866 16121-3 1/24/2019

c. Or equal PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Separation Requirements:

1) Instrumentation Cables shall not be installed within the same conduits, raceways or cable trays with cables identified in Sections 16122, 16123 and 16124.

2) Telephone Cables are to be routed separately from other cables. 3) Intercom and Paging System Cables are to be routed separately from other

cables. 4) Fire Detection or Protection System Cables are to be routed separately from

other cables. 5) Security System Cables are to be routed separately from other cables unless

noted on the drawings.

6) Additional separation requirements:

a) Class 1 Control circuits (limited to 120 V, see NEC Section 725 Parts I & II for Class 1 Circuits) are to be routed separately from other cables. (Lights and starter circuits)

b) Class 2 Control circuits (limited current and less than 50 V, see NEC Section 725 Parts I & III for Class 2 Circuits) are to be routed separately from other cables. (Analog signal, digital communications, Discrete Inputs and Outputs)

c) Class 3 Control circuits (limited current and less than 120 V, see NEC Section 725 Parts I & III for Class 3 Circuits) are to be routed separately from other cables.

B. Install all cables complete with proper identification and terminations at both ends.

Cable outer installation shall be dressed at the end of the cables with heat shrink tubing prior to terminations. Utilizing electrical tape is not allowed for dressing.

C. Ground shield of shielded cables at one end only and as recommended by instrument

manufacturer. When multiple shielded cables are terminated on a designated analog terminal strip an insulated green with yellow strip wire is used to jumper between the


26866 16121-4 1/24/2019

shield terminals and at the end of the terminal strip terminate the shields to the isolated DC ground bar mounted in the panel.

D. Terminate stranded conductors with pre-insulated crimp type spade or barrel

compression fitting terminals properly sized to fit fastening device and wire size. E. Install and terminate vendor furnished cable in accordance with vendor equipment

requirements. F. Coordinate the installation and termination of the telephone cables with the City of

Phoenix, Information Technology Department. G. Install in conformance with the National Electrical Code and the City of Phoenix

Electrical Code. H. Identification:

1. Each cable and conductor shall be identified in each pull box and manhole with identification markers, which shall include the conduit number and/or cable number. The markers shall be self-laminating vinyl on white background and shall be printed using a Brady "XC Plus" printer or equal.

3.2 TESTING

A. Test all 600 volt wiring in accordance with the requirements of Section 16122, 600 Volt Cable.

B. Test shielded instrumentation cable shields with an ohmmeter for continuity along

the full length of the cable and for shield continuity to ground. The tests shall be witness by the OWNER and ENGINEER.

C. Connect shielded instrumentation cables to a calibrated 4 to 20 mADC signal

transmitter and receiver. Test at 4, 12 and 20 milliamp transmitter settings. D. Telephone cables shall be tested in accordance with and in the presence of the City of

Phoenix, Information Technology Department. A written proposed schedule shall be submitted a minimum of seven days prior to the testing of each telephone cable for inspection coordination.


CITY OF PHOENIX: Water Services Department/ PROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main and Water Main PROJECT NUMBER: WS90400067 and WS90501005

26866 16122-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16122 600 VOLT CABLE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the

Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install 600 volt cable. 2. The types of cable required include the following:

a. Insulated cable for installation in raceways. b. Cable for installation in trays. c. Direct burial cable. d. Direct burial cable duct.


A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable provisions of Regulatory Agencies below and others having jurisdiction: 1. Codes: Install cable in accordance with the Phoenix Electrical Code and

applicable local codes. 2. Tests by Independent Regulatory Agencies: Cable shall bear the label of the

Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. ASTM B 3, Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. ASTM B 8, Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-hard

or Soft. 3. ICEA S-66-524, Cross-linked-thermosetting- polyethylene-insulated Wire and

Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. 4. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 5. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code. 6. UL Standard No. 44, Wires and Cables, Rubber-Insulated. 7. UL Standard No. 83, Wires and Cables, Thermoplastic-Insulated. 8. IEEE Standard 971.

C. Factory Production Tests: 1. All wire and cable shall be factory tested in accordance with the requirements of

Underwriters' Laboratories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:


26866 16122-2 12/20/2018

1. Manufacturer's literature, specifications, and engineering data for 600 volt insulated cable proposed for use.

2. Manufacturer's literature for cable markers.

B. Test Records: Submit for review copies of written records of field insulation resistance test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Insulated Cable In Raceways: 1. Material: Single conductor copper cable conforming to ASTM B 3 and B 8 with

flame-retardant, moisture and heat resistant cross-linked polyethylene or thermoplastic insulation rated 90°C in dry locations and 75°C in wet locations and listed by UL as Type XHHW-2. Multi conductor cable shall only be utilized in cable tray applications or unless specified on drawings.

2. Application: Use Type XHHW-2 for all sizes, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wire Sizes: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG for power and lighting and No. 14

AWG for 120 volt control circuits 4. Stranding: All 600 volt cable shall be stranded. 5. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Okonite Company b. Encore Wire Corporation c. The Southwire Company d. Service Wire Company e. General Cable

B. Direct Burial Cable:

1. Single or multiconductor, stranded copper conductors, 60-mils butadiene styrene or ethylene propylene insulation, overall jacket of neoprene or PVC. Rated at 600 volts.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. The Okonite Company. b. American Insulated Wire Corporation.

C. Direct Burial Cable Duct:

1. Material: Multi conductor stranded copper cables; 600 volt cross-linked polyethylene insulated, factory assembled in a coilable, medium density polyethylene duct suitable for direct burial in earth for operation at a maximum conductor temperature of 90°C.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Cablecon by Integral Corporation. b. Tamaqua Duct System by Tamaqua Cable Products Corporation.


26866 16122-3 12/20/2018

D. Cable Connectors, Solderless Type:

1. For wire sizes up to and including No. 6 AWG, use compression type. Alarm and control wire shall be terminated using forked type connectors at terminals. If terminal block is crimp type, then the wire shall be terminated with a crimped ferrule or solder dipped.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Phoenix Contact – Clipline b. Thomas & Betts c. Weidmuller b. Burndy Hylug.

3. For wire sizes No. 4 AWG and above, use either compression type or bolted type with tinned-plated contact faces.

4. For wire sizes No. 250 kcmil and larger, use connectors with at least two cable clamping elements or compression indents and provision for at least two bolts for joining to apparatus terminal.

5. Properly size connectors to fit fastening device and wire size.

E. Cable Splices: 1. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, splices shall be made up with compres-

sion type copper splice fittings. Splices shall be taped and covered with materials recommended by the cable manufacturers, to provide insulation equal to that on the conductors.

2. For wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller, splices may be made up with preinsulated spring connectors.

3. For wet locations, splices shall be waterproofed. Compression type splices shall be waterproofed by a sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable, thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting resin into a mold that surrounds the joined conductor. Spring connector splices shall be waterproofed with a sealant-filler.

4. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Compression-Type Splices: 1) Burndy Hylink. 2) T&B Color-Keyed Compression Connectors.

b. Spring Connectors: 1) Buchanan B-Cap. 2) T&B Wire Connector.

F. Cable/Wire Markers:

1. Provide only heat shrinkage type cable/wire identification, which shall be type-written.

2. Wire number shall include the conduit number and be a consecutive number based on the number of wires in a conduit, starting with number 1; example C18J – 1, where as C18J is the conduit number and 1 is the first wire. If ten


26866 16122-4 12/20/2018

wires are in a conduit, the numbering would be C18J-1 through C18J-10. No two wires are to have the same number.

3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide the following: a. By W.H. Brady Company. (Part # PSPT-187 for a single conductor) b. Or Approved Equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all cables complete with proper identification and terminations at both ends. Check and correct for proper phase sequence and proper motor rotation.

B. Pulling:

1. Use insulating types of pulling compounds containing no mineral oil. 2. Pulling tension shall be within the limits recommended by the wire and cable

manufacturer. 3. Use a dynamometer where mechanical means are used. 4. Cut off section subject to mechanical means.

C. Bending Radius: Limit to a minimum of six times cable overall diameter. D. Slack: Provide maximum slack at all terminal points. E. Splices:

1. Where possible, install cable continuous, without splice, from termination to termination.

2. Where required, splice where shown on the Drawings or as approved by the ENGINEER and also where required for cable installation. All splices below grade, in manholes, handholes and wet locations shall be waterproofed.

3. Splices are not allowed in conduits. 4. All splices shall be pre-approved by ENGINEER.

F. Identification:

1. Each cable and conductor shall be identified in each pull box and manhole with identification markers, which shall include the conduit number and/or cable number. The markers shall be self-laminating vinyl on white background and shall be printed using a Brady "Tagus T300" printer or equal.

G. Phase Identification/Color Coding:

1. All three phase circuits shall be identified, which shall include the conduit number and phase, at switchgear, motor control centers, manholes (5 KV), cables and panelboards as "PHASE A"," PHASE B", and "PHASE C". All


26866 16122-5 12/20/2018

conductors not identified with a tag number shall be identified with a tag indicating the source.

2. Three phase 480 volt systems shall be color coded as follows: a. Phase A - Brown. b. Phase B - Orange. c. Phase C - Yellow. d. Neutral (if applicable) - White.

3. Single phase, 120/240 volt circuits shall be color coded as follows: a. Phase A - Black. b. Phase B - Red. c. Neutral - White.

4. Three phase, 208 volt systems shall be color coded as follows: a. Phase A - Black. b. Phase B - Red. c. Phase C - Blue. d. Neutral - White.

5. No. 6 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors. 6. No. 4 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each

end, wrapped in overlapping turns to cover an area of at least 2-inches. 7. All field wiring color shall be black unless otherwise noted.

3.2 TESTING

A. Test each electrical circuit after permanent cables are in place to demonstrate that the circuit and connected equipment perform satisfactorily and that they are free from improper grounds and short circuits.

B. Individually test 600 volt cable mechanical connections after installation and before

they are put in service with a calibrated torque wrench. Values shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations.

C. Individually test 600 volt cables for insulation resistance between phases and from

each phase to ground. Test after cables are installed and before they are put in service with a Megger whose rating is suitable for the tested circuit. Tests shall meet with the applicable specifications of IPCEA S-66-524 and NEMA WC7-1971. Tests shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER.

D. The insulation resistance for any given conductor shall not be less than the value

recommended by the IPCEA or a minimum of one megohm for 600 volt and less service, if not IPCEA listed. Any cable not conforming to the recommended value or which fails when tested under full load conditions shall be replaced with a new cable for the full length.

E. Install in accordance with the National Electrical Code and the City of Phoenix

Electrical Code.


26866 16122-6 12/20/2018

F. Where existing cables are spliced to cables provided under this Contract, the existing

cables shall be tested prior to splicing. Test cables at 1,000 volts DC for one minute. The entire spliced cable installation shall be re-tested after the splice is completed. Any existing cable which fails or has a value less than two megohms shall be brought to the ENGINEER’S attention and the splicing shall not proceed. Tests shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER.



26866 16131-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16131

PVC COATED RIGID METAL CONDUIT, RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT, ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING



Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install conduit and fittings to provide complete, coordinated and grounded raceway systems.

2. Conduit routings for various systems within buildings and other areas may not be shown on the Drawings. Responsibility to establish single line, riser and interconnection diagrams and any other related information shown on the Drawings, belongs to CONTRACTOR. Provide for the proper installation of all conduits for each system. Submit conduit routing and tagging meeting all specifications of Submittals Section 1.3-A and Section 2.1-G below to Engineer/Owner for review and approval prior to construction.

3. The following types and installation methods shall conform to the following:

a. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coated Rigid Metal Conduit (NEC Article 344)

1) Corrosive areas. 2) For exposed indoor conduit runs. 3) For exposed conduit runs in all outdoor areas. 4) For all underground bends (horizontal and vertical) in duct banks

that are 45º or more. 5) For non-encased underground conduit. 6) For VFD to motor runs. 7) For conduit lighting runs for single conduits non-encased (an

alternative to Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC) encased) b. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): Schedule 40 PVC conduit. (NEC

Article 352) 1) For masonry walls. 2) For concrete encased duct bank runs. 3) For conduits embedded in structural concrete slabs. 4) For under structural slabs. c. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) (NEC Article 358):

1) For metal stud walls where shown on CONTRACT DRAWINGS. 2) For above ceilings where shown on CONTRACT DRAWINGS. 3) EMT is not to be used in buildings which have PVC coated rigid

metal conduit systems.


26866 16131-2 12/20/2018

B. Coordination: 1. Conduit runs shown are diagrammatic. Coordinate conduit installation with

piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures and other systems and equipment and locate so as to avoid interferences.

2. For conduits to be embedded in concrete slabs, confirm adequate slab thickness and coordinate location of conduits with placement of reinforcing steel, water stops and expansion joints.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations

of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 2. UL Standard No. 6, Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit. 3. UL Standard No. 651, Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit. 4. ANSI C80.4, Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metal Tubing 5. NEMA TC2, Electrical Plastic Tubing, Conduit and Fittings. 6. NEMA TC3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 7. NEMA RN 1, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Rigid Metal

Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit 8. TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications

Pathways and Spaces 9. BICSI Customer-Owned Outside Plant Design Manual

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts for the conduit, fittings, supports, conduit

identification tags, orange electrical ID tape, and warning ribbon proposed for use. Provide engraved samples of conduit identification tags.

2. Construction details of conduit racks and other conduit support systems. 3. Layout drawings showing proposed routing of exposed conduits, conduits

embedded in structural concrete and conduits directly buried in earth. Drawings shall show locations of intermediate termination panels (ITP's), pull boxes and penetrations in walls and floor slabs. Drawings of embedded conduits shall include cross-sections showing the thickness of the concrete slabs and the locations of conduits with respect to reinforcing steel and waterstops. Tag conduits per conduit schedule shown on drawings.

4. Drawing shall be electronically produced to maintain quality and clarity of presentation when re-produced, even when reduced to half size (11” x 17”).

5. Provide manufacturer’s proof of certification for PVC coated rigid metal conduit for all installer’s supervisors.

B. Record Drawings: Show the actual routing of exposed and concealed conduit runs

on the Record Drawings conforming to the requirements of Section 01782-1.1, Record Documents.


26866 16131-3 12/20/2018

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS - CONDUIT AND CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit: 1. Conduit, Elbows and Couplings: a. Material: Rigid, heavy wall, mild steel, interior coating of 2-mil thick

urethane, tapered threads, carefully reamed ends, 3/4-inch NPS minimum size for exposed, 1 inch for embedded, encased, or otherwise inaccessible, with a factory exterior coating of 40-mil thick polyvinyl chloride.

b. Color: All PVC coated materials shall be standard dark gray. c. Tools: Power drives, chucks, z-wrenches, vises, and cutting or bending

tools shall follow recommendations for tooling in manufacturer’s installation guide. Use touch-up compounds recommended by the manufacturer for repair of minor damage to interior urethane or exterior PVC factory coatings.

d. Manufacturer: Provide conduit and fittings of one of the following: 1) Robroy Industries, “Perma-Cote”. 2) Robroy Industries, “Plasti-Bond”. 3) OCAL Inc.

2. Fittings and Outlet Bodies: a. Material and Construction: Cast gray iron alloy, cast malleable iron

bodies and covers with a factory coating of 40-mil thick polyvinyl chloride, an interior coating of 2-mil thick urethane and Form 7 tongue-in-groove V-seal gasket on sizes ½” through 2”. Conduit or fittings having areas with thin or no coating shall be unacceptable. Do not use "LB" fittings for conduit sizes of 1¼” or larger. Use type "LBD" fittings wherever the use of fittings for conduit sizes of 1¼” or larger is unavoidable. All units shall be threaded type with five full threads. Material shall conform to ANSI C80.4.

b. Use: Provide conduit fittings and outlet bodies in all corrosive locations. c. Manufacturer: Provide PVC coated conduit fittings and outlet bodies of

one of the following: 1) Robroy Industries, “Perma-Cote”. 2) Robroy Industries, “Plasti-Bond”. 3) OCAL Inc.

3. Conduit Hubs: a. Material: Threaded conduit hub, vibration proof, weatherproof with

captive O-ring seal, zinc metal with insulated throat and factory coating of 40-mil thick polyvinyl chloride and smooth urethane interior coating.

b. Use: Provide for all PVC coated conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets and other enclosures located in all areas.

c. Locknuts are not allowed. Use hubs only. d. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Robroy Industries, “Perma-Cote”. 2) Robroy Industries, “Plasti-Bond”.


26866 16131-4 12/20/2018

3) OCAL Inc. B Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit:

1. PVC Plastic Conduit: a. Conduit Material: Schedule 40 PVC plastic, 90°C rated, conforming to

NEMA TC-2 and UL No. 651. b. Fittings: Elbows, bodies, terminations, expansions and fasteners of same

material and manufacturer as base conduit. Materials shall conform to NEMA TC-3 and UL No 514.

c. Provide cement and primer by same manufacturer as base conduit. d. Manufacturer: Provide conduit and fittings of one of the following:

1) PW Eagle 2) Prime Electrical Products 3) Cantex

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: 1. Elbows, Fittings, and Couplings:

a. Material: Rigid-type mild steel, galvanized (zinc) exterior, organic lubricated interior, threadless 3/4-inch NPS minimum size.

b. Couplings and connections: Compression or threaded type only. Set screw type shall not be permitted.

c. Elbows: Factory formed of same material specified for EMT conduit. d. Certifications: Material shall conform to UL-797, ANSI C80.3.

Conduit, elbows, couplings, etc. shall bear UL listing and manufacturer’s name.

e. Use of EMT type raceway systems shall only be permitted where specified in Paragraph 1.1.A.4.c, above.

f. Manufacturer: Provide EMT conduit, elbows, fittings and couplings of one of the following: 1) Allied Tube and Conduit. 2) LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. c) Wheatland Tube Company.

2.2 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS

A. Conduit Bushings:

1. Insulated Bushings: Malleable iron body with plastic liner, threaded type with steel clamping screw. Provide with bronze grounding lug, as required.

2. Use: Provide for all conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets, other enclosures and raceways not requiring a hub.

3. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. O-Z/Gedney. b. Appleton Electric Company. c. Thomas and Betts.

B. Conduit Tags:

1. Tag all conduits at the ends and in all intermediate boxes, chambers, hand holes and other enclosures.


26866 16131-5 12/20/2018

2. Conduit tags shall be yellow, 1-1/2-inch diameter, round, aluminum tags,

laser engraved or standard engraving with the conduit number as shown on the Conduit and Cable Schedule. Punched or stamped lettering is not allowed. Font shall be 1/4-inch Arial or Helvetica. The conduit tags shall be manufactured by Brady, Catalog No. 49900, Or Equal.

3. Each tag shall be attached with nylon-coated 48-mil stainless steel wire and fasteners, as manufactured by Brady, Catalog No. 38091, and zinc wire clamps, double ferrule design, as manufactured by Brady Catalog No. 38090 to secure the stainless steel wire. Where this method is not practical, fasten to the adjacent masonry by means of expansion bolts.

C. Warning Ribbon:

1. Over all underground duct banks and direct cables, install warning ribbon approximately 12-inches below finished grade and centered on direct buried cables, electrical ductbanks and conduits without ductbank encasement. Provide 6-inch wide, 4-mil thickness underground metallic-lined marking tape with red polyethylene film on top and with clear polyethylene film on the bottom. The tape shall be permanently imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW”.

2. Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Brady "Identoline"; Services and Materials "Buried Underground Tape" b. Somerset (Thomas & Betts) "Protect-A-Line"

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in conformance of NEC, Articles 344, 352 and 358. Cap all conduits, ducts and raceways during construction to protect from debris entering and blocking the circuit installation.

B. Supports:

1. Rigidly support conduits by clamps, hangers or strut channels. 2. Support single conduits by means of one-hole pipe clamps in combination

with one-screw back plates, to raise conduits from the support surface. Support multiple runs of conduits on trapeze type hangers with Type 316 Stainless Steel horizontal members and Type 316 Stainless Steel threaded hanger rods, Kindorff or equal. Rods shall be not less than 3/8-inch diameter.

3. PVC coated rigid metal conduit runs, beam clamps, U-bolts, pipe straps, clamp back spacers, clamp hangers and supports shall have a factory applied PVC coating or be stainless steel. Hardware shall be Type 316 Stainless Steel.

4. Right angle beam clamps and U bolts shall be specially formed and sized to snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit.


26866 16131-6 12/20/2018

C. Fastenings: Fasten raceway systems rigidly and neatly to supporting structures by

the following methods: 1. To Wood: Type 316 Stainless Steel wood screws. 2. To Hollow Masonry Units: Type 316 Stainless Steel toggle bolts. 3. To Brick Masonry: Type 316 Stainless Steel Price expansion bolts, or equal. 4. To Concrete: Refer to spec section 05051. 5. To Steel: Type 316 stainless steel welded threaded studs, beam clamps or

bolts with lock-washers or locknuts.

D. PVC Coated Rigid Metal Exposed Conduit: 1. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and

installation manual. Installers shall be certified by the manufacturer before installation begins.

2. Install with manufacturer’s installation tools and compounds to prevent damage to the PVC coating.

3. Repair minor damage to interior urethane and exterior PVC coating with manufacturers recommended touch-up compound.

4. Install parallel or perpendicular to structural members or walls. 5. Wherever possible, run in groups. Provide conduit racks of suitable width,

length and height and arranged to suit field conditions. Provide support at manufacturer’s recommended distances, or at every ten feet minimum.

6. Install on structural members in protected locations. 7. Locate clear of interferences. 8. Maintain 6-inches from hot fluid lines and 1/4-inch from walls. 9. Install vertical runs plumb. Unsecured drop length not to exceed 12 feet. 10. Provide necessary reducers where equipment furnished cannot accept 3/4-

inch conduit.

E. Conduit Embedded in Structural Concrete: 1. Separation: Three times outer diameter of larger conduit center to center. 2. Minimum Slab Thickness: Confirm that concrete slab thickness is sufficient

for embedding conduits. a. For embedding conduit sizes up to 1-1/2 inches, the minimum slab

thickness shall be 7-inches plus the outer diameter of the conduit or conduits, where conduits cross.

b. For embedding conduits larger than 1-1/2 inches, the minimum slab thickness shall be five times the outer diameter of the conduit where conduits do not cross and six times the outer diameter of the larger conduit where conduits do cross.

3. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,000 PSI. Concrete used for ductbanks shall be Type 2 with red color added as specified in “Cast-in-Place Concrete” Section 03300.

4. Run conduits in center of slab, where applicable. 5. Run conduits in spacers to maintain recommended minimum, even spacing. 6. Run conduits above waterstops.


26866 16131-7 12/20/2018

7. Before concrete is placed, make the necessary location measurements of the conduits to be embedded so that the information is available to prepare Record Drawings.

8. All conduits entering or exiting concrete shall be PVC coated galvanized rigid metal, for a minimum of 12-inches from the concrete edge.

F. Underground Conduits that are non-encased: PVC coated rigid metal conduits. 1. Install individual underground conduits a minimum of 24-inches below

grade, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or as required to avoid existing obstructions.

2. Perform all excavation, bedding, backfilling and surface restoration including pavement replacement, where required.

3. Install warning ribbon 12-inches below finished grade over all conduits. 4. Make conduit connections watertight by applying PVC touch-up compound

at the sealing sleeve joints.

G. Empty Conduits: 1. Spare conduits shall be cleaned, swabbed, and mandreled to verify viability

for future use. 2. Install a true tape or mule tape in each empty conduit and cap conduits not

terminating in boxes with permanent fittings designed for the purpose. Pulling rope or tape shall be constructed of polyester and factory lubricated. Nylon is not allowed.

3. Identify each empty conduit with a conduit tag conforming to the requirements of Paragraph 2.1.G., above, showing the conduit number shown on the Drawings.

H. Field Bends: Use manufacturer supplied field bends whenever possible. No

indentations. Diameter of conduit shall not vary more than 15 percent at any bend. Maximum total amount of bends shall not exceed 270 .

Length of run between manholes shall be limited to: 1. 300 feet with 270 in bends. 2. 600 feet with 180 in bends. 3. 1000 feet with 90 in bends. I. Joints:

1. Make joints tight and ground thoroughly. 2. Use standard tapered pipe threads for conduit and fittings. 3. Cut conduit ends square and ream to prevent damage to wire and cable. 4. Use a degreasing spray to thoroughly clean field cut threads, and internal

reams to insure the touch-up compound will adhere to the unprotected metal. 5. Apply urethane touch-up compound to all joints, field cut threads, and

internal reams before assembly for corrosion protection and visible identification of proper installation.

6. Use full threaded couplings. Split couplings not permitted. 7. During installation, install with manufacturer’s installation tools to prevent

damage to PVC coating. Replace conduit with wrench marks.


26866 16131-8 12/20/2018

J. Moisture Protection:

1. Plug or cap conduit ends at time of installation to prevent entrance of moisture or foreign materials.

2. Make underground and embedded conduit connections water-tight. 3. Through Wall Seals and Conduit Sealing Bushings: Install for all conduits

passing through concrete slabs, floors, walls or concrete block walls. a. For conduits and cables in new construction and passing through exterior

subsurface walls and exterior concrete walls, use Type WSK and WSCS through wall seals as manufactured by O-Z/Gedneyl.

b. For conduits and cables in new construction and passing through concrete floors and floor slabs, use Type FSK and FSCS floor seals, as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney.

c. For conduits passing through new exterior block walls or through core-drilled holes in existing exterior subsurface walls, exterior concrete walls, floor slabs and roof slabs, use Type CSMI sealing bushing at the inside of the structure and Type CSMC sealing bushing at the outside of the structure. Sealing bushings shall be as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney.

d. For conduits passing through existing interior concrete walls or floors and interior block walls, provide CSMC or CSMI type sealing bushings as manufactured by O-Z/Gedneyl.

4. Drainage: Pay particular attention to drainage for conduit runs. Wherever possible, install conduit runs so as to drain to one end and away from buildings. Avoid pockets or depressions in conduit runs. Where conduits enter buildings below grade, seal inside of conduit to form a watertight seal around cables to prevent the entry of water into building.

a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1) Type DUX - Duct Sealing Compound, as manufactured by O-

Z/Gedney 2) Type FST Foam Sealant, as manufactured by American Polywater

Corp 5. Seal all conduit openings within control and instrumentation panels and

distribution equipment with Type DUX - Duct Sealing Compound, as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, to provide a water/bug-tight seal.

a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1) Type DUX - Duct Sealing Compound, as manufactured by O-

Z/Gedney 2) Type FST Foam Sealant, as manufactured by American Polywater

Corp K. Corrosion Protection:

1. Conduit Curb: a. For conduits routed in concrete slabs or floors and stub-ups through the

floor, provide a 2-inch high concrete curb, extending 2-inches from the outer surface of the conduit penetrating the floor, to prevent corrosion. For floor-mounted equipment, the concrete equipment base shall be in lieu of the concrete curb.


26866 16131-9 12/20/2018

b. Conduit stub-ups shall be a 90 degree PVC coated rigid metal conduit elbow. PVC coated elbow shall extend slightly above the top of the concrete curb or equipment base. Should the elbow not reach this height, provide PVC coated conduit extension to accommodate requirements. Provide PVC coated coupling/fitting for transition from conduit in slab to elbow.

c. For conduits stubbing up and terminating at equipment enclosure mounted on a concrete equipment base, provide RNC stub-up and bell end.

d. For conduits stubbing up and extending to boxes, cabinets and other enclosures above the concrete curb in wet and dusty areas provide PVC coated conduit coupling/fittings between the PVC coated elbow and PVC coated rigid metal conduit for transition between the two conduit types.

e. For conduits stubbing up and extending to boxes, cabinets and other enclosures above the concrete curb or equipment base in corrosive areas, continue the conduit system with PVC coated rigid metal conduit.

f. Conduit into a protected base or equipment enclosure shall be RNC with RNC bell end.

2. Dissimilar Metals: Take every action to prevent the occurrence of electrolytic action between dissimilar metals

L. Reused Existing Conduits: 1. Pull rag swab through conduits to remove water and to clean conduit prior to

installing new cable. 2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed. 3. Pull mandrel through conduit, if necessary, to remove obstructions.

M. Core drill for individual conduits passing through existing concrete slabs and

walls. Obtain authorization from OWNER prior to core drilling. Prior to core drilling, drill sufficient number of small exploratory holes to establish that the area to be core drilled is free of existing embedded conduits. Seal spaces around conduit in accordance with Section 01723, Cutting and Patching, and the wall penetration details as shown on the Drawings.

N. Non-metallic Conduit:

1. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Join sections in accordance with manufacturer’s installation procedures for

push-fit, bell and spigot type joints, if applicable, or with manufacturer’s recommended cement and primer.

3. During installation provide expansion fittings for expansion and contraction to compensate for temperature variations. Expansion fittings shall be watertight and of the type suitable for direct burial.

4. Make transition to PVC coated galvanized rigid metal conduit before making turns into enclosures, cabinets, termination boxes, pull boxes, etc.

5. For expansion/deflection fittings as shown on CONTRACT DRAWINGS..


26866 16131-10 12/20/2018

O. Wall Penetrations: 1. CONTRACTOR shall ensure conduits that penetrate walls allow for the

maintenance of minimum bend radius during the installation of cable. 2. Submit shop drawings for approval for each wall penetration.

3.2 TESTING

A. Test conduits by pulling through each conduit a cylindrical mandrel not less than

two pipe inside diameters long, having an outside diameter equal to 90 percent of the inside diameter of the conduit.

B. All conduits greater than 1.5 inches in size shall be swabbed and mandrel cleaned.

This process shall be 100 percent witness inspected and each conduit inspection shall be identified and documented.



26866 16132-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16132

FLEXIBLE CONDUITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install flexible metallic conduit and fittings.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. Phoenix Electrical Code, Article 351, Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. 2. UL Standard No. 360, Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts and technical information for flexible conduit and

fittings proposed for use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Flexible Conduit (Non-hazardous Areas): 1. Material: Flexible galvanized steel core with smooth, abrasion resistant,

liquid-tight, polyvinyl chloride cover and color to be black. Continuous copper ground built in for sizes 3/4-inch through 1-1/4-inch. Material shall be UL listed.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Sealtite UA by Anaconda Metal Hose Division, Anaconda American Brass

Company. b. Liquatite Type L.A. by Electric-Flex Company. c. Or equal.

B. Flexible Conduit (Class 1, Group D, Division 1, Hazardous Areas):


26866 16132-2 12/20/2018

1. Material: Flexible brass inner core with bronze outer braid. Steel, brass or bronze end fittings. Minimum of 12-inches in length.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Type ECGJH or ECLK by Crouse Hinds Company. b. Type EXGJH or EXLK by Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal.

C. Flexible Conduit Fittings:

1. Material and Construction: Malleable iron with zinc electroplating finish. Fittings shall adapt the conduit to standard threaded connections, shall have an inside diameter not less than that of the corresponding standard conduit size and shall be UL listed.

2. Use: Provide on flexible conduit in non-hazardous and Class 1, Division 2 hazardous areas.

3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Crouse-Hinds Company. b. Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal.

D. PVC Coated Conduit Fittings:

1. Material and Construction: Malleable iron with standard finish and 40-mil PVC exterior coating. Fittings shall adapt the conduit to standard threaded connections, shall have an inside diameter not less than that of the corresponding standard conduit size.

2. Use: Provide on flexible conduit in areas designated as corrosive locations. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Robroy Industries. b. Permacote Industries. c. OCAL Incorporated. d. Or equal.


A. Install at motors, transformers and equipment which are subject to vibration or require movement for maintenance purposes. Provide necessary reducer where equipment furnished cannot accept 3/4-inch size flexible conduit. Limit flexible conduit length to three feet maximum.

B. Install in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code requirements.



26866 16133-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16133 SEALING FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install conduit sealing fittings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. Phoenix Electrical Code, Article 500, Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 2. UL Standard 886, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous

Locations, Class 1, Groups A, B, C and D and Class II, Groups E, F and G. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts and technical information for sealing fittings

proposed for use. 2. Listing of locations where fittings are to be used.


A. Materials and Construction: 1. Cast gray iron alloy or cast malleable iron or copper free aluminum bodies with

zinc electroplate and lacquer or enamel finish. 2. Ample opening with threaded closure for access to conduit hub for making dam. 3. In corrosive locations, fittings shall include a factory applied 40-mil PVC

coating. B. Sealing fiber for forming the dam within the hub and the sealing compound shall be

approved for use with the fittings furnished, and shall be products of the fitting manufacturer.


26866 16133-2 12/20/2018

C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Crouse Hinds Company. 2. Appleton Electric Company. 3. Or equal.


A. Install for hazardous locations as required by Phoenix Electrical Code, and where as shown on the Drawings.

B. Select a fitting for the proper use in respect to the mounting position.

C. Use oversized fittings with reducing bushings when necessary to maintain cable fill

requirements of the conduit system. + + END OF SECTION + +

CITY OF PHOENIX; Water Services Department PROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main and Water Main PROJECT NUMBER: WS90400067 and WS90501005

26866 16134-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16134 EXPANSION/DEFLECTION FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install conduit expansion and deflection fittings.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 2. UL Standard 514, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings. 3. UL Standard 467, Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts and technical information for expansion and

deflection fittings proposed for use. 2. Listing of locations where fittings are to be installed.


A. Cast gray iron alloy or bronze end couplings, malleable iron or hot dipped galvanized body, stainless steel clamps and tinned copper braid bonding jumper. Fitting to be watertight, corrosion-resistant UL listed and compatible with the conduit system.

B. Features:

1. Expansion/Deflection Fittings. a. Axial expansion or contraction up to 3/4-inch. b. Angular misalignment up to 30 degrees. c. Parallel misalignment up to 3/4-inch.

2. Expansion Fittings. a. Expansion/Contraction, 8-inch total movement.

CITY OF PHOENIX; Water Services Department PROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main and Water Main PROJECT NUMBER: WS90400067 and WS90501005

26866 16134-2 12/20/2018

C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Type DX for expansion/deflection or AX for expansion only by O-Z Gedney

Company. 2. Type XD for expansion/deflection or XJ for expansion only by Crouse Hinds

Company. 3. Type DF for expansion/deflection or XJ for expansion only by Appleton Electric

Company. 4. Or equal.


A. Install fittings in conformance with NEC.

B. Install expansion fittings on exposed conduit runs crossing structural expansion joints and where necessary to compensate for thermal expansion and contraction. Install expansion fittings on exposed conduit runs exceeding 200 feet.

C. Install expansion/deflection fittings on embedded conduit runs crossing structural

expansion joints. Install fittings above waterstops.

D. In addition to as stated above, install expansion/deflection fittings as shown on CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

E. Where required in non-metallic conduit and duct systems, provide rigid metal conduit

nipples and metal rigid to PVC adapters for connection to fittings. Ensure that joints exposed to water are made watertight.



26866 16135-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16135

PULL BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install pull boxes. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. Phoenix Electrical Code, Article 370, Outlet, Switch and Junction Boxes, and

Fittings. 2. UL Standard No. 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes. 3. UL Standard No. 886, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous

Locations. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for pull boxes proposed for use.


A. Pull Boxes: Provide boxes based upon location in accordance with NEMA requirements and as required for the area classification specified in Section 16050, General Provisions. 1. Material and Construction:

a. Cast gray iron alloy with hot-dip galvanized finish or cast malleable iron bodies and covers.

b. Neoprene gaskets. Gaskets shall be of an approved type designed for the purpose. Improvised gaskets are not acceptable.

c. Stainless steel cover bolts. d. External mounting lugs. e. Drilled and tapped conduit holes.


26866 16135-2 12/20/2018

f. Boxes where conduits enter a building below grade shall have 1/4-inch drain hole.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide pull boxes of one of the following: a. Appleton Electric Company. b. O-Z/Gedney Company. c. Hoffman Engineering Company. d. Or equal.

3. Large boxes not generally available in cast construction may be fabricated of copper-free aluminum alloy or Type 316 stainless steel as required by location.

4. Boxes for installation in areas classified as hazardous locations shall be explosion-proof and shall comply with the requirements of UL Standard No. 886.

5. For flush-mounted pullboxes in slabs or pavement, provide vehicular traffic-bearing covers, where shown on the Drawings.

6. Pull boxes embedded in concrete slabs shall be cast iron. Pull boxes located in wet, corrosive or outdoor areas shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel. All other areas shall be NEMA 12.

7. All boxes shall be identified in accordance with Section 16050, General Provisions.

8. All inside plant pull boxes used for communications, signal, or fiber optic cabling shall meet the requirements listed in table below:

Maximum Trade Size of Conduit

(inches)

Minimum Box Size (inches)

For Each Additional

Conduit Increase Width

(Inches) Width Length Depth 1 4 16 3 2

1.25 6 20 3 3 1.5 8 27 4 4 2 8 36 4 5

2.5 10 42 5 6 3 12 48 5 6

3.5 12 54 6 6 4 15 60 8 8


A. Mount boxes so that sufficient access and working space is provided and maintain a minimum of 1/4-inch from walls.


26866 16135-3 12/20/2018

B. Securely fasten boxes to walls or other structural surfaces on which they are mounted. Provide independent stainless steel or FRP supports where no walls or other structural surface exists. Do not locate pull boxes on handrails.

C. Install pull boxes where shown on the Drawings. In addition, install pull boxes in

conduit runs containing more than three 90 degree bends and in runs exceeding 200 feet. For communications, signal, and fiber optic cabling conduit runs install pull boxes in runs containing more than two 90 degree bends and in runs exceeding 100 feet.

D. Provide removable, flame-retardant, insulating cable supports in all boxes with any

dimension exceeding three feet. E. Field apply PVC touch up to scratched PVC boxes damaged as a result of installa-

tion. All touch up work shall be in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

F. Size pull boxes in accordance with the requirements of the Phoenix Electrical Code.



26866 16136-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16136

OUTLET BOXES



Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install outlet boxes for mounting wiring devices and lighting fixtures.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. Phoenix Electrical Code, Article 370, Outlet, Switch and Junction Boxes and

Fittings. 2. UL Standard No. 514, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturers technical information for outlet boxes proposed for use.


A. Device Boxes: 1. Material: Cast gray iron alloy, or cast malleable iron, with zinc electroplate

finish in wet locations and zinc-coated sheet steel in dusty locations. Cast boxes shall be hub type and include external mounting lugs. In corrosive locations, boxes shall include a factory applied 40-mil PVC coating. In dusty locations, where conduit is installed concealed, boxes shall be steel galvanized and shall include suitable extension rings and covers, as required.

2. Device Cover Plates: a. Stainless steel Type 302 alloy for indoor finished areas. b. Gasketed spring door type for wet and corrosive locations. Plates in

corrosive locations shall include a factory applied 40-mil PVC coating. c. Integral with device for hazardous locations. d. Stainless steel screws and hardware.


26866 16136-2 12/20/2018

3. Manufacturer: Provide device boxes of one of the following: a. Crouse-Hinds Company. b. Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal.


A. Fasten boxes rigidly and neatly to supporting structures. B. For units mounted on masonry or concrete walls, provide suitable 1/2-inch spacers to

prevent mounting back of box directly against wall. C. Leave no open conduit holes in boxes. Close unused openings with capped bushings. D. Label each circuit in boxes and identify in accordance with Section 16122, 600 Volt

Cable. E. Install in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code.


CITY OF PHOENIX: Water Services Department PROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main and Water Main PROJECT NUMBER: WS90400067

26866 16137-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16137

UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install underground duct banks.

B. Coordination: Duct bank routing on the Drawings is diagrammatic. Coordinate

installation with piping and other underground systems and structures and locate clear of interferences.

C. Standard conduit chairs shall be used for all conduit raceway supports. C. Definition: A duct bank is one or more buried electrical conduits.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Layouts showing the proposed routing of duct banks and the locations of

manholes, handholes and areas of reinforcement. 2. Profiles of duct banks showing crossings with piping and other underground

systems. 3. Typical cross sections. 4. Installation procedures.

B. Record Drawings: Include the actual routing of underground duct runs on Record Drawings in accordance with Section 01782, Record Documents.



26866 16137-2 12/20/2018

A. Duct: Schedule 40 PVC conduit and fittings in accordance with Section 16131 - PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit, and Electrical Metallic Tubing.

B. Exposed: PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit: PVC coated rigid metal

conduit and fittings in accordance with Section 16131, Rigid Conduit, if required. C. Backfill: Select backfill in accordance with Section 02315, Structural Excavation

and Backfill. D. Reinforcement: In accordance with Section 03200, Concrete Reinforcement. E. Concrete: In accordance with Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.


A. Duct banks shall be installed as follows: 1. For small direct burial duct banks (3 conduits or less) use of PVC coated rigid

metal conduit. Concrete and reinforcement are not required. Warning tape is required.

2. For larger duct banks, use PVC conduit, to be encasement, reinforcement and warning tape. All bends (vertical and horizontal) of 45º or more require PVC coated rigid metal conduit.

B. Excavation and backfilling required for duct bank installation. C. All duct bank installations and penetrations through foundation walls shall be

watertight and in accordance with Section 16131 - PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit, and Electrical Metallic Tubing.

D. Top of duct banks shall be a minimum of 24-inches below grade, unless otherwise

approved by the ENGINEER. E. Assemble duct banks using non-magnetic saddles, spacers and separators. Position

the separators to provide 3-inch minimum concrete separation between the outer surfaces of the ducts. Side forms are only required to prevent excessive widening of the duct bank where over excavation has occurred.

F. Provide a 3-inch minimum concrete covering on sides, top and bottom of concrete

envelopes around conduits. Concrete covering size shall be as shown on the Drawings. Add red oxide to concrete for easy identification during subsequent excavation. The red oxide is to be added in the concrete truck prior to the concrete


26866 16137-3 12/20/2018

being placed. Red oxide concrete shall include the entire duct bank, top and bottom unless under a slab.

G. Firmly fix ducts in place during placing of concrete. Carefully place and vibrate the

concrete to ensure filling of all spaces between ducts. H. Conduits entering floor mounted equipment, such as, switchgear compartments,

motor control centers, transformers shall terminate with PVC coated rigid metal conduit factory 90º elbows, RNC risers and bell ends.

I. Reinforce all duct banks.

1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, reinforce with No. 4 longitudinal steel bars placed at each corner and along each face at a maximum parallel spacing of 18-inches on centers, and No. 3 tie-bars transversely placed at 18-inch maximum longitudinal intervals. Overlap of No. 3 tie-bars shall be a minimum of 4-inches.

2. Maintain a maximum clearance of 1-inch from bars to the edge of the concrete encasement.

3. Install dowel reinforcement rebar where duct bank meets other concrete structures.

J. Do not backfill with material containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large

or sharply angular substances, corrosive material or other materials which can damage or contribute to corrosion of ducts or cables or prevent adequate compaction of fill.

K. Slope duct runs for drainage toward manholes and away from buildings with a slope

of approximately 3-inches per 100 feet. L. Install a bare stranded copper duct bank ground cable (4/0 or as shown on drawings)

in each duct bank envelope. Make ground electrically continuous throughout the entire duct bank system. Connect ground cable to building and station ground grid or to equipment ground buses. In addition, connect ground cable to steel conduit extensions of the underground duct system. Provide ground clamp and bonding of each steel conduit extension, where necessary to maintain continuity of the ground system. Terminate ground cable at last manhole or handhole for outlying structures.

M. After completion of the duct bank or utilizing existing ducts and prior to pulling

cable, pull a mandrel, not less than 12-inches long and with a cross section approximately 1/4-inch less than the inside cross section of the duct, through each duct. Then pull a rag swab or sponge through to make certain that no particles of earth, sand or gravel have been left in the duct.

N. Pulling Rope/Tape


26866 16137-4 12/20/2018

1. Pulling rope or tape shall be constructed of polyester and factory lubricated. Nylon is not allowed.

O. Warning Ribbon:

1. Provide as stated in Specification Section 16131. P. Plug and seal empty spare ducts entering buildings and structures. Install pulling tape

in all empty spare ducts. Seal watertight all ducts in use entering buildings and structures in accordance with Section 16131 - PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit, and Electrical Metallic Tubing.



26866 16138-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16138

MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install manholes and handholes.

B. Coordination: Coordinate manhole and handhole installation with piping, sheeting and other underground systems and structures and locate clear of interferences.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 2. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for manholes, handholes and accessories

proposed for use. 2. Drawings showing interior and exterior dimensions and details of openings,

jointing, inserts and reinforcing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Material and Construction: 1. Precast or cast-in-place type of reinforced concrete. 2. Minimum interior dimensions as shown on the Drawings. 3. Duct entrances sized and located to suit duct banks. 4. Handholes and Manholes must have a bottom.

B. Accessories:

1. Frames and Covers: a. Material: Cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48, Class 30A.


26866 16138-2 12/20/2018

b. Covers: Watertight, sealed type marked "ELECTRICAL" in raised 2-inch letters. Identify covers as shown on the Drawings.

c. Frame shall be grouted on the manhole or handhole. d. Product and Manufacturer: Provide frames and covers of one of the

following: 1) Neenah Foundry Company. 2) Campbell Foundry Company.

2. Frames and Covers: a. Material: Covers and frames shall be cast aluminum alloy, Class H-20

highway rated. b. Covers: Watertight, sealed type marked "ELECTRICAL" in raised 2-inch

letters. Identify covers as shown on the Drawings. 1) Manhole covers to be 36 inch minimum. c. Frame shall be grouted on the manhole or handhole. d. Product and Manufacturer: Provide frames and covers of one of the

following: 1) Neenah Foundry Company. 2) Campbell Foundry Company.

3. Pulling Irons: a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Cast in the wall opposite to the centerline of each incoming duct bank and

12-inches below centerline of bottom line of ducts. c. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Catalog No. 8119 by A.B. Chance Company. 2) Catalog No. DU2T3 by McGraw Edison Company.

4. Cable Racks: a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Cable racks shall adequately support cables with space allowed for future

cables. c. Each rack shall be a vertical assembly of 24-inch cable racks extending

from within 6-inches of the manhole roof slab to within 6-inches of the manhole floor.

d. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1) Catalog No. J-5125 by Joslyn Manufacturing Company. 2) Catalog No. C203-1125 by A.B. Chance Company.

5. Cable Hooks: a. Material: Galvanized steel. b. Length: 7-1/2-inch minimum. c. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Catalog No. J-5132A by Joslyn Manufacturing Company. 2) Catalog No. C203-1132 by A.B. Chance Company.

6. Insulators: a. Material: Porcelain. b. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Catalog No. J-5122 by Joslyn Manufacturing Company.


26866 16138-3 12/20/2018

2) Catalog No. C203-1120 by A.B. Chance Company. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install manholes and handholes where shown on the Drawings. Verify final locations in field. Responsibility belongs to CONTRACTOR for all excavation and backfilling required for installation.

B. Complete installation of manholes and handholes so that structures are watertight.

Apply foam sealant to all openings and penetrations. Seal all conduit openings to provide a water/bug-tight seal. 1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Type DUX - Duct Sealing Compound, as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney b. Type FST Foam Sealant, as manufactured by American Polywater Corp

C. Cable Supports in Manholes:

1. Attach cable racks with 3-inch by 3/8-inch diameter "tamp-in" studs mounted in 1-inch holes drilled into walls of manholes in the absence of inserts. Apply PVC coating to all racks.

2. Provide cable hooks to support each cable on each rack along the cable run within the manholes. Apply PVC coating to all hooks.

3. Individually support each cable at each hook on porcelain insulators. Provide sufficient slack for each cable.

4. Securely tie each cable in place at each insulator block to prevent excessive movement of insulators, cables, or fireproof tape. Tie cables with non-metallic 3/4-inch strapping tape as manufactured by 3M or tie down with nylon straps.

D. Grounding: Install a 3/4-inch by 10-foot copper-clad ground rod for each manhole.

Bond all exposed metal manhole accessories and the concrete reinforcing rods with No. 4 AWG minimum bare copper wire and connect to the ground rod and to the duct bank ground cable.

E. Sump: Provide a 12-inch by 12-inch by 6-inch sump in manhole floor. F. Provide grading rings for manholes when required to adjust cover to proper grade.

Grading ring shall be minimum of 12-inches in height, constructed on the roof slab or cone section on which the manhole frame and cover shall be placed. The height of the grading ring shall be such as is necessary to bring the frame to the proper grade.

G. Metal Pullbox: Install NEMA 4X stainless steel wall mounted pullbox inside

manholes/handholes where analog signal cables are mixed with power cables. Route


26866 16138-4 12/20/2018

conduits for analog cables directly into and out of metal pullbox so that no analog cables are exposed.



26866 16139-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16139

CABLE TRAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install cable trays.

B. Coordination: Coordinate installation of cable trays with piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures and other systems and equipment and locate clear of interferences.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. Phoenix Electrical Code, Article 318, Cable Trays. 2. NEMA VE 1, Cable Tray Systems. 3. ASTM A 386, Specifications for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel

Products. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for the cable tray system proposed for use.


A. Cable Tray System:

1. Type: Ladder, rungs welded to side rails. 2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Rung Spacing: 9-inches on center, minimum. 4. Inside Depth: 5-inches, minimum or as otherwise shown on the Drawings. 5. Radius: As shown on the Drawings, specified or required. 6. Width: 6 to 36-inches as shown on the Drawings, specified or required. 7. Support Span: Not to exceed 12-feet, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.. 8. Loading Capacity: NEMA 12C or greater.


26866 16139-2 12/20/2018

B. Supports and Support Hardware: 1. All supports and support hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. Husky Products Incorporated. 2. Robroy Industries. 3. B-Line Systems.


A. Install cable trays in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code and manufacturer's instructions and recommendations as complete systems prior to the installation of cables.

B. Install cable trays exposed and in accessible locations. C. Ground all cable tray system components. D. Where required, connect conduit to tray using cable tray conduit clamps, B-Line

Catalog Number 9ZN-1158, or equal. E. Furnish all required fittings and transitions for tie-ins to existing cable tray systems.

F. Furnish barrier strips in all trays to isolate instrumentation and communication cables

from power and discrete control wiring.



26866 16141-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16141

RECEPTACLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install receptacles. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. Phoenix Electrical Code. 2. UL Standard No. 1010, Electrical Receptacle - Plug Combinations for Use in

Hazardous Locations. 3. Phoenix Building Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for receptacles proposed for use.


A. Receptacles for Non-Hazardous Locations: 1. Duplex grounding receptacle, two pole, three wire, 125 volt AC, 20 amperes.

a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1) Catalog No. 5362, for dry indoor locations and Catalog No. 53CM62,

for wet and corrosive locations, by Harvey Hubbell Incorporated. 2) Catalog No. 5362, for dry indoor locations and Catalog No. 5362-CR,

for wet and corrosive locations, by Arrow-Hart Incorporated. 3) Or equal.

2. Single grounding receptacle, corrosion resistant, two pole, three wire, 125 volt AC, 20 amperes. a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Catalog No. 53CM61, by Harvey Hubbell Incorporated. 2) Catalog No. 5361-CR, by Arrow-Hart Incorporated.


26866 16141-2 1/24/2019

3) Or equal.

B. Receptacles for Hazardous Locations: 1. Material: Factory sealed receptacle suitable for installation in Class I, Group D

hazardous locations. Copper-free aluminum receptacle and cover with cast gray iron alloy or cast malleable iron mounting box with zinc electroplate finish. Receptacle rated at 20 amperes, 125 to 250 volt AC, two wire, three pole. Provide matching plug for each receptacle.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Series CPS by Crouse-Hinds Company. b. Type CPS by Appleton Electric Company. c. Or equal.

C. Ground Fault Receptacles:

1. Duplex receptacle, two pole, three wire, 125 volt AC, 20 amperes. 2. If recepticles are installed outdoors, the receptacles must be rated Weather

Resistant (WR) and must be marked as such on the receptacle itself with WR on the device.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Catalog No. GF5362 or GFRS5326TR, by Harvey Hubbell Incorporated. b. Catalog No. TWRVGF20x, Cooper Wiring Devices

D. Surge Suppression Receptacles:

1. Duplex grounding, surge suppression receptacle, two pole, three wire, 125 volt AC, 20 amperes, capable of absorbing a transient surge 6,000 volts minimum. Receptacle to include power on indicator light: a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Catalog No. 5350S by Harvey Hubbell Inc. 2) Catalog No. 5380-GY by Leviton Manufacturing Company.

E. Power Receptacles: 480 volt interlocked receptacle with enclosed safety switch

service outlet: Provide service outlets, quantity as shown on the Drawings for portable equipment. 1. Material: Copper free aluminum enclosure with operating handle NEMA 4,

with gasketed hinged door. 2. Switch: Heavy duty, three pole, with visible blades, a quick make a break

mechanism with reinforced, positive pressure type blade and fuse clips. Switch shall be mechanically interlocked with the receptacle. The switch cannot be closed until the plug is fully inserted and the plug cannot be withdrawn or inserted, unless the switch is open.

3. Receptacle: Single ground receptacle, three wire, four pole, 600 volt, 60 amp. Provide two matching plugs. a. Type WSR, and Type APS plugs by Crouse-Hinds Company.


26866 16141-3 1/24/2019

F. Power and Special Receptacles: Provide receptacles with number of poles and voltage and current rating as shown on the Drawings. Coordinate with equipment plugs. Provide matching plug for each receptacle.


A. Install receptacles at locations as shown on the Drawings in outlet or device boxes in accordance with Section 16136, Outlet Boxes, in non-hazardous locations.

B. Install receptacles in PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit systems in hazardous

locations.

C. Install receptacles with ground pole in the down position. D. Mount receptacles 18-inches above finished floor, or in accordance with Phoenix

Building Code, in non-hazardous locations and 4 feet-6 inches above finished floor in hazardous locations, unless otherwise noted.

E. Identify each conductor with the circuit number and the lighting panel number.

Identification shall conform to the requirements of Section 16122, 600 Volt Cable. F. Identify each receptacle with a permanent self adhesive label. Approximate size 3/8”

x 1¼”. The label shall include the panel name and circuit number. a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Catalog No. PTL-45422 by Brady. 2) Or Equal G. Install in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code.



26866 16142-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16142

SNAP SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install snap switches for lighting and other systems.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 2. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code. 3. UL Standard No. 20, General Use Snap Switches. 4. UL Standard No. 894, Switches for Use in Hazardous Locations. 5. Phoenix Building Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for switches proposed for use.


A. Switches for Non-Hazardous Locations: 1. Single pole AC toggle switch, quiet type, 120/277 volt AC, 20 amperes, Ivory,

specification grade. a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Catalog No. 1221-I, by Harvey Hubbel Incorporated. 2) Catalog No. 1991-I, by Arrow-Hart Incorporated.

2. Single pole, 3-way AC toggle switch, quiet type, 120/277 volt AC, 20 amperes, Ivory, specification grade. a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Catalog No. 1223-I, by Harvey Hubbell Incorporated. 2) Catalog No. 1993-I, by Arrow-Hart Incorporated.


26866 16142-2 1/24/2019

3. Two pole AC toggle switch, quiet type, 120/277 volt AC, 20 amperes, Ivory, specification grade. a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Catalog No. 1222-I, by Harvey Hubbel Incorporated. 2) Catalog No. 1992-I, by Arrow-Hart Incorporated.

B. Switches for Hazardous Locations:

1. Material: Factory sealed tumbler switch suitable for installation in Class I, Group D hazardous locations. Cast gray iron alloy or cast malleable iron body and cover with zinc electroplate finish. Switch rated at 20 amperes, 120/277 volt AC.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Series EDS by Crouse-Hinds Company. b. Type EDS by Appleton Electric Company.

C. Switch Covers:

1. Indoor covers shall be Type 304, stainless steel. 2. Outdoor or wet location covers shall be weatherproof and corrosion resistant.

D. Key Operated On-Off Switches:

1. Key operated switches shall be complete with legend plate and NEMA 4 enclosure and two keys for each switch.


A. Install switches at locations as shown on the Drawings in outlet or device boxes in accordance with Section 16136, Outlet Boxes, in non-hazardous locations.

B. Install switches in PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit systems in hazardous

locations. C. Mount wall switches 4 feet-6 inches above finished floor or in accordance with

Phoenix Construction Code, unless otherwise noted. D. Identify each conductor with the circuit number and the lighting panel number.

Identification shall conform to the requirements of Section 16122, 600 Volt Cable. E. Install switches in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code.


CITY OF PHOENIX: Water Service Department PROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main and Water Main PROJECT NUMBER: WS90400067 and WS90501005

26866 16143-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16143

DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install disconnect switches.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 2. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code. 3. UL Standard No. 98, Enclosed Switches. 4. NEMA KS-1, Enclosed Switches. 5. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for disconnect switches proposed for use. 2. Snap Switches (for disconnect switches on 120 volt, single phase circuits)

coordinate with Section 16142. 3. Listing of the switches to be furnished with an identification of their location,

rating and NEMA enclosure type. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Service Disconnect Switches: 1. Type: Fused, heavy-duty, single throw, quick-make, quick-break mechanism,

visible blades in OFF position and safety handle. 2. Rating: Voltage, current and short circuit ratings and number of poles as shown

on the Drawings. Switch shall bear a UL label certifying suitability for use as service equipment.

3. Provide auxiliary dry contacts to indicate switch position.


26866 16143-2 1/24/2019

B. Single Throw, Circuit Disconnect Switches: 1. Type: Fused or unfused, horsepower rated, heavy-duty, single throw, quick-

make, quick-break mechanism, visible blades in the OFF position and safety handle.

2. Rating: Voltage and current ratings and number of poles as required for motor or equipment circuits being disconnected. Switches shall bear a UL label.

3. Provide auxiliary dry contacts to indicate switch position.

C. Double Throw Safety Switches: 1. Type: Unfused, double throw with center OFF position, quick-make,

quick-break mechanism, visible blades in the OFF position and safety handle. 2. Rating: Voltage and current ratings and number of poles as required for the

circuits being disconnected. 3. Provide auxiliary dry contacts to indicate switch position.

D. Enclosures:

1. NEMA 12 for dry, indoor non-corrosive areas. 2. In all other locations except wet or corrosive, NEMA 4X 304 stainless steel.

For wet or corrosive locations, NEMA 4X 316 stainless steel. 3. NEMA 7 for explosion proof areas.

E. Identification:

1. Identify all enclosures in accordance with Section 16050, General Provisions. 2. Manufacturer’s nameplates identifying equipment, include identification of the

equipment served and source of power, for which switches serve as the disconnecting means. Manufacturer’s nameplates shall be permanently fastened to enclosures.

3. Comply with the requirements of Section 01630, Computerized Maintenance Management System Tags.

F. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. Square D Company. 2. General Electric Company. 3. Allen Bradley.


A. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance.


26866 16143-3 1/24/2019

B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other structural supports on which they are mounted. Provide independent stainless steel supports where no wall or other structural surface exists.

C. Furnish one set of spare fuses for each fused disconnect switch to be installed. D. Install in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code.



26866 16144-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16144

CONTROL STATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install pushbuttons, selector switches and other control stations.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. NEMA Standard ICS2-216, Pushbuttons, Selector Switches, Indicating Lights

and Pushbutton Stations. 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 3. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for control stations proposed for use.

B. Control stations shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements as shown on the Drawings, and as specified in Division 17000, Sections 17051, 17052, 17053, and 17226.


A. Control Stations: 1. Type: Industrial, heavy duty, oil tight construction with clearly marked Type

316 stainless steel or non-metallic material nameplates identifying equipment controlled.

2. Enclosures: NEMA 12 for dry indoor locations, NEMA 4X for outdoor and damp, wet or corrosive indoor locations. NEMA 4X stations shall be stainless steel and shall have locking rings, nameplates and all external hardware and components shall be Type 316 stainless steel or non-metallic material.


26866 16144-2 1/24/2019

3. Emergency Stop: Maintained contact type, NEMA A600 contact rating, color red with clearly marked Type 316 stainless steel or non-metallic material nameplate identifying equipment operation, provide as shown on drawings.

4. Pushbuttons: Momentary contact types, NEMA A600 contact rating, with clearly marked Type 316 stainless steel or non-metallic material nameplate identifying equipment operation, provide as shown on drawings.

a. Stop: Boot color to be red. b. Start: Boot color to be black. 5. Selector Switches: Rotary type with round or oval handles and positioning

device to securely hold switch in selected position for maintained type and for spring return from left, right, or both to a maintained position with clearly marked Type 316 stainless steel or non-metallic material nameplate identifying equipment operation, provide as shown on drawings.

6. Indicating Lights: 120 VAC, Push-To-Test. Lens color red for running, green for stopped or ready and amber for failure with clearly marked Type 316 stainless steel or non-metallic material nameplate identifying equipment operation, provide as shown on drawings.

7. Product and Manufacturer: Provide control stations of one of the following: a. Square D Company. b. General Electric Company. c. Allen Bradley Company.


A. Mount equipment, as shown on the Drawings, so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance.

B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other surfaces on which they are mounted.

Provide independent stainless steel or FRP supports where no wall or other surface exists.

C. Install in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code.



26866 16215-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16215

POWER SYSTEM / ARC FLASH ANALYSIS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. General: 1. Conduct a Power System Short Circuit Study, Protective Device Coordination

Study, and Arc Flash Hazard Analysis for the Electrical Distribution System (EDS) as specified in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the City’s Electrical, Instrumentation and Control Inspection Firm (EI&C Inspector) as outlined in this specification to perform the POWER SYSTEM / ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS. The EI&C Inspection Firm will perform the POWER SYSTEM / ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS and shall here in be referred to as ANALYSIS FIRM.

3. The CONTRACTOR shall contract the firm Arcadis as the POWER SYSTEM / ARC FLASH ANALYSIS FIRM to complete the analysis.

4. The software used to conduct the study and analysis shall be the latest version of SKM Power*Tools, by SKM Systems Analysis, Inc.

1.2 SCOPE

A. CONTRACTOR Scope: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing the following data to

the ANALYSIS FIRM: a. Project Schedule. b. Electrical Utility contact information. c. Division 16000 Engineer approved submittals, including the

ENGINEERS review comments. d. Additional equipment information as requested by the ANALYSIS FIRM

per Section 1.2.A3. e. Marked up single line diagram(s) with installed conductor lengths, sizes

and count. f. Changes in design as a result of RFI’s, Addendums, Engineer

Clarifications, Sketches or revisions, which may affect the Power System / Arc Flash Analysis.

2. CONTRACTOR shall provide ANALYSIS FIRM a minimum of a 2-week notice of the following construction milestones:


26866 16215-2 1/24/2019

a. Electrical Equipment Delivery. b. Electrical Equipment Energization. c. Electrical Equipment Testing. d. Substantial Completion.

3. Based upon outcome of analysis additional equipment information may be required by the CONTRACTOR for upstream or downstream equipment in the electrical distribution system.

4. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for implementation of the protective device settings. Implementation of recommended settings outside of the project scope of work resulting from system coordination changes is the responsibility of the OWNER.

5. CONTRACTOR shall provide ANALYSIS FIRM with safe access to all equipment on site throughout construction for the purpose of verifying the EDS protective device information.

6. CONTRACTOR shall install labeling as required by specification 16050 section 3.1 for voltage labeling and other labels as required.

B. ANALYSIS FIRM Scope 1. Conduct a Power System/Arc Flash Hazard Analysis for new and modified

areas of the EDS as specified in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The analysis shall be performed in accordance with IEEE and shall utilize the ANSI method of short circuit analysis. An SKM model of the EDS shall be developed or modified using ENGINEER’S approved Equipment Submittals, site collected data, and Utility short circuit data. Deliverables shall include a short circuit analysis results, a protective device coordination analysis results, and arc flash / shock hazard analysis results and work tasks required by the CONTRACTOR. The ANALYSIS FIRM shall coordinate new protective devices with existing protective devices in the EDS as required.

2. Where additional electrical equipment is being added or modified and upon request from the ANALYSIS FIRM, the ENGINEER will transmit the existing Arc Flash Documentation to the ANALYSIS FIRM for use in completing the required updates.

3. ANALYSIS FIRM shall acquire the Electrical Utility Company’s published available Short Circuit current tables for use in the studies. For larger service sizes greater than 480VAC, the ANALYSIS FIRM is to coordinate with the ENGINEER and Utility Company for calculated available short circuit current.

4. ANALYSIS firm shall verify that protective devices are correct per SKM model and analysis results.

5. ANALYSIS FIRM shall install Arc Flash Hazard Warning labels per this specification.

6. ANALYSIS FIRM shall install the updated laminated Single Line Diagram’s, Panel Schedules, and Load Summaries. Updates will be made by the


26866 16215-3 1/24/2019

ANALYSIS FIRM based on as-build documentation provided by the CONTRACTOR.

7. ANALYSIS FIRM shall deliver the final SKM Model and all associated data and library files used in the model to the OWNER. The ANALYSIS FIRM shall relinquish all rights of the SKM model and all associated data and library files to the OWNER.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. IEEE 141-1993, Recommended Practice for Electric Power Distribution for

Industrial Plants (IEEE Red Book). 2. IEEE 242-2001, Recommended Practice for Protection and Coordination of

Industrial and Commercial Power Systems (IEEE Buff Book). 3. IEEE 1584-2002, Guide for Performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations 4. NFPA 70E, Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace. 5. IEEE 551, Recommended Practice for Calculating Short-Circuit Currents in

Industrial and commercial Power Systems (IEEE Violet Book). 6. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Preliminary Technical Memorandum: 1. ANALYSIS FIRM shall provide a preliminary submittal review and a technical

memorandum providing comments for equipment submitted on. This will be submitted for approval by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Submittal shall include: a. Technical Memorandum

1) Review for adequate installation based on available fault current. 2) Recommendations for alternate equipment based on system

coordination. 3) Recommendations for alternate design considerations based on

energy levels. 2. Preliminary Technical Memorandum shall be submitted and reviewed by the

ENGINEER to ensure EDS electrical equipment order being released for manufacturing meets the requirements of the project.


26866 16215-4 1/24/2019

B. Final Report: 1. ANALYSIS FIRM shall submit a final sealed report to the CONTRACTOR

upon project substantial completion. Final report shall be in PDF format and include all documents as noted in section 1.4.B.2 below.

2. ANALYSIS FIRM to provide the following documents in the final report: a. Final Report b. SKM Single Line Diagrams – Power Study Management Scenario c. SKM Time Current Curves d. Arc Flash Labels

C. Submittals shall be delivered in pdf format, unless otherwise specified.

CONTRACTOR shall provide Three (3) cd(s) of the final deliverable report to the ENGINEER.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER SYSTEM / ARC FLASH ANALYSIS FINAL REPORT

A. Professional Certified Report: 1. ANALYSIS FIRM shall provide a certified report that shall include but is not

limited to: a. An executive summary. b. Methods, assumptions, and procedures used in the analysis. c. Results of short-circuit analysis listing equipment that is applied above

its short-circuit current rating, and recommendations if appropriate. d. Results and recommendations of the protective device coordination and

time-current analysis, including time-current curves (TCC’s). e. Documentation of all study input data, including utility available fault

currents; cable sizes, types and lengths; motor data; breaker types and settings; fuse sizes and types, etc.

f. Findings and recommendations requiring actions not within the ANALYSIS FIRM scope of work.

g. Electrical Distribution System Overview as illustrated on the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

h. Appendices with the SKM documents of the equipment data used in the analysis and the analysis results.

2. Report shall be reviewed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the state of Arizona.


26866 16215-5 1/24/2019

B. SKM Single-Line Diagram(s): 1. SKM Single-Line Diagram(s) legible on 11” x 17” sheet size, landscape view.

Include the following information: a. Location and function of each protective device in the system, such as

relays, direct-acting trips, fuses, etc. b. Type designation, current rating, range or adjustment, manufacturer's

style or type for all protective devices. c. Power, voltage ratings, impedance, primary and secondary connections

of all transformers. d. Type, manufacturer, and ratio of all current transformers energizing each

relay. e. Manufacturer’s nameplate data of all motors and generators. f. Sources of short circuit currents such as utility ties, generators, synchro-

nous motors, and induction motors. g. All significant circuit elements such as transformers, cables, breakers,

fuses, reactors, etc. h. Normal switching conditions where possible. i. The final settings of adjustable breakers, relays and direct-acting trips.

C. Short Circuit Study:

1. The short circuit analysis shall be performed to determine the adequacy of circuit breakers, surge arresters, busways, switches, and fuses by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the available fault currents. Short circuit momentary duties and interrupting duties shall be calculated on the basis of worst case scenario / maximum available fault current at the switchgear busses and motor control centers.

2. Normal system operating method, alternate operation, and operations which could result in maximum fault conditions shall be thoroughly addressed in the analysis. The analysis shall assume all motors operating at rated voltage. Redundant/standby motors shall be excluded where known system limitations prevent simultaneous operation. Electrical equipment bus impedance shall be assumed zero (SKM default setting).

D. Protective Device Coordination Study: 1. The protective device coordination analysis shall be performed to determine the

required settings/sizes of the protective devices to maximize selectivity. The phase over-current and ground-fault protection settings shall be included as well as settings for all other adjustable protective devices, excluding vendor supplied packaged equipment. Areas lacking complete coordination shall be identified and justification provided for allowing condition to remain or the ENGINEER shall provide solution to resolve situation.


26866 16215-6 1/24/2019

2. SKM Time-Current Curve(s) legible on 11” x 17” sheet size, landscape view on 10- cycle, green log-log graph paper. Include the following information for each time-current curve: a. Protective device, relay, or fuse showing graphically that the settings

provide protection and selectivity within industry standards. Each curve shall be identified, and the tap and time dial settings shall be specified.

b. Each device shall be positioned to provide maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause.

c. Points for cable and equipment damage. d. Circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times based on the

amperage. e. A SKM Single line sketch of bus and breaker arrangement for each time-

current curve. 3. Provide breaker setting table with sign off form for CONTRACTOR use during

implementation of breaker settings.

E. Arc Flash/Shock Hazard Analysis: 1. The arc flash / shock hazard analysis shall be conducted in accordance with the

methods outlined in IEEE Standard 1584 and stated hereinafter. Work shall be in accordance with NFPA 70E which includes the fabrication of labels with the Arc Flash / Shock Hazard analysis results, the calculated Incident Energy (cal/cm2), Equipment Name, Owner and Owner contact information, and the date the analysis was performed.

2. The analysis shall include the following IEEE 1584 analysis process steps: a. Collect current and accurate system and installation data. b. Determine modes of operation. c. Determine bolted fault current. d. Determine arc fault current. e. Determine protective device characteristic and arc fault duration. f. Document system voltages g. Select working distances. h. Calculate Incident Energy (cal/cm2). i. Calculate the Arc Flash Boundary.

3. Within the final report, provide a copy of each installed Equipment Specific Arc Flash label on 8½” x 11” sheet size, portrait view in actual size and color as printed and installed on the actual field equipment.

2.2 LABELS


26866 16215-7 1/24/2019

A. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: 1. PPE Category Label:

a. A standard Arc Flash Hazard Warning label (Category Label) shall be installed on all equipment that meets the NFPA 70E Category 1 or 2 parameters, including a maximum of 25 kA available fault current and arc-duration parameters (clearing time). All other components must have an equipment specific label generated from SKM using calculated values as described in 2.2.A.2.

b. Provide a 2” x 4” label format with coloring to match the labels shown on Figure 2.2.B.1 below.

Figure 2.2.B.1

2. Calculated Equipment Specific Labels:

a. Arc Flash and Shock Hazard Warning labels shall be installed on all equipment with an SKM calculated Incident Energy level.

b. Label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, Arc Flash and Shock Hazard," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc flash hazard analysis:

1) Equipment designation. 2) Nominal system voltage.


26866 16215-8 1/24/2019

3) Protection boundaries: a) Arc Flash Boundary. b) Limited approach boundary. c) Restricted approach boundary.

c. Calculated available incident energy in cal/cm2 and the corresponding working distance.

d. Owner: City of Phoenix e. Contact Info Phone Number (602) 495-7692 f. Study Date. g. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings. h. Provide standard 4” x 5” rectangular labels. i. Provide a label with coloring and formatted to match Figure 2.2.B.2

below.

Figure 2.2.B.2


26866 16215-9 1/24/2019

3. Label Material: a. Label shall be an indoor/outdoor high performance, pressure sensitive

safety sign. b. Materials shall be UV rated surface printed polyester with polyester over-

laminate. Labels shall be abrasion, chemical and heat resistant (-40°C to 110°C), with an average outdoor durability of five to eight years.

c. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. d. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating

adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969. e. Product Manufacture: Provide the following:

1) Printer and Label Materials a) BRADY Powermark Printer, BRADY Label Part# 13651 b) Or Approved Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. ANALYSIS FIRM shall inspect all installed equipment for conformance with the fully executed POWER SYSTEM / ARC FLASH ANALYSIS. Any deviations found shall immediately be brought to the OWNER and ENGINEERS attention.

3.2 BREAKER SETTINGS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the ENGINEER and ANALYSIS FIRM to implement the breaker settings defined in the approved preliminary report submittal. 1. The CONTRACTOR shall complete form 16215 – A – Power System / Arc

Flash Analysis Sign-off Form for each breaker.

B. The ANALYSIS FIRM shall inspect all breaker settings implemented in the field by the CONTRACTOR. If the recommended breaker setting(s) are adjusted, the ANALYSIS FIRM will update the final report with the actual settings. CONTRACTOR or ENGINEER is to provide written justification for any deviations.

3.3 BREAKER TESTING


26866 16215-10 1/24/2019

A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the final settings of the breakers during the start-up and functional testing of the process systems EDS. If the breaker settings require adjustment, the CONTRACTOR will coordinate with the ENGINEER and ANALYSIS FIRM to update the Power System Arc Flash Analysis Report with the final settings.

3.4 LABELING

A. All Service Entrance Sections (SES), switchboards, switchgear, Motor Control Centers (MCC), transformers, distribution boards, panel boards, disconnects and control panels shall have both an Arc Flash Hazard Warning label and a voltage label as identified in specification section 16050. The ANALYSIS FIRM shall determine the proper Arc Flash Hazard Warning label. 1. Install all labels level and in an upright position. Do not cut or alter in any

way. Install labels in a professional manner. Clean surface as needed to allow for good adhesion.

2. Labels shall not be installed atop any manufacturer name plate data or equipment tag labels.

3. Labels shall not be installed atop any existing voltage warning or Arc Flash Hazard Warning labels that may already exist on the equipment. Existing voltage and Arc Flash Hazard Warning labels shall be removed and the surface thoroughly cleaned before application of any new labels.

4. Where equipment does not have sufficient space for an Arc Flash Label the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a fabricated mounting plate constructed of stainless steel sheet metal per direction from the ENGINEER. Mounting plate shall be affixed to the equipment using stainless steel screws. Installation shall maintain the equipment NEMA rating of the equipment. Mounting plate shall not interfere with equipment operation and shall be readily visible.

5. In the case of more than one source of power to a piece of equipment, the highest voltage label shall be applied, and an additional label shall be applied indicating more than one source of power located inside the equipment.

6. For outdoor switchgear, place a single Arc Flash Hazard Warning label on the outside of the access door nearest to the main breaker, and one inside on the respective breaker enclosure. All other Arc Flash Hazard Warning labels shall be placed inside the access doors on the respective breaker enclosure or cover. If there are back access panels to the equipment, the arc flash labels placed at the front of the gear shall be duplicated and placed on the back access panels at the same relative location.

7. For disconnect switches, panel boards, distribution boards, load centers, and control panels, the labels should be applied in plain view on the front cover.


CITY OF PHOENIX: Water Services Department PROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main and Water Main PROEJCT NUMBER: WS90400067 and WS90501005

26866 16231-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16231

480 VOLT STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as required to furnish and install 1, diesel engine-generator set complete with all appurtenances as shown on the Drawings, specified and required for complete operational diesel engine generator standby power systems where required by the Drawings.

B. In order to centralize responsibility, it is required that the entire engine generator and

all equipment and services provided under this Section be furnished by a single supplier or manufacturer who shall assume full responsibility for the completeness of the systems. The supplier shall be authorized to perform warranty service on the complete system.

C. The manufacturer of the equipment specified herein shall be required to review and

satisfy all relevant requirements of other Sections of the Contract Documents. D. Warranty: The equipment supplied under this Section shall be covered by a single

warranty against defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years or 3000 hours of operation. Warranty shall provide for free replacement or repair of parts for the five years or 3000 hours of operation period, and free labor for the first two years. A warranty statement including these features shall be provided as part of the OWNER’S operation and maintenance manuals. Warranty shall be administered by the same company that supplied the equipment.

E. Electrical connections will be furnished by CONTRACTOR. F. The equipment will be installed by CONTRACTOR.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience of producing

substantially similar equipment, and shall be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years.


26866 16231-2 1/24/2019

B. The manufacturer shall have complete parts and service facilities and a factory trained service staff available on a 24-hour basis.

C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable provisions of

regulatory agencies below and others having jurisdiction: 1. Local Ordinances: The manufacturer shall submit proof that the engine

generator sets meet all requirements with respect to noise control and emission. Exhaust emissions and sound levels shall not exceed the values given under Products, in this Section. Certified test reports shall be provided.

2. Permits: Obtain and pay for all required permits, fees and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Phoenix Building Code. 4. Underwriters’ Laboratories Incorporated (UL). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 6. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 7. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code.

D. Source Quality Control:

1. All equipment shall be new, of current domestic production of a national firm which manufactures the engine-generator set as a matched unit, and the manufacturer together with its authorized representative, shall have full responsibility for the performance of the generator set and its accessories. Unit shall be designed for outdoor installation.

2. The engine generator set shall be factory assembled and tested to determine that it is free from electrical or mechanical defects and that it meets design specifications.

3. Supplier shall maintain a parts and service facility, employ factory trained technicians, and offer 24-hour emergency service. Supplier shall be the authorized dealer of the manufacturer offering standard production equipment built and prototype tested in accordance with NFPA 110, and shall be authorized to administer the warranty for all components of the standby generator system specified herein.

4. UL inspection and labeling. 5. Perform the following tests and inspections at factory.

a. Pressure test at five psi. b. UL inspection and labeling.

E. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. Air Pollution Control District Rules and Regulations. 2. EGSA 100C, Performance Standard: Battery Chargers for Engine Starting and

Control Batteries, 1992 Edition. 3. EGSA 100E, Performance Standards for Governors on Engine Generator Sets,

1984 Edition.


26866 16231-3 1/24/2019

4. EGSA 100F, Performance Standard for Engine Protection Systems, 1992 Edition.

5. EGSA 100G, Performance Standard for Generator Set Instrumentation, Control and Auxiliary Equipment, 1980 Edition.

6. EGSA 100R, Performance Standard for Voltage Regulators Used on Electric Generators, 1992 Edition.

7. Electrical Generating Systems Association (EGSA) 100B, Performance Standard for Engine Cranking Batteries for Use With Engine Generator Sets, 1992 Edition.

8. IEEE Std 126-1959/83, Speed Governing of Internal Combustion Engine-Generator Units.

9. NFPA 30, Flammable and Combustible Liquids. 10. NFPA 31, Standard for the Installation of Oil-Burning Equipment. 11. NFPA 37, Standard for the Installation and use of Stationary Combustion

Engines and Gas Turbines. 12. NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces, 1988

Edition. 13. NFPA 99 Health Care Facilities, 1993 Edition. 14. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, 1991 Edition. 15. NFPA 110 Emergency and Standby Power Systems, 1993 Edition. 16. Phoenix Electrical Code, Article 701, Legally Required Standby Systems. 17. NEMA MG1, Motors and Generators. 18. UL Standard No. 1008 Standard For Safety. 19. UL Standard No. 142 Steel Above Ground Tanks. 20. UL Standard No. 2085, Insulated Aboveground Tank for Flammable and

Combustible Liquids. 21. ULC/ORD 142.23, Aboveground Waste Oil Tank. 22. ULC/ORD 142.5, Aboveground Concrete Encased Steel Tank Assemblies.

F. Performance Tests:

1. Factory Tests: Standard production tests shall be performed at the factory after assembly to verify proper operation and performance. CONTRACTOR notify the OWNER and ENGINEER at least two weeks in advance of the test.

2. The equipment supplied shall have been prototype tested and reports shall be provided with the submittals.

3. Field testing shall be performed by a factory trained serviceman as coordinated by CONTRACTOR.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Standby power generators.

a. Bill of Material, covering all equipment submitted.


26866 16231-4 1/24/2019

b. Qualifications of the engine-generator manufacturer and of the authorized distributor in accordance with Paragraph 1.2.A of this Section. Verify the availability of 24-Hour emergency service capability.

c. Manufacturer’s published rating sheet. NFPA-110 test verification. Altitude and temperature derating procedures. Frequency and voltage regulation. Cooling system capability. Full rated load pickup capability.

d. Installation requirements: Radiator airflow and backpressure capacity, combustion air requirement, fuel consumption, fuel circulation, heat rejection, exhaust flow, exhaust back-pressure calculations, battery requirements. ISO container pad layout dimensional data with provision for cable entry and termination.

e. Engine performance data. Configuration, cubic inch displacement, rated RPM, type of aspiration, voltage of electrical system, oil and coolant capacities, exhaust volume and temperature, and motor starting capability in KVA at 90 percent sustained voltage.

f. Exhaust emission data provided on the current application form of the Air Pollution Control District (APCD). Exhaust and crankcase emission control equipment devices.

g. Description of battery set and battery charger. h. Generator data sheet including, as a minimum, design type, continuous and

standby rating in KW, voltage, phase, frequency, winding insulation class and temperature rise, coupling, voltage and frequency regulation capability, AC wave form total harmonic distortion from no load to full linear load and surge KW capacity.

i. Control panel features and performance. Meters and gauges. Safety alarm and shutdown devices. Cranking control. Indicator lamps and horn. Control switches.

j. Exhaust silencer attenuation rating. k. Jacket water heater system. l. Generator control panel front views, wiring diagrams, instrument and relay

data, description of operation. m. Generator set seismic restraint devices.

1) Agency pre-qualification. 2) Dimensional data. 3) Seismic restraint calculations.

n. Enclosure details. 1) Exhaust system mounting. 2) Overall dimensions. 3) Sound attenuation data for conformance to specified requirements and

to APCD requirements. o. Fuel storage system.

1) Compliance with UL. 2) Secondary containment. 3) Alarm and indicator devices. 4) Dimensional data.


26866 16231-5 1/24/2019

5) Fuel capacity and hours of operation at rated load. 6) Seismic restraint devices and calculations for the fuel tank

configuration. p. Schematic and wiring diagrams for all major components. Interconnection

diagram for all major components. q. Complete details of generator enclosure. r. Shop and field testing procedures. s. Warranty certificate and administration authorization by the supplier in

accordance with Paragraph 1.1.E., above. t. Complete the Reference Form 16231-A - “Add Generator to Fleet –

Inspection Checklist” as provided in Section 01331 – Reference Forms. 2. Above-ground fuel oil storage tank.

a. Manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications, engineering data, materials of construction, dimensions, and cross-section cuts.

b. Drawings showing fabrication methods, assembly, installation details, and accessories including construction of tank, piping layouts, calibration charts, and sizing of all fittings.

c. Piping sump details, dimensions, including installation details. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation and spare parts information.

2. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the require-ments of Section 01781, Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Deliver materials to the site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of the Work.

B. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery

to the site. Notify ENGINEER of any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all

materials off the ground, using pallets, platforms or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL


26866 16231-6 1/24/2019

A. The following generator sets are required:

1. Number Required: 1. 2. Ratings:

a. 200 KW, 230 KVA, 0.8 power factor, 480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz. when equipped with all accessories. Ratings are based on standby operation.

3. Cooling System: Radiator type, unit mounted.

B. Ambient Conditions: 1. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 50°C. 2. Altitude: 1000 feet above sea level.

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Engine Type: Four cycle, radiator cooled diesel, 1800 RPM, maximum bore-to-stroke ratio of unity and maximum crankshaft operating speed of 1800 RPM. Two cycle engines are not acceptable.

B. Engine Construction:

1. Steel backed bearings. 2. Crank Case: Reinforced cast iron. 3. Crank Shaft: Forged alloy steel with hardened journals, finished and

dynamically balanced. 4. Cylinder Head: Cast iron. 5. Pistons: Aluminum alloy with chrome faced rings. 6. Replaceable cylinder liners and valve seat inserts for engines rated over 200

horsepower. 7. Single block construction. Bolted, multiple blocks are not acceptable.

C. Cooling System:

1. Cooling system shall employ an engine-mounted radiator capable of cooling the engine when operating under full load conditions in an ambient temperature of 50°C.

2. Engine shall be provided with a thermostatic valve placed in the jacket water outlet between the radiator and the engine to maintain proper jacket water temperature. An integral engine driven circulating pump shall be provided to circulate water through the engine cooling system.

3. Coolant: System shall be filled with a 50 percent solution of ethylene glycol. 4. High engine temperature shutdown. 5. Loss of coolant shutdown. 6. Engine coolant heaters, thermostatically controlled capable of keeping the jacket

water at a minimum temperature of 90°F in an ambient temperature of 20°F. The coolant heaters shall operate at 240 volts, single phase. Provide a suitably rated


26866 16231-7 1/24/2019

contactor and control transformer for controlling the jacket water heater, in a NEMA 4X, stainless steel box, mounted on unit.

7. The radiator shall include duct adaptors for the connection of radiator discharge ducting.

D. Lubrication System: Force feed to all bearings with integral gear type pump, full-

flow filters, oil level indicator, 480 volt, single phase, oil pan heater, oil temperature and pressure gages. System shall include main lube oil pump. Oil pan heater shall be complete with contactor in NEMA 4X, stainless steel enclosure mounted on unit. The oil pan heater shall be controlled by the coolant heater thermostat.

E. Fuel System: Suitable for operation on No. 2 diesel fuel oil. System to include fuel

filters, fuel pump, dry element air cleaners, an electronic governor and the following: 1. Governor: Electronic, speed droop externally adjustable, isochronous to five

percent. 2. Fuel/Water Separator.

F. Not applicable. G. Exhaust System: Flexible stainless steel exhaust connectors and hospital critical

silencing mufflers, GT exhaust systems, or equal as shown on the Drawings. Include condensate drain valve. All piping and mufflers shall be installed and insulated by CONTRACTOR. Back pressure shall not exceed 20-inches of water.

H. Starting System: DC system complete with engine mounted batteries, locally

mounted charger and connecting cables between batteries and engine and between charger and batteries. 1. Batteries: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium, engine cranking type, rated in

accordance with engine manufacturer's requirements for a minimum of three 15 second cranking cycles at firing speeds without recharging. Batteries to be sized to accommodate DC power requirements of the control panel and any other accessories requiring DC power.

2. Engine mounted alternator, rated 75 amps minimum. 3. Charger: Automatic float charger, current limited, with DC ammeter and

voltmeter, equalizing switch and capable of recharging the batteries to full charge in not more than six hours after three crank cycles, La Marche, rated 20 amps minimum, or equal. The charger shall be integrally mounted on the engine-generator set or wall and operate on 120 volts AC input.

I. Generator: Revolving field, 4-pole, brushless excitation, 2/3 pitch, open drip-proof

self ventilated enclosure, Class H insulation, output blocking diode, skewed stator, dynamically balanced rotor, full amortisseur windings, epoxy coating on rotor and stator for abrasion and humidity protection, microprocessor controlled voltage regulator and anti-condensation heater. The alternator shall have the following characteristics:


26866 16231-8 1/24/2019

1. Voltage Regulation: One percent from no load to full load. 2. Voltage Adjustment: Five percent in generator control panel. 3. Voltage Wave Form Deviation: In accordance with the requirements of NEMA

MG1-22.43. 4. Telephone Influence Factor: In accordance with the requirements of NEMA

MG1-22.43. 5. Excitation: Include a permanent magnet pilot exciter, in addition to the standard

exciter, to sustain fault current to three times full load rating. 6. Rated for 80°C temperature rise. 7. The generator shall incorporate resistance temperature detectors (RTD’s) to

monitor a minimum of six temperature zones, covering all three phases, in the generator windings. The RTD’s shall connect to a relay which determines the sensed temperature and acts to isolate, alarm or initiate corrective action, or provide dry contact output. RTD operational setpoint shall be 160°C.

J. Control Panel: Panel shall be furnished generator set mounted and shall contain the

controls, instruments, lights, and other devices necessary to manually and automatically start, stop and protect the diesel engine-generator unit. Controls and alarms shall operate from battery power. The panel shall be mounted on vibration isolators. Panel installed in the interior of walk-in enclosures to be rated NEMA 12. All signals and alarms listed below shall be monitored by the CCS. Panel shall include the following: 1. "RUN/OFF/AUTO" selector switch with terminals for two-wire remote start-

stop signal from one or more automatic transfer switches. 2. AC Volts, two percent accuracy, in percent of rated. 3. AC amps, two percent accuracy, in percent of rated. 4. VM/AM phase selector switch. 5. Kilowatts, in percent of rated. 6. Frequency, 0.5 percent accuracy. 7. DC voltage readout. 8. Engine coolant temperature readout. 9. Engine oil pressure readout. 10. Running time readout. 11. Readouts and dry contact outputs for the following conditions:

a. Overcrank (Shut Down). b. High coolant temperature (Warning Alarm). c. High high coolant temperature (Shut Down). d. Low coolant temperature (Warning Alarm). e. Low oil pressure (Warning Alarm). f. Low low oil pressure (Shut Down). g. High generator temperature (Warning Alarm). h. Low fuel level day tank (Warning Alarm). i. Battery voltage low (Warning Alarm). j. Battery voltage high (Warning Alarm). k. Generator running.


26866 16231-9 1/24/2019

l. Overspeed (Shut Down). m. Anticipatory low oil pressure (Warning Alarm). n. Anticipatory high water temperature (Warning Alarm). o. Manual emergency stop (Shut Down). p. Not in automatic (Warning Alarm). q. System ready. r. Battery charger fault (Warning Alarm). s. High high generator temperature (Shut Down). t. Low fuel level storage tank (Warning Alarm). u. Liquid in diesel fuel containment basin. This signal shall also be

retransmitted to a remote panel. v. Battery weak at time of cranking (Warning Alarm). w. Overcurrent (Warning Alarm). x. Overcurrent (Shut Down). y. High AC voltage (Shut Down). z. Low AC voltage (Shut Down). aa. Under frequency (Shut Down). bb. Ground fault (Shut Down).

12. Lamp test momentary push button controls and wiring. 13. Provide individual dry contacts closing on alarm for remote alarm for following

conditions: a. Low oil pressure. b. High temperature. c. Generator winding high temperature.

14. Reset Control: Manual or remote restarts shall not be permitted and alarm lamps shall remain in the alarm state until manual reset is accomplished even if the alarm condition has been corrected.

15. Emergency stop pushbutton switch for shutdown independent of cooldown timer.

16. Cooldown timer. 17. Main circuit breaker, rated as shown on the Drawings. 18. The following output signals shall be provided for interfacing with the CCS:

a. Generator running. b. Generator common warning alarm. c. Generator common shutdown. d. Load shed signal.

K. Engine Generator Set Control:

1. The control shall have automatic remote start capability. The panel mounted switch shall stop the engine in the "STOP" position, start and run the engine in the "RUN" (unloaded) position, and allow the engine to start and run by closing a remote contact, and stop by opening the remote contact when in the "AUTO" position. In the "AUTO" position, one or more automatic transfer switches shall signal the engine generator to start upon loss of normal (utility) power. After the


26866 16231-10 1/24/2019

generator reaches approximately 90 percent of rated voltage, the automatic transfer switch shall transfer to the emergency position after a preset time delay.

2. The control shall include a cycle cranking function. The cranking cycle, nonadjustable shall consist of an automatic crank period of approximately 15 seconds duration followed by a rest period of approximately 15 seconds duration. Cranking shall cease upon engine starting and running. Two means of cranking termination shall be provided, one as a backup to the other. Failure to start after three cranking cycles (75 second) shall shut down and lock out the engine, and visually indicate an overcrank shutdown on the panel.

3. A solid-state time delay stop, adjustable from one to five minutes (factory set at five minutes), shall maintain the availability of the emergency source in the event that the normal power source fails shortly after retransfer and shall permit the engine-generator set to run unloaded for a cooldown period prior to shutdown.

L. Generator Base:

1. Base shall be a structural steel frame of adequate rigidity for generator and engine alignment.

M. Engine-Generator Set Mounting:

1. Vibration Isolators: Steel springs in combination with rubber pads. Korfund #LKD-D56H, 12 per set, or equal.

2. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel conforming to the requirements of Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts.

3. A template shall be furnished by the manufacturer for setting anchor bolts, pipe sleeves, and nuts for mounting the spring type isolators specified to the concrete foundation. Bolts and nuts shall be furnished for bolting the isolators to the channel frame base of the engine-generator set.

N. Vibration Isolation: Provide flexible connections between engine-generator set and

fuel lines, exhaust system, conduit containing power or control cables and other externally connected support systems.

O. Manufacturer Nameplate: In accordance with the requirements of NEMA MG1-

22.61. P. Exhaust characteristics shall be furnished for compliance with Air Pollution Control

District (APCD) regulations. Certified test reports shall be furnished for approval by the Air Pollution Control District and for the ENGINEER’S information.

Q. The sound pressure level developed by the generator set shall be a maximum 85 dBA

at three feet when measured in accordance with IEEE Standard 85, Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurement on rotating electrical machines.

R. Spare Parts:


26866 16231-11 1/24/2019

1. Provide the following spare parts for each generator set: a. Two sets - fuel filters (primary and secondary). b. One set - air filters. c. One dozen - light bulbs for control panel monitor lights. d. Two - fuses for control circuit. e. Two sets - lube oil filters. f. One set - fan belts. g. One set – upper and lower radiator hoses.

2. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the OWNER at the conclusion of the Project. Comply with the requirements of Section 01783, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.

S. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. Onan / Cummins Corporation 2. Caterpillar

2.3 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING

A. Standby generator set, all ferrous metals of the equipment, appurtenances, etc., shall receive shop primer and shop finish coating conforming to the requirements of Section 09900, Painting. If any damage to the paint system occurs, the equipment shall be repainted as directed by the ENGINEER.

B. Surface preparation and painting shall conform to the requirements of Section 09900,

Painting. C. All surfaces which are to remain unpainted shall receive a heavy application of grease

or other rust-resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained during storage and until the equipment is placed into operation.

D. Certify, in writing, that the shop primer and shop finish coating system conforms to

the requirements of Section 09900, Painting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Engine-Generator Set Mounting: 1. Vibration Isolators: Steel springs in combination with rubber pads. Korfund

#LKD-56H, 12 per set, or equal. 2. Anchor Bolts: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. A template shall be furnished by the manufacturer for setting anchor bolts, pipe

sleeves, and nuts for mounting the spring type isolators specified to the concrete


26866 16231-12 1/24/2019

foundation. Bolts and nuts shall be furnished for bolting the isolators to the channel frame base of the engine-generator set.

4. Vibration Isolation: Provide flexible connections between engine-generator set and fuel lines, exhaust system, conduit containing power or control cables and other externally connected support systems.

B. Load test each generator, utilizing a resistive load bank if necessary, as follows:

1. 1/2 hour at half load. 2. 1/2 hour at 3/4 load. 3. Four hours at rated full load.

3.2 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES

A. A factory trained representative shall be provided for installation supervision, start-up

and test services and operation and maintenance personnel training services. The representative shall make a minimum of 3 visits, minimum 8 hours on-site for each visit, to the site. The first visit shall be for assistance in the installation of equipment. The second visit shall be for checking the completed installation and start-up of the system. The third visit shall be as described under Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. Manufacturer's representative shall test operate the system in the presence of the ENGINEER and verify that the standby power generators conform to requirements. Representative shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the installation is entirely satisfactory.

B. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, shall be considered as included in CONTRACTOR’S bid price.



26866 16271-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16271

DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. Provide the labor, materials, equipment, incidentals required to furnish and

install dry type transformers 150 KVA and larger with copper windings, complete and operational, as specified and shown on the Drawings.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. ANSI C89.1, Specialty Transformers. 2. ANSI C89.2, Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications. 3. UL Standard No. 506, Specialty Transformers. 4. UL Standard No. 1561, including UL K factor listed. 5. NEMA ST-20 and ASNI C89.2, Sound Levels. 6. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 7. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for transformers proposed for use,

including pad layout, materials, dimensions, etc. 2. Listing of the transformers to be furnished with their ratings and proposed

locations identified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Type: Low-temperature rise, dry type, general purpose. 2. Rating: KVA, primary voltage and connection, secondary voltage and

connection, frequency and number of phases shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3. Windings: Copper


26866 16271-2 1/24/2019

4. Taps: Full capacity, two 2-1/2 percent primary taps above normal and a minimum of two 2-1/2 percent primary taps below normal.

5. Enclosure: UL listed for either indoor or outdoor use. 6. Insulation: Class 220°C, 115°C rise. 7. Identification: Identify transformers in accordance with Section 16050, General

Provisions, identifying the transformer identification number, primary and secondary power identification and voltages.

B. Non Linear Load, K Factor Rated Transformer:

1. Type: 100 percent non-linear rated, specifically designed to handle non-linear loads with double size neutral. Transformer shall include an electrostatic shield grounded to the transformer core.

2. UL K Factor: K=13. 3. Impedance: Three percent minimum, five percent maximum.

C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. General Electric Company. 2. Jefferson. 3. Square D Company.


A. Install transformers on walls or floors at locations shown on the Drawings. Install floor mounted transformers on raised concrete bases. Provide sufficient access and working space for ready and safe operation and maintenance.

B. Mount transformers so that vibrations are not transmitted to the structural parts of the

building or to other equipment. Make connections to transformers with flexible conduit.

C. Adjust tap settings to provide proper voltage at panelboards. D. Ground transformer properly and install in conformance with Phoenix Electrical

Code.



26866 16282-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16282

SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install surge protective devices (SPD) as a minimum for all 480 VAC and above switchboards and motor control centers above 1,000 amp rating and where shown on the Drawings.

2. These Specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for a system of electrical surge protective device filter components integrating both surge suppression and electrical high frequency noise filtering.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience of producing


B. Referenced Standards. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of

the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. ANSI/IEEE (C62.41-1991 and C62.45-2002). 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoptions. 3. NFPA (70 [NEC], 75 and 78). 4. UL Standard No. 248-1, 1283 and 1449 Third Edition.

a. Each system component shall be UL Standard No. 1283, Listed as an Electromagnetic Interference Filter.

b. Each system component shall be UL Standard No. 1449, Third Edition, listed as a Surge Protective Device.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Electrical and mechanical drawings for each type of unit that shows electrical

ratings, dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection details and layout diagrams.

Provide complete copy of Warranty; refer to requirement of paragraph 2.2.G of this Specification.

2. Provide verification that the SPD complies with the required UL Standard No.


26866 16282-2 1/24/2019

1449 VPRs. 3. Provide actual let through voltage test data in the form of oscillograph results for

the ANSI/IEEE C62.41 6kV/3kAcombination wave tested in accordance with ANSI/IEEE C62.45.

4. Provide spectrum analysis of each unit based on MIL-STD-220A test procedures between 50 kHz and 200 kHz verifying the device’s noise attenuation exceeds 50 dB at 100 kHz.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation and spare parts information. Provide complete copy of Warranty. Refer to requirements of paragraph 2.2.G of this Specification.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Unit Operating Voltage: The operating voltage shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The MCOV shall be greater

than 115 percent of the nominal system operating voltage. C. Protection Modes: For a wye configured system, the device must have directly

connected suppression elements between line-neutral (L-N), line-ground (L-G), and neutral-ground (N-G). For a delta configured system, the device must have suppression elements between line to line (L-L) and line to ground (L-G).

D. The maximum UL Standard No. 1449 VPR for the device must not exceed the

following: 1. Line to Neutral: 1200 volts. 2. Line to Ground: 1200 volts. 3. Neutral to Ground: 1200 volts. 4. Line to Line: 2000 volts.

E. Surge Current Capacity: For branch applications, total surge current per phase (based

on an 8x20 microsecond waveform) that the device is capable of surviving shall not be less than 250 kA per phase, or 125 kA per mode on L-G, L-N and N-G modes (Wye system); L-L and N-G (Delta system).

F. Let through voltage at the Motor Control Center Stabs: Upon request, the

manufacturer must provide suppression test results measured at the motor control


26866 16282-3 1/24/2019

center bucket stabs.

2.2 DESIGN

A. Each circuit shall include arrays of fused Metal Oxide Veristors (MOV) to suppress voltage surges.

B. Balanced Suppression Platform: The surge current shall be equally distributed to all

MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance. The surge suppression platform must provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Designs incorporating SPD modules which do not provide a balanced impedance path to each MOV shall not be acceptable.

C. Electrical Noise Filter: Each unit shall include a high performance EMI/RFI noise

rejection filter. Noise attenuation for electric line noise shall be 55 dB at 100 kHz using the MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method. The unit shall be complimentary listed to UL Standard No. 1283. Products not able to demonstrate noise attenuation of 55 dB @ 100 kHz shall be rejected.

D. Internal Connections: No plug-in component modules or printed circuit boards shall

be used as surge current conductors. All internal components shall be hardwired with connections utilizing low impedance conductors and compression fittings.

E. Safety and Diagnostic Monitoring. Each unit shall be equipped with 200 kAIC

internal fuses. Each unit shall provide the following three levels of monitoring: 1. Continuous monitoring of fusing system. 2. Internal infrared sensor system for monitoring individual MOVs (including

neutral to ground). The system must be capable of identifying open circuit failures not monitored by conventional fusing systems.

3. Thermal detection circuit shall monitor for overheating in all modes due to thermal runaway.

F. A green/red solid state indicator light shall be provided on each phase. The absence

of a green light and the presence of a red light; shall indicate which phase(s) have been damaged. Fault detection will activate a flashing trouble light. Units will not be accepted if they cannot detect open circuit damage, thermal conditions, and over current.

G. Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide a full five year warranty from the Date of

Shipment against any SPD part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and National Electrical Code.

H. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. General Electric 2. Square "D" Company


26866 16282-4 1/24/2019

3. Liebert 4. Or equal.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. The unit must be equipped with surge event counter and audible alarm. B. Remote Status Monitor. The SPD device must include Form C dry contacts (one

N.O. and one N. C.) for remote annunciation of unit status to Computer Control System. The remote alarm shall change state if any of the three monitoring systems described detect a fault condition.

C. Push-To-Test Feature. Each suppression unit shall incorporate an integral test feature

which verifies the operational integrity of the unit’s monitoring system. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Suppressors shall be installed inside the motor control center at the manufacturer’s factory.

B. To facilitate removal and inspection, the suppressor shall be mounted within a

standard motor control center bucket. C. The suppressor shall be mounted in a standard 12-inch NEMA 1 compartment.

Conductor length between the suppressor and the stab shall be less than 5-inches. All units shall be internally fused with 200 kAIC. All status indicators and monitors shall be mounted on the front of the motor control center compartment for easy visibility.



26866 16412-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16412

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install automatic transfer switches complete and operational.




B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of

the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. UL Standard No. 1008, Automatic Transfer Switches. 2. NEMA 1CS2-447, AC Automatic Transfer Switches. 3. NEMA 1CS1-109, Tests and Procedures. 4. IEEE Standard 472-1974, Guide for Surge Withstand Capability Tests. 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 6. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for automatic transfer switches proposed

for use. 2. Listing of the transfer switches to be furnished with ratings.


1. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation and spare parts information.



26866 16412-2 1/24/2019


A. Rating: 1. Switches shall be capable of switching all classes of loads and shall be rated for

continuous duty when installed in a non-ventilated enclosure. 2. Switches shall be four pole with overlapping neutral, 480 volts with ampere

rating as shown on the Drawings. 3. Switches shall have a withstand rating of 65,000 amps at 480 volts. 4. All control wiring shall be Type SIS, rated for 600 volts. All control wire

terminations shall be identified with tubular, sleeve-type markers. 5. Switches shall be enclosed in a freestanding, NEMA 12, non walk-in enclosure

or integrally mounted in motor control centers as shown on the Drawings. Enclosures shall have a hinged and latched, gasketed door.

B. Operation:

1. Switches shall be double throw and operated by one, non-fused, momentarily energized operating mechanism with a minimum transfer time of 400 milli-seconds.

2. Operating mechanism shall prevent a sustained neutral position. 3. Normal and standby contacts mechanically and electrically interlocked to

prevent simultaneous closing. 4. Mechanical locking of main contacts in each direction shall be accomplished

without the aid of latching solenoids, toggle mechanisms or gear arrangements. 5. An overload or short-circuit shall not cause the switch to go to a neutral

position. 6. Inspection of all movable and stationary contacts shall be possible from the front

of the switch without disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. A manual operating handle shall be provided for maintenance purposes. The maintenance handle shall permit the operator to stop the contacts at any point throughout the entire travel to properly inspect and service the contacts when required.

C. Accessories: An integrally mounted control panel with adjustable solid-state or

programmable microprocessor sensing and timing functions shall provide the following operational characteristics: 1. Time delay on momentary dips in normal source (0.5 to 6.0 seconds), factory set

at one second. 2. Time delay on transfer to emergency for controlled loading of generator (0 to 1

minute), factory set at 0 minutes. 3. Time delay on retransfer to normal (0 to 30 minutes), factory set at 30 minutes. 4. Time delay on engine shutdown after retransfer to normal (0 to 5 minutes),

factory set at five minutes. 5. Close differential voltage sensing of all normal source phases (pickup adjustable

from 85 to 100 percent of nominal and dropout adjustable from 75 to 98 percent


26866 16412-3 1/24/2019

of pickup), factory set to pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent of nominal.

6. Independent voltage (85 to 100 percent pickup) and frequency (90 to 100 percent pickup), sensing of the emergency source to prevent premature transfer, factory set to pickup at 90 percent of nominal voltage and 95 percent of nominal frequency.

7. Test switch (momentary type) to simulate failure of normal source. 8. Two sets of gold-plated single pole, double throw contacts, which operate when

the normal source fails. One set to be used for engine starting and the second set to be spare.

9. Pilot lights to indicate switch position. 10. Auxiliary contacts (two closed on "NORMAL" and two closed on "EMER-

GENCY") rated ten amps, 120 VAC. Additional auxiliary contacts as shown on the Drawings.

11. All time delay and sensing functions shall be field adjustable over the ranges indicated and shall operate with minimum drift (not to exceed ± one percent of set frequency, ± two percent of set voltage, and ± ten percent of set time delay) over the temperature range of -20°C to +70°C. The control panel shall be provided with a protective cover and an isolation plug in the wiring harness to disconnect all the control wires between the control panel and the main transfer panel.

12. Plant exerciser to automatically exercise generator. Exerciser shall be adjustable type with minimum of 15-minute increments with switch to select "NO LOAD" (switch will not transfer) "LOAD" (switch will transfer) exercise period.

13. Two position selector switch to select either automatic or manual retransfer to normal operation.

14. Pushbutton retransfer to normal, operable only when two position selector switch (Refer to Paragraph 2.1.C.13., above) is in the "MANUAL" position.

15. Time delay transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes, factory set at one minute.

16. Retransfer to normal time delay, adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, factory set at five minutes.

17. An inphase monitor to control transfer and retransfer operations between live sources so that closure on the alternate source will occur only when the two sources are approaching or near synchronism (within 15 electrical degrees maximum) so that inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents. The monitor shall function over a frequency difference range of up to ± two Hz with a maximum operating transfer time of one-sixth of a second. If the voltage of the load-carrying source drops below 70 percent, the inphase function shall be automatically bypassed. The monitor shall not require interwiring with the generator controls or active control of the governor.

18. Overlapping neutral.


26866 16412-4 1/24/2019

D. Electrical and Mechanical Performance: Comply with UL Standard No. 1008 and NEMA Standard ICS2-447. In addition, performance must meet or exceed the following requirements and, if so requested, be verified by certified laboratory test data: 1. Temperature Rise: Measurements shall be made after the overload and

endurance tests. 2. Dielectric: Measurements shall be made at 1960 VAC RMS minimum

following the withstand current rating test. 3. Transient Withstand: Control panel shall pass the voltage surge withstand test

in accordance with IEEE Standard 472-1974 and the voltage impulse withstand test in accordance with NEMA ICS-1-109.

4. Withstand: UL listed to withstand the magnitude of fault current available at the switch terminals when coordinated with respective protective devices as shown on the Drawings at an X/R ratio of 6.6 or less. The main contacts shall not trip open or weld when subjected to fault currents.

E. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. Automatic Switch Co. 2. Russelectric. 3. Zenith Controls, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine the conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify the ENGINEER, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready and safe operation and maintenance.

B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other surfaces on which they are mounted. C. Install in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code.



26866 16422-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16422

COMBINATION MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install combination magnetic motor starters.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. NEMA Standard ICS2-110, General Standards for Manual and Magnetic

Controllers. 2. NEMA Standard ICS2-321 AC General Purpose Class A Controller for Squirrel

Cage Induction Motors, 600 volts and less. 3. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum). 4. UL Electrical Construction Materials Directory (NLDX). 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 6. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer’s technical information for combination magnetic motor starters

proposed for use. 2. Listing of the combination magnetic motor starters to be furnished with their

location, NEMA size and enclosure type and equipment to be controlled identified.


A. General: 1. Type: Combination type with magnetic only motor circuit protector. Magnetic

coil operated, horsepower rated with thermal overload protection.


26866 16422-2 1/24/2019

2. Enclosures: NEMA 1 for dry, indoor locations and NEMA 4X non-metallic or Type 316 stainless steel for outdoor and damp, wet or corrosive indoor locations.

3. Functional Type: Full voltage, single speed, non-reversing, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.

4. Control power transformer fused and grounded on low voltage (120 VAC) side for each starter.

5. Auxiliary contacts for motor space heaters, remote status signals and interlocks as shown on the Drawings.

6. Overload Relays: a. Bimetallic overload relays

7. Start and stop control stations, selector switches, pilot lights and other devices as shown on the Drawings.

8. Provide factory installed engraved manufacturer’s nameplate identifying the equipment controlled.

B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. Square D Company. 2. Allen Bradley Company. 3. General Electric Company.


A. Mount controller so that sufficient access and working space is provided for safe operation and maintenance.

B. Securely fasten enclosure to wall or other mounting surfaces. Where local wall is not

available, provide stainless steel supports to rigidly support equipment reasonably close to motor.

C. Install in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code.



26866 16423-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16423

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install motor control centers and modify existing motor control centers.

B. Coordination: Obtain motor nameplate data on equipment being furnished for

properly sizing circuit breakers, starters and overloads.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. UL Standard #845, Electric Motor Control Centers. 2. NEMA ICS2-322, AC General Purpose Motor Control Centers. 3. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 4. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code. 5. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 79, Annex "D" Standards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for motor control centers proposed for use. 2. Outline and summary sheets with schedules of equipment in each unit. 3. Unit control schematic and elementary wiring diagrams showing numbered

terminal points, interconnections to other units, wire colors and wire labels. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including copies of all Record wiring diagrams, test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information.



26866 16423-2 1/24/2019


A. General: Motor control center lineups shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. Motor control centers including structures, appurtenances and all major components (contactors, circuit breakers, etc.) therein shall be the product of one manufacturer. 1. Service: Voltage rating and number of wires shall be as shown on the Drawings.

Motor control centers shall operate from a 3 phase, 60 Hertz system. 480/277 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire. UL rated as suitable for service entrance.

2. Wiring: NEMA Class II, Type B. Color coding shall conform to NFPA 79. 3. Enclosure: NEMA 1A. 4. Motor control centers, which contain variable frequency drives, shall be

manufactured by the same manufacturer as the variable frequency drives. 5. Main and tie circuit breakers shall have a symmetrical interrupting rating of

65,000 amps. 6. Main and tie circuit breakers shall be key interlocked to permit only two of three

breakers to be closed at any one time. Provide auxiliary dry contacts, one normally open and one normally closed, to the Computer Control System on all three breakers indicating when breakers are closed.

7. Circuit breakers with trip ratings over 800 amps shall have integral ground fault protection.

B. Construction:

1. Totally enclosed structure, dead front, consisting of nominal 21-inch deep, 24-inch wide, 90-inch high vertical sections bolted together to form a unit assembly.

2. Removable lifting angles for each shipping section. 3. Two removable floor sills for mounting. 4. Horizontal wireways top and bottom, isolated from horizontal bus and readily

accessible. 5. Isolated vertical wireways with cable supports, accessible through hinged doors,

for each controller section. 6. All metal non-conducting parts electrically continuous.

C. Bus System and Conductors:

1. Rating: Bus bracing of 65,000 amps symmetrical and bus current capacities as shown on the Drawings.

2. All bus bars shall be tin-plated copper rated to UL heat rise standards. 3. Bus bar connections shall be easily accessible with simple tools. 4. Main Horizontal Bus: Continuous edge mounted, and isolated from wireways

and working areas. 5. Vertical Bus: Continuous and isolated by a glass polyester barrier. 6. Grounding Bus: Full length mounted across the bottom, drilled with lugs of

appropriate capacity, as required.


26866 16423-3 1/24/2019

7. Neutral Bus: Insulated continuous through control center drilled with lugs of appropriate capacity, as required.

8. All control conductors shall be Type SIS, No. 14 AWG minimum.

D. Unit Compartments: 1. Individual front door for each unit compartment with engraved manufacturer’s

nameplates identifying equipment. Manufacturer’s nameplates to be 1-inch by 3-inches minimum, secured to unit door with two stainless steel screws.

2. Starter and feeder-unit doors interlocked mechanically with the unit disconnect device to prevent unintentional opening of the door while energized and unintentional application of power while door is open, with provisions for releasing the interlock for intentional access and application of power.

3. Padlocking arrangement permitting locking the disconnect device in the OFF position, with at least three padlocks, with the door closed or open.

4. NEMA 1 minimum motor starter size. Starter units completely draw-out type in Sizes 1 and 2 and draw-out type after disconnecting power leads only in Sizes 3 and 4.

5. Motor starters shall include a magnetic contactor, NEMA rated with encapsulated magnet coils. Wound coils not acceptable.

6. Reversing Starters: Single speed full voltage with two contactors and extra interlocking contacts.

7. Reduced Voltage Starters: Autotransformer, closed-transition type with embedded type over-temperature protection. Set on 65 percent starting tap, unless otherwise noted.

8. Overload Relays: Three bimetallic, adjustable types, manually reset from outside the enclosure by means of an insulated button with normally open auxiliary dry contacts for remote alarm and local indication purposes and separate heater elements sized for the full load amperes and service factor of the actual motors furnished.

9. Individual control power transformers for all starters, capacity as required for all control circuit devices, 100 VA minimum, Class A insulation, two primary fuses, 120 volt secondary, one secondary fuse and the other secondary leg grounded.

10. Separate Control: Where control power to starter is provided by a separate power source, a control power fuse shall be provided in the unit and the main disconnect shall be equipped with a normally open contact to isolate the control circuit from the source when the controller disconnect is open. Power source should be identified by yellow conductors, if the source is separated or foreign to the starter cubicle.

11. Motor horsepower shown are preliminary. Circuit breaker trips and starter overload heaters to be coordinated with the actual equipment installed.

12. Auxiliary contacts, relays, timers as required for specified control functions and those shown on the Drawings.

13. All starter devices, including spare contacts wired to numbered terminal blocks.


26866 16423-4 1/24/2019

14. Control devices shall be 600 volt heavy duty, NEMA A600. Relays shall have convertible contacts. Pilot devices shall be oil tight. Pilot lights shall be 120 VAC, push-to-test.

15. Feeder Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic type, 65,000 amps symmetrical interrupting capacity.

16. Motor Starter Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip only motor circuit protectors, 65,000 amps symmetrical interrupting capacity.

17. Provide the following diagrams and tables on the inside of the door for each compartment: a. Elementary wiring diagram. b. Table of overload heater sizes with the correct heater highlighted. c. Table of the motor circuit protector settings with the correct setting

highlighted. 18. Sections shown on the Drawings as "SPACE" shall be complete with all

necessary hardware for the future installation of a plug-in unit. 19. Where required by the Drawings, furnish automatic transfer switches integrally

mounted within the motor control center. Automatic transfer switches shall be in accordance with Section 16412, Automatic Transfer Switches.

E. Metering:

1. Provide power monitoring as specified in Section 16911 – Power Monitoring System.

F. Spare Parts:

1. Provide the following spare parts for each motor control center lineup: a. Two fuses of each size and type used. b. One auxiliary control relay with at least two normally open and two

normally closed contacts. c. One control transformer of each size used. d. Twelve indicating lamps.

2. Spare parts shall be packed in sturdy containers with clear indelible identification markings and shall be stored in a dry, warm location until transferred to the OWNER. Deliver spare parts at the same time as the motor control centers. Comply with the requirements of Section 01783, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.

G. Manufacturer’s Nameplates:

1. Factory installed engraved manufacturer’s nameplates, mounted on the face of the assembly, and shall be furnished for all main, tie and feeder breakers. These nameplates shall be laminated plastic with 1/2-inch minimum, Arial, black characters on a white background or match existing, secured with stainless steel screws. These nameplates shall also contain item designation, equipment breaker frame size and breaker trip rating.

2. All control components within the assembly shall be identified in correspon-dence to appropriate designations on the manufacturer's wiring diagrams.


26866 16423-5 1/24/2019

H. Product and Manufacturer: Provide motor control centers of one of the following:

1. Square D Company. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install on raised concrete base at locations shown on the Drawings. Install support channels in concrete in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

B. For installations against masonry walls, provide an insulation board, 1/4-inch

minimum thickness, between motor control center and wall for corrosion protection. Trim board neatly within outline of unit.

C. Provide no openings in top or side of units not required for conduit. D. Cable circuits together within enclosures and identify with durable tag secured to

cabling twine. E. Set motor circuit protectors at lowest setting possible which permits motor starting

without nuisance tripping. F. Field test all motor control center components. G. Verify that wiring diagrams on inside of door of each compartment reflects the

"as-built" circuitry and that the correct overload heater size and motor circuit protector setting are noted.

H. Install in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code. I. Furnish new manufacturer’s nameplates on all new motor control centers.

3.4 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES


and test services and operation and maintenance personnel training services. The representative shall make a minimum of 3 visits, minimum 8 hours on-site for each visit, to the site. The first visit shall be for assistance in the installation of equipment. The second visit shall be for checking the completed installation and start-up of the system. The third visit shall be as described under Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. Manufacturer's representative shall test operate the system in the presence of the ENGINEER and verify that the motor


26866 16423-6 1/24/2019

control centers conform to requirements. Representative shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the installation is entirely satisfactory.

B. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, shall be considered as

included in CONTRACTOR’S bid price.



26866 16441-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16441

SERVICE ENTRANCE SECTION LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS


A. Scope: 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to furnish and

install free-standing, dead-front type low-voltage distribution switchboards, utilizing group mounted circuit protective devices as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.




B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of

the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. NEMA PB-2 2. UL Standard No. 891. 3. National Fire Protection Association 79, Electrical Standards for Industrial

Machinery. 4. Phoenix Building Code. 5. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 6. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code.

C. The manufacturer of the assembly shall be the manufacturer of the circuit protective

devices within the assembly. D. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or

9002 certified. E. The switchboards shall be suitable for and certified to meet all applicable seismic

requirements of the Phoenix Building Code, for Zone 2 application. Guidelines for the installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the switchgear manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment.


26866 16441-2 1/24/2019

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer’s technical information for low-voltage distribution switchboards

and equipment proposed for use. NFPA 79, Annex “D” Standard elementary and wiring diagrams shall be included. Shop Drawings shall include the following: a. Master drawing index. b. Front view elevation. c. Floor plan. d. Top view. e. Single line. f. Schematic diagram. g. Manufacturer’s nameplate schedule. h. Component list. i. Conduit entry/exit locations. j. Assembly ratings including:

1) Short-circuit rating. 2) Voltage. 3) Continuous current.

k. Major component ratings including: 1) Voltage. 2) Continuous current. 3) Interrupting ratings.

l. Cable terminal sizes. m. Certified production test reports. n. Wiring diagrams. o. Installation information, including seismic certification and equipment

anchorage details. p. Provide Hazard Risk Category, incident energy, and PPE for specific

installation as defined by NFPA 70E.

B. Where applicable, the following additional information shall be submitted to the ENGINEER: 1. Busway connection. 2. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies. 3. Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies. 4. Key interlock scheme drawing and sequence of operations.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Submit complete installation, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation and spare parts information.

2. Furnish Operations and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with require-ments of Section 01781, Operation and Maintenance Data.


26866 16441-3 1/24/2019


A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions. One copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.

B. Deliver materials to the site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver

anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of the Work.

C. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery

to the site. Notify ENGINEER of any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all

materials off the ground, using pallets, platforms or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RATINGS

A. The assembly shall be rated to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short-circuit conditions when connected directly to a power source having available fault current of 65,000 amperes symmetrical at rated voltage.

B. Voltage rating shall be 480/277 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Switchboards shall consist of the required number of vertical sections bolted together

to form a rigid assembly. The sides and rear shall be covered with removable bolt-on covers. All edges of front covers or hinged front panels shall be formed. Provide adequate ventilation within the enclosure.

B. All sections of the switchboard shall be rear aligned with depth as shown on the

Drawings. All protective devices shall be group mounted. Devices shall be front removable and load connections front accessible enabling switchboard to be mounted against a wall.

C. The low-voltage distribution switchboards shall be UL labeled.


26866 16441-4 1/24/2019

D. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. General Electric 2. Square D 3. Allen Bradley 2. Or equal.

2.3 BUS

A. All bus bars shall be tin-plated copper. Main horizontal bus bars shall be mounted

with all three phases arranged in the same vertical plane. Bus sizing shall be based on NEMA standard temperature rise criteria of 65°C over a 40°C ambient (outside the enclosure).

B. Provide a full capacity neutral bus where a neutral bus is shown on the Drawings,

unless otherwise specified. C. A tin-plated copper ground bus (minimum 1/4 by 2-inch), shall be furnished firmly

secured to each vertical section structure and shall extend the entire length of the switchboard.

D. All hardware used on conductors shall be high-tensile strength and zinc-plated. All

bus joints shall be provided with conical spring-type washers. 2.4 WIRING/TERMINATIONS

A. Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the switchboard shall

be furnished as required. Control components mounted within the assembly, such as fuse blocks, relays, pushbuttons, switches, etc., shall be suitably marked for identification corresponding to appropriate designations on manufacturer’s wiring diagrams.

B. Mechanical-type terminals shall be provided for all line and load terminations

suitable for copper or aluminum cable rated for 75°C of the size as shown on the Drawings.

C. Lugs shall be provided in the incoming line section for connection of the main

grounding conductor. Additional lugs for connection of other grounding conductors shall be provided as shown on the Drawings.

D. All control wire shall be Type SIS, bundled and secured with nylon ties. Insulated

locking spade terminals shall be provided for all control connections, except where saddle type terminals are provided integral to a device. All current transformer secondary leads shall first be connected to conveniently accessible short-circuit


26866 16441-5 1/24/2019

terminal blocks before connecting to any other device. All groups of control wires leaving the switchboard shall be provided with terminals blocks with suitable numbering strips. Provide wire markers at each end of all control wiring. The wires shall be color coded conforming to the requirements of NFPA 79.

2.5 MOLDED CASE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Main breakers and feeder circuit breakers of 200 amp frame and above shall be molded case circuit breakers with microprocessor based trip unit which shall provide adjustable long time pickup and delay, adjustable short time pickup and delay, adjustable instantaneous and adjustable ground fault pickup and delay. The microprocessor trip unit shall be General Electric, MicroVersaTrip Plus, or equal. Interrupting rating shall be 65,000 amps symmetrical. Circuit breakers of 100 amp frame and below shall have thermal-magnetic trip units and inverse time characteristics.

B. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-

make/quick-break over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free. Automatic tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be nonwelding silver alloy, and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of arc chutes. A push-to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism.

C. Circuit breakers shall have a minimum symmetrical interrupting capacity as shown

on the Drawings. D. Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be current limiting.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Control power transformers with primary and secondary protection shall be provided, as shown on the Drawings, or as required for serving space heaters.

B. Each section of the switchboard shall be provided with a thermostatically controlled

space heater. Power for the space heaters shall be obtained from a control power transformer within the switchboard. Supply voltage shall be 120 VAC.

2.7 ENCLOSURES

A. NEMA 3R. 2.8 MANUFACTURER’S NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturer’s Nameplates: 1. Factory installed engraved manufacturer’s nameplates, mounted on the face of

the assembly, and shall be furnished for all main, tie and feeder breakers. These


26866 16441-6 1/24/2019

nameplates shall be laminated plastic with 1/2-inch minimum, Arial, black characters on a white background or match existing, secured with stainless steel screws. These nameplates shall also contain item designation, equipment served breaker frame size and breaker trip rating.

2. All control components within the assembly shall be identified in correspon-dence to appropriate designations on the manufacturer's wiring diagrams.

2.9 FINISH

A. All exterior and interior steel surfaces of the switchboard shall be properly cleaned

and provided with a rust-inhibiting phosphatized coating. Color and finish of the switchboard shall be ANSI 61 light gray.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FACTORY TESTING

A. The following standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided

under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of ANSI and NEMA standards. 1. The switchboard shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted, and tested at

the factory. After assembly, the complete switchboard will be tested for operation under simulated service conditions to ensure the accuracy of the wiring and the functioning of all equipment. The main circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 2200 volts for one minute between live parts and ground, and between opposite polarities. The wiring and control circuits shall be given a dielectric test of 1500 volts for one minute between live parts and ground.

B. The manufacturer shall provide three certified copies of factory test reports.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install all equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions, approved Shop Drawings and Phoenix Electrical Code.

B. The assembly shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be capable of

being moved into installation position and bolted directly to CONTRACTOR supplied floor sills to be set level in concrete in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. All necessary hardware to secure the assembly in place shall be provided by CONTRACTOR.

3.3 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS


26866 16441-7 1/24/2019

A. Perform field adjustments of the protective devices as required to place the equipment in final operating condition. The settings shall be in accordance with the approved short-circuit study, protective device evaluation study and protective device coordination study.

B. Necessary field settings of devices and adjustments and minor modifications to

equipment to accomplish conformance with an approved short circuit and protective device coordination study shall be carried out by CONTRACTOR, at no additional cost to the OWNER.

3.4 MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATION

A. A certified test report of all standard production tests shall be available to the

ENGINEER, upon request. 3.5 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES


and test services and operation and maintenance personnel training services. The representative shall make a minimum of 3 visits, minimum 8 hours on-site for each visit, to the site. The first visit shall be for assistance in the installation of equipment. The second visit shall be for checking the completed installation and start-up of the system. The third visit shall be as described under Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. Manufacturer’s representative shall test operate the system in the presence of the ENGINEER and verify that the low-voltage distribution switchboards conform to requirements. Representative shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the installation is entirely satisfactory.

B. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, shall be considered as

included in CONTRACTOR’S bid price.



26866 16442-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16442

LIGHTING, INSTRUMENTATION AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install lighting, instrumentation and distribution panelboards.

2. Installation of new circuit breakers in existing panelboards shall be included in this Section and shall be rated as specified herein.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. NEC Article 408, Switchboards and Panelboards. 2. NEMA PB1, Panelboards. 3. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 4. UL Standard 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes. 5. UL Standard 67, Electric Panelboards. 6. UL Standard 698, Circuit Breaker Panelboard Assembly. 7. UL Standard 943, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for panelboards proposed for use. 2. Listing of the panelboards to be furnished with an identification of their

proposed location, and number and rating of branch circuit breakers. 3. Lighting, instrumentation and distribution panelboards load calculations.


A. Panelboards:

1. Rating: Voltage rating, current rating, number of phases, number of wires and number of poles shall be as shown on the Drawings.

2. Circuit Breakers: Molded case, bolt-in thermal magnetic type with number of poles and trip ratings as shown on the Drawings.


26866 16442-2 1/24/2019

3. Main and branch circuit breakers shall be fully rated with interrupting capacities as follows: a. 65,000 amps for 480/277 volt circuit breakers. b. 22,000 amps for 120/240 volt circuit breakers.

4. Bus Bars: 98 percent conductivity copper, tin plated. All 4 wire panelboards shall have a solid neutral bar. All panels shall have ground bus.

5. Main: All panelboards shall have a main circuit breaker, unless Drawings specifically call for main lugs only.

6. Branch circuit breakers connected for sequence phasing. 7. Construction: Code grade steel, NEMA 12, ample gutter space, flush door, flush

snap latch and lock for dry indoor locations. NEMA 4X stainless steel for outdoor or damp indoor locations.

8. Trim: Surface or flush, as required. 9. Directory: White card, minimum card stack 90 lb., maximum size 8” x 5”,

placed in a 9” x 5 ½” self adhesive vinyl pocket. Directory information to be a copy of the as-built panel schedule as provided on the contract drawings.

10. Identification: Factory installed manufacturer’s nameplate identifying the panel number and voltage.

11. Product and Manufacturer: Provide panelboards of one of the following: a. Square D Company. b. General Electric Company. c. Allen Bradley d. Or equal

B. Mini-Power Centers:

1. General: Mini-power center shall consist of an encapsulated dry-type transformer, primary and secondary main circuit breakers, and secondary panelboard all in one enclosure.

2. Transformer Rating: KVA, primary voltage, secondary voltage, frequency and number of phases shall be as shown on the Drawings.

3. Branch Circuits: Molded case circuit breakers, plug-in thermal magnetic type with number of poles and trip ratings as shown on the Drawings.

4. Enclosure: Weatherproof, NEMA 3R. 5. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Mini-Power Zone by Square D Company. b. Panel Tran by Acme Electric Corporation.


A. Mounting: Install panelboards at locations shown on Drawings. Set cabinets so that top branch circuit breaker is not over six feet above the floor.

B. Arrange circuits to balance the loads on the panelboards.


26866 16442-3 1/24/2019


CITY OF PHOENIX: Water Services Department PROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main ans Water Main PROJECT NUMBER: WS90400067 and WS90501005

26866 16443-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16443

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as

shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS).

B. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in

this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes, but is not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section. 1. Section 16050, General Provisions.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). 2. UL Standard 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes. 3. UL Standard 67, Electric Panelboards. 4. UL Standard 698, Circuit Breaker Panelboard Assembly. 5. UL Standard 943, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters. 6. UL Standard 1449, Uninterruptible Power Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for UPS proposed for use. 2. Listing of the UPS to be furnished with an identification of their proposed

location, and number and size of UPS. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Uninterruptible Power System:

1. Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) shall be furnished to provide a reliable source of uninterruptible power with no break in AC output power during a

CITY OF PHOENIX: Water Services Department PROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main ans Water Main PROJECT NUMBER: WS90400067 and WS90501005

26866 16443-2 1/24/2019

complete or partial interruption of incoming line power. UPS shall include audio/visual alarms. UPS shall be UL listed.

2. UPS shall be comprised of a static inverter, a precision hysteresis loop battery charger, sealed maintenance free batteries, a relay and bypass switch shall be contained in a single package.

3. Under normal operating conditions, the critical load shall be powered by normal AC line supply that has been filtered through a ferroresonant transformer. When AC line power is present, the inverter shall be normally off.

4. When AC line power fails, the inverter shall supply AC power to the transformer from the battery source. There shall be no break in the output of the system during transfer from normal AC line supply to inverter battery supply or back to line. A single switch shall turn the system on and off. There shall also be an audible alarm disconnect switch.

5. Output capacity shall be provided to meet the load of equipment furnished and include the following requiremnts. a. Backup Run Time: 15 minutes at full load b. Input Voltage: 120 VAC, Output Voltage: 120 VAC. c. Voltage Regulation: ± Three percent nominal regulation. d. Efficiency: 85 percent on line at full load, 81 percent on inverter at full

load. e. Wave Shape: Computer grade sine wave. Less than five percent THD. f. Frequency: 60 Hz ± 0.5 Hz. g. Noise Rejection: Common mode better than 120 dB. Transverse mode

better than 60 dB. h. Isolation: Complete isolation from line with less than two pf of effective

capacitance. i. Operating Temperature: 32 deg F to +104 deg F. j. Size: 5 kW minimum

6. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Eaton/Powerware, Incorporated.


A. Mounting: Install UPS at locations shown on Drawings.



26866 16501-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 16501

LIGHTING FIXTURES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install lighting fixtures and controls.

B. Coordination:

1. Coordinate location of fixtures with piping, ductwork, openings and other systems and equipment and locate clear of interferences.

2. Coordinate fixtures to be mounted in hung ceilings with the ceiling suspension system proposed for use.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified: 1. Illuminating Engineer's Society. 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 3. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code. 3. UL Standard No. 57, Electric Lighting Fixtures. 4. UL Standard No. 844, Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous

Locations. 5. UL Standard No. 917, Clock-Operated Switches. 6. UL Standard No. 1570, Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures. 7. UL Standard #1571, Incandescent Lighting Fixtures. 8. UL Standard #1572, High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures. 9. City of Phoenix Lighting Ordinance No. G2699 for Exterior Lighting.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer’s catalog cuts and technical information for lighting fixtures

proposed for use. 2. Fixture construction details. 3. ETL photometric and isocandle curves for each fixture proposed. 4. Verification that recessed fixtures which are to be mounted in hung ceilings are

compatible with the ceiling suspension system proposed for use.


26866 16501-2 1/24/2019

5. Manufacturer’s technical information for lighting controls proposed for use. 6. Wiring diagrams.


A. Type: Lighting fixtures are noted in the Fixture Schedule on the Drawings. Fixtures to be complete with supports, ballasts, lamps and incidentals, as required.

B. Lamps:

1. Fluorescent: Cool white, energy efficient type. 2. High Pressure Sodium: Color corrected. 3. Light Emitting Diode (LED) 4. Spare: Ten percent spare lamps of each type and wattage.

C. Ballasts:

1. Fluorescent: High power factor, energy efficient type, equipped with thermal protectors (Type "P" ballast), compatible with the lamps installed.

2. High Intensity Discharge: High power factor, constant wattage, stabilized autotransformer with line starting current the same or less than operating current.

3. Ballasts to have "C" sound rating (min.) and be ETL/CBM certified. 4. Spare: Ten percent spare ballasts of each type.

D. Fixtures located in an area which is identified as a hazardous location shall be

approved as a complete assembly for the hazardous location classification as shown on the Drawings, shall be clearly marked to indicate maximum wattage of lamps for which they are approved, and shall be protected against physical damage by suitable guards.

E. Hardware: All necessary hangers, supports, conduit adaptors, reducers, hooks,

brackets and other hardware required for safe fixture mounting shall be furnished. Hardware shall have a protective, non-corrosive finish.

F. Time Switch:

1. Type: Astronomic dial time switch with day-omitting device. 2. Timing Motor: Heavy duty, synchronous, self-starting, high torque, 120 volt or

277, 60 cycles, as shown on the Drawings. 3. Capacity: 40 Amps per pole at 277 volts. 4. Dial: 24 hour rotation, with gear to provide one revolution per year which

automatically raises the ON and OFF settings each day according to seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise for the City of Phoenix, Arizona area.


26866 16501-3 1/24/2019

5. Reserve Power: Spring driven reserve sufficient to operate time switch contacts for a minimum of 30 hours after power failure. On restoration of power, time switch shall transfer to synchronous motor drive and automatically rewind reserve.

6. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Z Series by Tork Time Controls, Incorporated. b. Or equal.

G. Combination Lighting Contactors:

1. Rated 600 volts, 30 amps, electrically held number of poles as shown on the Drawings, housed in NEMA 12 enclosure.

2. Additional devices such as selector switches, circuit breakers, control power transformers, fuses, time clocks etc., as shown on the Drawings.

3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. General Electric. b. Allen-Bradley. c. Or equal.

H. Photocell:

1. Cadmium sulphide hermetically sealed cell, fully temperature compensated, with time delay of at least 15 seconds to prevent false switching.

2. Built-in fail safe light level selector, adjustable within limits of 2 to 50 foot candles and factory set at 25 foot candles.

3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. 2100 Series by Tork Time Controls, Incorporated. b. Or equal.


A. General: Fixture mounting heights and locations as shown on the Drawings are approximate and are subject to revision in the field, where necessary to clear conflicts and obstructions.

B. Suspended Fixtures: Pendant mount using 1/2-inch conduit stems. Ground to outlet

box. Attach mounting to building structure with expansion anchors. Fixtures shall not be dependent on the outlet box cover screws for support.

C. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Attach to appropriate outlet box. D. Boxes and Fixtures:

1. For units mounted against masonry or concrete walls, provide suitable 1/2-inch spacers to prevent mounting back of box directly against wall.


26866 16501-4 1/24/2019

2. Bolt units rigidly to building with expansion anchors, toggle bolts, hangers or Unistrut.

3. No boxes shall be installed with open conduit holes. 4. Cable each circuit and identify with tag.

E. Mounting Heights: Mounting heights or elevations are to bottom of the fixture or to

centerline of device. F. Relamp all fluorescent fixtures with new lamps at end of construction period, prior to

Final Completion of the new facilities by OWNER. G. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready

and safe operation and maintenance. H. Mount photocell as shown on the Drawings and adjust footcandle setting for proper

dusk and dawn photocontrol. Provide wiring in conduit from the photocell to controls.

I. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other surfaces on which they are mounted. J. Install fixtures in conformance with Phoenix Electrical Code.



26866 16911-1 12/20/2018

SECTION 16911

POWER MONITORING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


DRAWINGS, specified and required to furnish and install a complete Power Monitoring System for associated equipment.

2. Power monitoring shall be provided for all Service Entry locations, Main Breaker locations, motor loads greater than 50 Horse Power, and other loads as specified by ENGINEER.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown and specified. 1. Meter surge withstand shall conform to IEEE C37.90.1 and ANSI C62.41

(6KV). 2. The meter shall meet the accuracy requirements of IEC687 (class 0.2%) and

ANSI C12.20 (Class 0.2%). 3. The devices shall be UL listed. 4. The meter shall fit in both DIN 92mm and ANSI C39.1 Round cut-outs.

B. For retrofitting existing equipment, new components shall meet the equipment UL

requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS If the power monitoring equipment being supplied is part of new MCC, Switchgear, etc. then provide submittal information as part of the new equipment submittal.

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical information for equipment proposed for use. 2. Outline and summary sheets with schedules of equipment in each unit. 3. Unit control schematic and elementary wiring diagrams showing numbered

terminal points, interconnections to other units, wire colors and wire labels. 4. Front elevation and equipment installation details.


26866 16911-2 12/20/2018


1. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including copies of all Record wiring diagrams, test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts information.



A. Meters: 1. All meters shall have the following ratings, features, and functions; unless a

specific meter type is designated. a. Meter shall be designed for Multifunction Electrical Measurement on 3

phase power systems. The Meter shall support 3-Element Wye, 2.5 Element Wye, 2 Element Delta, 4 wire Delta systems.

b. The meter shall be user programmable for voltage range to any PT ratio. c. The meter shall have a burden of up to .36VA per phase, Max at 600V,

0.014VA at 120 Volts. d. The meter shall accept a direct voltage input range of up to 576 Volts

Line to Neutral, and a range of up to 721 Volts Line to Line. e. Meter shall accept a current input of up to 10 amps continuous. Start

up current for a 5 Amp input shall be no greater than .005 Amps. 2. The meter shall have the following additional ratings and features:

a. Fault Current Withstand shall be 100 Amps for 10 seconds, 300 Amps for 3 seconds, and 500 Amps for 1 second.

b. Meter shall be programmable for current to any CT ratio. The use of DIP switches for selecting fixed ratios shall not be acceptable

c. Meter shall have a maximum burden of 0.005VA per phase, at the maximum at 11 Amperes continuous input.

d. All inputs and outputs shall be galvanically isolated to 2500 Volts AC. e. The meter shall accept current inputs of class 10: (0 to 11A), 5 Amp

Nominal, and class 2 (0 to 2A), 1A Nominal Secondary. f. The meter shall have an accuracy of +/- 0.1% or better for volts and

amps, and 0.2% for power and energy functions. g. The meter shall provide true RMS measurements of voltage, phase to

neutral and phase to phase; current, per phase and neutral. h. The meter shall provide sampling at 400+ samples per cycle on all

channels measured readings simultaneously. i. The meter shall utilize 24 bit Analog to Digital conversion.


26866 16911-3 12/20/2018

j. Meters shall provide Volts, Amps, kW, kVAR, PF, kVA, Frequency, kWh, kVAh, kVARh and 1 KYZ pulse output.

k. Meters shall provide total % THD (Total Harmonic Distortion) Monitoring to the 40th order for Voltage and current per phase, and shall provide Volts, Amps, kW, kVAR, PF, kVA, Frequency., kWh, kVAh, kVARh and 1 KYZ pulse output and limit exceeded alarms.

3. The meter shall include an LED display. a. The meter must display a % of FULL SCALE on the front panel to

provide an analog feel. The % FULL SCALE shall have not less than 10 segments.

4. Meter shall be a traceable revenue meter, which shall contain a utility grade test pulse allowing power providers to verify and confirm that the meter is performing to its rated accuracy.

5. The meter shall include 1 independent communications port on the back, with advanced features. a. The port shall provide RS485 communication speaking Modbus ASCII,

Modbus RTU, or DNP 3.0 protocol through back plate. b. Baud rates shall be from 9600 baud to 57,600 baud.

6. The meter shall provide user configured fixed window or sliding window demand. This shall allow the user to set up the particular utility demand profile. a. Readings for kW, kVAR, kVA and PF shall be calculated using utility

demand features. b. All other parameters shall offer max and min capability over the user

selectable averaging period. c. Voltage shall provide an instantaneous max and min reading displaying

the highest surge and lowest sag seen by the meter. d. The meter shall be capable of operating on a power supply of 90 to 265

Volts AC and 100 to 370 Volts DC. Universal Power AC/DC Supply shall be available.

e. Meter AC/DC power supply shall accept burden of 10VA max. 7. Meter shall provide update rate of 100msec for Watts, Var and VA. All other

parameters shall be 1 second. 8. The meter shall provide Limits Alarms and Control Capability as follows:

a. Limit ranges can be set for any measured parameter. b. Up to 16 limit ranges per parameter can be set. c. Limit ranges shall be based on % of Full Scale settings. d. Manual relay control shall be available through software e. Relay set delays and reset delays shall be available

9. The meter shall have an option for data-logging capability with 128 Kilobyte memory. The meter shall have a real-time clock that allows for time stamping of all the data in the meter when log events are created. The meter shall have two logs:


26866 16911-4 12/20/2018

a. The meter shall have one historical log for trending profiles. The log shall be capable of being programmed with up to 64 parameters. The user shall have the ability to adjust logging intervals between the total logged parameters in order to increase or decrease the time allotted to the log.

b. The meter shall have a log for System Events. The System Events log shall record the following occurrences with a time-stamp: Demand Resets, Password Requests, System Startup, Energy Resets, Log Resets, Log Reads, and Programmable Settings Changes.

10. The meter shall have I/O expandability through two Option card slots on the back. a. The cards shall be capable of being installed in the field, without

removing the meter from installation. b. The meter shall auto-detect the presence of any I/O Option cards.

11. Power meter shall be able to be stored in (-20 to +70) degrees C. a. Operating temperature shall be (-20 to +70) degrees C.

12. A NEMA 12 faceplate rating shall be available for the meter. 13. Manufacture and Model

a. Eaton IQ26065100

B. Current Transformers:

1. Current rating – the primary current shall be based on the monitored equipment, the secondary current shall be 5.0 Amps.

2. Burden

a. For Service entry the meter burden of up to 0.005VA per phase, Max at 11 Amps should be used.

3. Accuracy requirements (to be specified on DRAWINGS)

a. Service entry power monitoring applications require higher accuracy than general load monitoring and protection applications.

i. Service entry applications require revenue grade Current Transformers (0.3% accurate or better).

ii. Service entry power monitoring revenue grade Current Transformers are to be separate from the protective circuits Current Transformers.

b. Unless specified otherwise, all other applications require only standard protection grade Current Transformers (typically 2.0-3.0% accurate).

4. Mountable Split Core Current Transformers are to be provided, as long as the

accuracy requirements for the specific application are maintained. ENGINEER may approve exceptions to this requirement in whole or in part.


26866 16911-5 12/20/2018

5. Current Ratio as specified on DRAWINGS or as approved by ENGINEER.

C. Potential Transformers:

1. Provide Potential Transformers for medium voltage applications and above and

are specified based on the specific application. 2. Burden

a. The meter burden of up to .36VA per phase, Max at 600V, 0.014VA at 120 Volts should be used.

3. Nominal secondary voltage to be 120 VAC.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. As specified in the manufacturers installation guide and as shown on the DRAWINGS.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. When retrofitting existing equipment install new components per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. For new equipment installation and qualification will be performed at equipment

fabrication site. 3.3 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Once equipment is energized the Contractor in coordination with ENGINEER and

OWNER shall verify all power monitoring meters communicate with the site specific computer system and the data received is correct for the component monitored.



26866 17001-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 17001

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as stated in the specified

in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and install, calibrate, test, start-up, commission and place in satisfactory operation a complete Process Control System (PCS). PCS shall be as specified by Division 17, Process Controls Sections and all controls systems provided by others in all Divisions as specified on the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

B. The PCS is designed to control and monitor equipment operation and information. The unit processes, which the PCS shall control and monitor are shown and described in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

C. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS are defined as suppliers or vendors who provide instrumentation, panels, equipment or services that interface with the PCS as specified in Division 17, Process Control System or other Divisions of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS shall coordinate with the PCS COORDINATOR (responsibilities as defined below).

D. CONTRACTOR shall configure all CCS software for the supplied CCS. However, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all hardware configurations, loop testing of signals, and communications testing for new and modified existing control equipment through the CCS.

E. All control loops shall function as described in Section 17051, Process Control Descriptions or other Divisions and Drawings of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

F. All instruments shall be field calibrated and witnessed by the ENGINEER as stated in Specification 17052 – Process Control System Primary Sensors and Field Instruments.


A. General: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall acquire the services of a PCS

COORDINATOR for coordination of the furnishing, approval, installation, testing, commissioning, and training for all aspects of the


26866 17001-2 1/24/2019

PCS. The PCS COORDINATOR shall be the CONTRACTOR’s representative for all subcontractors providing PCS equipment.

2. CONTRACTOR in conjunction with the PCS COORDINATOR shall be responsible for coordination and supervision of the supply, storage, installation, testing, startup, commissioning and training of all electrical equipment, instrumentation, panels and services defined in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS to produce a fully functional PCS.

3. CONTRACTOR in conjunction with the PCS COORDINATOR shall be responsible for proper operation of the PCS with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers stated in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

B. PCS COORDINATOR’s Qualifications: 1. Have experience at designing, supplying, installing, testing, start-up and

commissioning PCS’s. 2. Have experience in coordinating, reviewing and the handling of

equipment submittals. 3. Have experience with integration, implementation and have supported

standard lines of digital and analog processing control instrumentation equipment.

4. Have working knowledge in hardware application, data highway systems and computer control systems software programming procedures.

5. Have experience in coordinating or providing standard training course offerings in general process control applications and in operation, programming and maintenance of the control systems and related equipment.

6. Have a thorough working knowledge of wastewater treatment processes and control philosophy in accordance with standard practices of the wastewater treatment industry.

7. Have thorough knowledge of relevant NEC, OSHA, MIL, NRC, ISA, SAMA, NFPA, UL and API standards and all relevant state and local codes.

8. Have experience in coordinating, reviewing, handling of and presenting equipment operations and maintenance training materials.

C. PCS COORDINATOR’s Responsibilities: 1. General: a.. Attend the Pre-Construction Conference as required in Section

01301 – Pre-Construction Conference for the presentation of the responsibilities of the PCS COORDINATOR.

b. Coordinate with the CONTRACTOR in the generation of the Progress Schedule as required in Section 01321 – Progress


26866 17001-3 1/24/2019

Schedule (CPM) to incorporate PCS construction activities into the Progress Schedule.

c. Attend the project Construction Progress Meetings required in Section 01312 – Progress Meetings.

d. Coordinate PCS Progress Meetings as described in Paragraph 1.3 below.

e. Maintain a punch list of items to be completed / corrected for the PCS. Provide an updated copy of this punch list to the ENGINEER at each construction progress meeting.

2. Reviews: a. Review CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (Specifications, P&ID’s,

Process Drawings, Electrical Drawings, Installation Details, etc,) and develop a list of concerns or problems noted for the completion of the complete operating PCS. Submit list to the ENGINEER prior to review of equipment submittals.

b. Coordinate and review all PCS submittals and related equipment submittals in accordance with the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, prior to submission of submittal to the ENGINEER. Complete Submittal Transmittal Form 01332-A included in Section 01331 – Reference Forms for inclusion with each submittal.

3. Installation: a. Verify delivery and proper storage of all PCS equipment per the

requirements of Sections 01651 - Transportation and Handling of Materials and Equipment and 01661 – Storage of Materials and Equipment. Complete 01661-A - Equipment Delivery Inspection Report included in Section 01331 – Reference Forms for submittal to the ENGINEER.

b. Supervise the installation of the CCS instruments, panels, consoles, cabinets, wiring and other components required.

c. Coordinate with the CONTRACTOR in the development of all Maintenance of Plant Operations plans (MOPO’s) affecting PCS equipment installation or activities as required in Section 01143 – Coordination with Owner’s Operations.

d. Coordinate proper interfacing of CCS hardware, software, field devices and panels, including required interfacing with packaged control systems furnished by other equipment suppliers, and with the plant electrical system.

4. Testing: a. Coordinate all calibration, testing, start-up and commissioning of the

PCS as outlined in the Contract Documents. b. PCS COORDINATOR shall submit to the ENGINEER a schedule

with proposed start dates and test procedure guidelines for start-up, commissioning and field testing at least four weeks in advance of the test start date. Prior to testing each process area, coordinate


26866 17001-4 1/24/2019

with the CCS VENDOR to ensure that the installation of the CCS software, including any modifications and software configuration testing is completed prior to testing each process area.

c. Complete testing of each process loop through the CCS shall be documented by PCS COORDINATOR as listed in Section 17226 – Process Control System I/O list and submit the signed document to the ENGINEER upon successful completion of tests.

d. Coordinate all testing documentation in accordance with Section 01331, Reference Forms. Maintain a copy of Field Calibration Forms, Loop Test Forms, Equipment Test Reports, Loop Commissioning Forms, Factory Acceptance Test forms and other related forms from Section 01331 – Reference Forms in a single binder for submittal to the ENGINEER to be transmitted to the OWNER at the conclusion of the project.

e. Attend all factory tests required by Division 17 Specifications and other Division Specifications of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS that are inclusive of the overall PCS.

5. Commissioning and Substantial Completion: a. Coordinate and provide review comments of all PCS Vendor

Equipment Operations and Maintenance Manuals (VEOMM) prior to submission of manual to the ENGINEER. Complete Submittal Review Form 01781-B – Operations & Maintenance Data Review Checklist included in Section 01331 - Reference Forms for inclusion with each VEOMM submittal.

1) Maintain a red-line of the VEOMM ‘s electrical drawings and schematics used during construction to reflect changes or deviations that occur during installation, start-up and commissioning for incorporation into the final VEOMMs. Submit the red-lined electrical drawings and schematics to the provider of the equipment for updates as VEOMM Record Documents for submittal to the ENGINEER to be transmitted to the OWNER prior to Substantial Completion of the project.

b. Maintain red-line ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS used during construction to reflect changes or deviations that occur during installation, start-up and commissioning for incorporation into the final Record Drawings. Submit the red-lined ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS to the ENGINEER prior to Substantial Completion of the project.

c. Coordinate and supervise training of OWNER’S personnel in operation and maintenance of the process control system as required in Division 17 Specifications and other Divisions of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS as per Section 01821 – Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel.


26866 17001-5 1/24/2019

D. Reference Standards: 1. The following organizations have generated standards that are to be used

as guides in assuring quality and reliability of components and systems; govern nomenclature; define parameters of configuration and construction, in addition to specific details in the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

a. ISA, The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society. b. API, American Petroleum Institute. c. UL, Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. d. AWWA, American Water Works Association. e. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. f. NEMA, National Electrical Manufacturers Association. g. OSHA, Occupational Safety and Health Administration. h. ANSI, American National Standards Institute. i. MIL, Military Standards. j. NFPA, National Fire Protection Association. k. SAMA, Scientific Apparatus Manufacturers Association. l. NFPA, National Fire Protection Association 79, Annex “D”

Standards. m. IEEE, Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. n. NEC, National Electrical Code. o. FM, Factory Mutual.

1.3 COORDINATION AND PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Schedule and coordinate the system installation with regard to all other Work on the site and in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions. Said coordination shall be documented on the Project Schedule.

B. PCS coordination and progress meetings will be scheduled by the PCS COORDINATOR. The CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, OWNER and appropriate EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS shall be required to attend meetings during the time of active work on the PCS. A representative of the CCS VENDOR shall be required to attend meetings during the time of active work on the CCS. PCS COORDINATOR shall provide meeting minutes and updates to the project schedule.

1. The purpose of the meetings shall be to review the progress of the Work involving the PCS and provide coordination for installation, testing, commissioning, and training of the equipment to ensure that the Project Schedule is met.

2. Representatives at the meetings shall have the competence and authority to make any and all necessary decisions. Decisions and statements made at the meetings shall commit CONTRACTOR to agreed procedures and schedules.


26866 17001-6 1/24/2019

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. General: a. Shop Drawing submittals are to be in accordance with the

requirements of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and shall conform to the requirements of Section 01330 - Submittals and as required in other Division 17 Sections.

b. Manufacture or shipment of the PCS components shall not commence until related submittals have been reviewed by ENGINEER.

c. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in complete packages grouped to permit review of related items.

d. Review of Shop Drawings will be for conformance with CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and with regard to functions specified to be provided.

2. Submittal Requirements: a. Product information for all PCS equipment. Include the following: 1) Manufacturer’s product name and complete model number. 2) Equipment CMMS Tag and loop number as provided in

Section 01630 – Computerized Maintenance Management System Tags and from the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

3) Manufacturer’s data sheets and catalog literature. Provide data sheets as shown in ISA-20-1981. For instruments not included in ISA-20, submit data sheets using a similar format.

4) Description of construction features. 5) Performance and operation data. 6) Installation and mounting details, instructions and

recommendations. 7) Service requirements. 8) Dimensions. 9) List of recommended spare parts. 10) UL/UR Listing Numbers. 11) Electrical control schematics and field wiring diagrams 12) Ranges and set points of field and control panel instruments b. Control Panel Information: 1) Control panels shall be furnished in accordance with the

requirements as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Division 17000, Sections 17051 – Process Control Descriptions, 17226 – Process Control System I/O List, 17260 – Control Panels, 17262 – Programmable Logic Controller, Software and Programming and Division 16000, Section 16050 – General Conditions.

c. PLC Cabinets:


26866 17001-7 1/24/2019

1) PLC Cabinets shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements as shown on the Drawings and as specified in Division 17000, Section 17262 – PLC’s Software and Programming.

B. System Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Furnish Operations and Maintenance Manuals for the PCS in accordance

with Section 01781, Operation and Maintenance Data. C. Report Forms: 1. Three copies of the Field Calibration Forms, Loop Test Forms,

Equipment Test Reports, Loop Commissioning Forms, Factory Acceptance Test forms and other related forms from Section 01331 – Reference Forms shall be submitted to the PCS COORDINATOR.

1.5 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01651, Transportation and Handling of Materials and Equipment and Section 01661, Storage of Materials and Equipment.

B. All arrangements for transportation, delivery and storage of the equipment and materials to be in accordance with the requirements of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS and the requirements of equipment manufacturers.

C. PCS equipment shall be packaged at the factory prior to shipment to protect each item from damage during shipment and storage. Containers shall be protected against impact, abrasion, corrosion, discoloration or other damages. Clearly label contents of each container and provide information on the required storage conditions necessary for the equipment. Keep OWNER and ENGINEER informed of equipment delivery.

D. All equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and relevant organization standards. Equipment shall be protected from weather, moisture and other conditions that could cause damage. Items that require a controlled environment for storage such as panels and microprocessor units shall be stored in a climate controlled warehouse or facility. EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall notify CONTRACTOR and PCS COORDINATOR, in writing, with copies to OWNER and ENGINEER of the storage requirements and recommendations for the equipment prior to shipment.

E. Provide shop as-built control panel drawings upon delivery of the control panel.


26866 17001-8 1/24/2019

1.6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Power Supplies: 1. All electrically powered equipment and devices shall be suitable for

operation on 115-volt 60 Hz power. If a different voltage, a suitable transformer shall be provided if approved by ENGINEER and OWNER.

2. Appropriate power supplies shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR for all two wire transmitters, loops for monitoring discrete inputs and all necessary outputs.

3. Power supplies shall be mounted in enclosures and installed in the appropriate control room or field panel.

4. Design all power supplies for a minimum of 130 percent of the maximum simultaneous current draw.

B. Signal Requirements: 1. The control system shall be designed to use 4 to 20 mADC analog

signals, unless otherwise specified. 2. Provide signal converters and repeaters, where required. In addition,

analog inputs to the computer control system shall be through appropriate repeaters to provide signal isolation where series looped with other devices, and to allow the loop to maintain integrity even if the CCS is out of service. Power supplies shall be sized adequately for signal converter and repeater loads.

3. Signals shall be isolated from ground. 4. The system and associated input/output wiring will be used in a plant

environment where there can be high energy AC fields, DC control pulses, and varying ground potentials between the sensors/transducers or input contact locations and the system components. The system design shall be adequate to provide proper protection against interferences from all such possible situations.

C. Miscellaneous: 1. All instrumentation and PCS components shall be heavy-duty types,

designed for continuous service in a municipal wastewater treatment plant environment. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, where possible, and consist of equipment models, which are currently in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and be capable of field expansion through the installation of plug-in circuit cards and additional cabinets as necessary.

2. Design all logic and control loops to fail-safe. Fail-safe is to protect system if a field wire becomes disconnected.

3. All field-mounted instruments and PCS components shall be designed for installation in humid and corrosive service conditions. All field mounted instrument enclosures and appurtenances shall conform to NEMA ratings


26866 17001-9 1/24/2019

listed in Division 16000, Section 16050 – General Requirements, unless otherwise specified.

4. Ranges and scales specified herein shall be coordinated to suit equipment actually furnished.

5. Field-mounted devices shall be protected from exposure to freezing temperatures and shaded from direct sunlight.

D. Environmental Conditions: 1. The control system shall be designed and constructed for continuous

operation under the following temperature and humidity conditions: a. Control Rooms:

1) Ambient Temperature: 60°F to 80°F normal range; 40°F to 105°F occasional maximum extremes.

2) Relative Humidity: 80 percent, normal; 95 percent maximum.

b. Indoor locations for digital processing equipment hardware, control panels and instruments: 1) Ambient Temperature: 40°F to 120°F. 2) Relative Humidity: 98 percent maximum.

c. Outdoor locations for instruments: 1) Ambient Temperature: -10°F to 131°F. 2) Relative Humidity: 100 percent maximum.

E. System Designs: 1. Range, scale and setpoint values specified in other Division 17, Process

Control System Sections are for initial setting and configuration. Modifications to these values may be required based on actual equipment furnished and as necessary to implement proper and stable process action and that is determined as systems are placed in operation. These modifications shall be done at no additional cost to OWNER.

2. For any items where ranges, scales and setpoints may not have been specified, CONTRACTOR shall submit a recommendation to ENGINEER for review.

1.7 SYSTEM START-UP, COMMISSIONING AND FIELD TESTING

A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01752 – Equipment and System Start-up and Performance Testing and include the additional requirements:

1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install all equipment and coordinate all activities required to perform start-up, commissioning and field testing of the Process Control System. Field testing shall include an integrated system field test and operational availability demonstration.


26866 17001-10 1/24/2019

2. Retain the services of the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS and CCS VENDOR to supervise and/or perform start-up, commissioning and field testing of all system components. As part of these services, the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS shall include for the equipment items not manufactured by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER, the services of an authorized manufacturer’s representative to check the equipment installation and place the equipment in operation. The manufacturer’s representative shall be thoroughly knowledgeable about the installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment.

B. System Check-Out and Start-Up 1. With the aid of the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS, responsibility belongs to

CONTRACTOR to perform the following: a. Check and approve the installation of all computer control system

components and all cable and wiring connections between the various system components prior to placing the various processes and equipment into operation. Check-out shall include the following items as a minimum: 1) All wiring shall be checked at each termination point for

correct wire size, type, color, termination and wire number. 2) Analog wiring shall be checked for correct polarity and

ground continuity at each termination point in the loop. 3) All control and monitoring loops shall be checked for signal

continuity from source (such as field instrument/equipment, control panel, etc) to end destination.

b. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjustment, including calibration of all instruments, tuning of control loops, checking operation functions, and testing of final control actions. When there are future operational functions included in this Work, they should be included in the system checkout. All problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in start-up of the various unit processes.

c. All instruments and devices shall be checked to verify compliance with the Specifications and approved Shop Drawings.

2. Provide all test equipment required to perform the testing and field calibration of instruments during system checkout and start-up.

3. Furnish to the ENGINEER certified calibration reports provided in Section 01331, Reference Forms for field instruments and devices as soon as calibration is completed. Factory calibrations are not acceptable as a replacement for field calibrations. All instruments must be field calibrated and witnessed by the ENGINEER and OWNER.

a. Receipt of any calibration certificate shall in no way imply acceptance of the work or instrument.


26866 17001-11 1/24/2019

b. Each calibration certificate shall be signed and dated by an authorized representative of CONTRACTOR. Three copies of each completed certificate shall be submitted to ENGINEER.

4. Furnish to the ENGINEER two copies of an installation inspection report 01620-A - Manufacturer’s Installation Certification Form in Section 01331 – Reference Forms certifying that all equipment has been installed correctly and is operating properly. The report shall be signed by authorized representatives of both CONTRACTOR and the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER.

5. All spare parts must be on-site and accepted prior to commencing integrated system field tests.

C. Commissioning 1. Following the Process Control System checkout and initial operation,

CONTRACTOR, with the aid of the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS and CCS VENDOR, perform a complete system test in the presence of the ENGINEER to verify that all equipment is operating properly as a fully integrated system, and that the intended monitoring and control functions are fully implemented and operational.

a. Commissioning can only begin when all instruments and control panels are installed and wired. Operation and Maintenance manuals and a schedule for training must be approved prior to Commissioning.

b. All spare parts must be on-site and accepted prior to Commissioning.

c. Submit to the ENGINEER a schedule for Commissioning, including a proposed start date and Commissioning test sheet examples at least three weeks in advance.

2. Commissioning shall exercise field signals between field equipment or instrumentation and each Input/Output Panel though the CCS’s workstation graphic display. As a minimum, perform the following checks for each test:

a. All wiring shall be checked at each termination point for correct wire size, type, color, termination and wire number.

b. All instruments and devices shall be checked to verify compliance with the Specifications and approved Shop Drawings. The calibration of analog devices shall be verified including the zero and span.

c. Analog wiring shall be checked for correct polarity and ground continuity at each termination point in the loop.

d. All analog loops shall be verified at each termination point at 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% signal levels.

3. Provide the following documentation for use during the Commissioning effort.


26866 17001-12 1/24/2019

a. Complete panel schematic and internal point-to-point wiring interconnect drawings.

b. Complete electrical control schematics. c. Complete panel layout drawings. d. Complete field wiring diagrams. e. Complete instrument loop diagrams. f. Completed calibration certificates for all field and panel devices

which require adjustment and/or calibration. e. Provide one set of Commissioning documentation for the

OWNER'S personnel, one set for the ENGINEER'S use, one set for field use, and the required number of sets for CONTRACTOR'S use.

4. The Drawings corrected and modified during Commissioning shall form the basis for the "As-Built" Record Drawing requirement as specified in this Section.

5. Any defects or problems found during the Commissioning effort shall be corrected by CONTRACTOR and then retested to demonstrate proper operation.

D. Integrated System Field Test 1. Following the completion of Process Control System checkout and initial

operation and CCS software testing the CONTRACTOR, with the aid of the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER and CCS VENDOR, shall remain on-site and be available during this period to correct instrumentation and control system hardware problems. The integrated field test shall be performed to verify all equipment/instrumentation is operating properly as a fully integrated system with the CCS, and that the intended monitoring and control functions are fully implemented and operational.

2. Following software testing and demonstration of all system functions, the Process Control System including field sensors/transducers and instruments shall be running and fully operational for a continuous 48 hour period. The Operational Availability Demonstration specified below shall not begin until the continuous 48 hour integrated system test has been successfully completed and OWNER and ENGINEER agree that the Operation Availability Demonstration can begin.

3. Any defects or problems found with the instrumentation, control system hardware, control panel components/wiring and field devices during the integrated field testing effort shall be corrected by CONTRACTOR and then retested to demonstrate proper operation.

1.8 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM TRAINING

A. Requirements and Responsibilities


26866 17001-13 1/24/2019

1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to perform and coordinate all required training at times acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER.

2. Retain the services of all PCS EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS to provide operation and maintenance training for all Process Control System equipment as specified herein.

3. For equipment items not manufactured by the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS, the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER shall provide for on-site training by an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer as part of the Supplier’s services. The manufacturer’s representative shall be fully knowledgeable in the operation and maintenance of the equipment.

4. Responsibility for all costs associated with training both on-site and at the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER’S facilities, including all required materials, texts and required supplies, belongs to CONTRACTOR.

5. All training shall be conducted in the normal eight hour working days until conclusion of the training course.

B. Submittals 1. Submit training plans conforming to the requirements of Section 01821,

Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. Included in the plan shall be course outlines and schedules for training to be provided at the EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER’S facilities.

C. On-Site Training 1. Training Covering the Control Equipment: a. The EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS shall provide 8 hours of operations

training covering all system components. b. Training course shall accomplish the following:

1) Provide all instructions required to operate and utilize all system components.

2) Provide all instruction required to monitor and control the system processes from the designated control panel.

3) Explain procedures for control of the system during scheduled or rescheduled shutdown and the subsequent start-up.

4) Provide instructions for routine preventative and troubleshooting maintenance.

2. CCS Training: a. The CCS VENDOR shall provide 8 hours of training that covers the

CCS as follows: 1) Provide an overview of system hardware and software. 2) It shall train people in configuration, operation and

programming the CCS.


26866 17001-14 1/24/2019

3) The emphasis shall be placed on how to perform set point changes, minor programming changes, range changes, diagnostics and upkeep of documentation.

4) Instruction for hardware and software maintenance, troubleshooting and maintenance planning.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. All materials or products which can contact drinking water or a water treatment chemical furnished and installed under this division shall require NSF/ANSI 61, Drinking Water System Components Health Effects, approval or comply with Arizona Administrative Code R18-4-213, Standards for Additives, Materials, and Equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)



26866 17051-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 17051

PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section describes all of the anticipated control strategies under this Contract. The required control strategies for the various unit operations is a combination of the representation shown on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS and the requirements specified herein. The CONTRACT DRAWINGS do not show all the required internal diagnostic indications. In addition to the signals shown on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS, the following process control descriptions shall be provided, as a minimum: 1. Analog Signals: a. Analog signals shall be 4 to 20 mADC unless otherwise stated. b. Analog signals that are connected to multiple devices in the loop shall

be wired in series unless otherwise stated in the loop description. c. Loop power for all analog instruments shall be provided in the Local

Control Panel (LCP) or Motor Control Panel (MCP). If there is no LCP or MCP, loop power shall be derived from the Computer Control System - Remote Input/Output Panels (RIO)

2. Discrete Signals: a. Discrete signals for all field wires shall be designed to be fail safe. 1) If a field wire for a control circuit device fails the equipment

should be designed to shut down. 2) If a field wire for an alarm circuit fails, the alarm shall be

activated. 3. Indication of a communications failure between any of the Programmable

Logic Controllers (PLC) with the respective Computer Control System Field Control Unit (FCU) shall be programmed as an alarm in the Computer Control System. The broken communications link must be identified individually to assist in troubleshooting.

4. Indication of a power failure at any of the PLC's and/or FCU panels shall be programmed as an alarm in the Computer Control System and identified individually to assist in troubleshooting.

5. Mismatch alarms for all motorized equipment (e.g., pumps and gates, etc.). If the status feedback does not agree with the command after a time delay, annunciate the alarm in the Computer Control System.

6. Runtimes shall be programmed in the Computer Control System for all pieces of equipment unless elapse Time meters are shown on the P&ID’s or listed in the loop descriptions.


26866 17051-2 1/24/2019

7. Digital and analog signals provided from Vendor supplied equipment that are not shown on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS but are provided by the Vendor shall be verified and incorporated into the control systems.

B. The process control descriptions are written descriptions of the basic

configuration and/or programming required to implement the sequential control of the unit processes shown on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS and as specified. The control descriptions do not, in all cases, describe the process characteristics fully. Finalizing and tuning of strategies, as required, by the process characteristics shall be accomplished during start-up.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 West Anthem Lift Station 76

A. General: 1. P&ID’s – I Sheets 4 and 5.

B. Overview:

1. Sewage Lift Pumps - The sewage lift station Remote Telemetry Unit LCP- PLC-LS76 will use the Modicon M580 PLC platform. Control and monitoring of the sewage lift pumps will be accomplished using LCP-PLC-LS76 and LCP-PCP-LS76. Two modes of operation are required - PLC and backup. Both modes utilize level to start and stop the pumps. In backup mode pump 1 starts first and pump 2 starts second based upon level. Both stop at a determined level. In PLC mode, the PLC will alternate lead and lag rotation at each pump start. Associated equipment alarms are used for interlocking pump operation and are sent discretely to an autodialer located in LCP-PCP-LS76 for remote callout.

2. Communications – Panel LCP-COM-LS76 is being added to coordinate future site communications as required by the OWNER.

3. Site Lighting - The lighting contactor (located in LCP-PCP-LS76) is controlled by a three-position selector switch. When in the “ON” position, site lighting is on. When the selector switch is in the “AUTO” position, the site lighting is dependent on the site photocell or the gate switch for the final ok as to if site lighting will be on.

4. Power Monitoring – The power meter will be accessed locally at the meter. In the future, a network connection will be added to send the data to LCP- PLC-LS76 for computer control system monitoring.


26866 17051-3 1/24/2019

C. Monitoring and Control: 1. Field Instrumentation and Controls:

a. Loop 100 (Wetwell Level Transmitter (MR1) – Wetwell level signal (LIT-100) is displayed at LCP-PCP-LS76 and goes to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring and control. Wetwell Low Level (LSL-100) goes to the autodialer located in LCP-PCP-LS76 for remote callout.

b. Loop 200 (Wetwell Level Transmitter (MR2) – Wetwell level signal (LIT-200) is displayed at LCP-PCP-LS76 and goes to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring. Wetwell High-High Level (LSHH-200) goes to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring and control and to each lift pump for interlocking, to the autodialer located in LCP-PCP-LS76 for remote callout, and to illuminate a High-High Level Alarm light on LCP-PCP-LS76. Wetwell High Level (LSH-200A) goes to lift pump no. 1 for control and Wetwell High Level (LSH-200B) goes to lift pump no. 2 for control. Wetwell High-High Level can be reset using the reset button (HS-200) at LCP-PCP-LS76 or LCP-PLC-LS76 can send a reset (HS-200).

c. Loop HS-102 (Local/PLC Mode Selector Switch) – Station operating mode is selected using the selector switch located at LCP-PCP-LS76 and PLC mode status goes to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring and control. When PLC mode is selected, LCP-PLC-LS76 controls the lift pumps based on level.

d. Loop F-100 (Sewage Lift Pump No. 1 Discharge Flow) – Station discharge flow (FIT-100) and total flow (FQIT-100) are displayed at LCP-PCP-LS76 and sent to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring.

e. Loop F-200 (Sewage Lift Pump No. 1 Discharge Flow) – Station discharge flow (FIT-200) and total flow (FQIT-200) are displayed at LCP-PCP-LS76 and sent to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring.

f. Loop 100 & 200 (Sewage Lift Pump No. 1/2) – High Temperature (TSH-100/200) and Seal Leak (GSH-100/200) statuses are used by LCP-PCP-LS76 for monitoring and control. They are also hardwired to interlock the pump and to provide visual indication at LCP-PCP-LS76 using a High Temperature alarm light (TAH-100) and Seal Leak alarm light (GAH-100). The alarms will seal-in and can be reset using the reset button (HS-100C/200C) located at LCP-PCP-LS76. The alarm statuses are also used by the autodialer in LCP-PCP-LS76 for remote callout. Pump mode selection is made using a three-position selector switch (HS-100/200) located at LCP-PCP-LS76. When Hand or Auto mode is selected, the pump will run except when the High Temperature and/or Seal Leak alarms are energized. When the Off mode is selected the pump cannot be started. When Auto mode is selected, the pump will run as described below and Auto status goes to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring and control. Pump run status (MN-100/200) goes to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring and control. Pump runtime (RTM-100/200) is accumulated and reset (HMS-172) locally at LCP-PCP-LS76. Pressing this button resets both the local runtime


26866 17051-4 1/24/2019

and flow totals and runtime totals in LCP-PLC-LS76. Both flow and runtime can be reset from LCP-PLC-LS76. Pump discharge pressure (PIT-100/200) is displayed at LCP-PCP-LS76 and sent to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring.

g. Loop 103 (Lamp Test Button) – Lamp test pushbutton (HS-130) tests all of the lights associated with LCP-PCP-LS76.

h. Loop 140 (LCP-PCP-LS76 Temperature) – LCP-PCP-LS76 temperature transmitter (TT-140) sends cabinet temperature to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring. LCP-PLC-LS76 will use the temperature to generate a High Temp alarm based on an adjustable internal setpoint.

i. Loop 150 (LCP-PCP-LS76 Control Power) – LCP-PCP-LS76 Control Power Loss (JA-150) is displayed at LCP-PCP-LS76 and is sent to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring. It is also sent to the autodialer in LCP-PCP-LS76 for remote callout.

j. Loop 190 (Standby Generator) – When the station is using the standby generator for power, status is displayed at LCP-PCP-LS76 and sent to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring and control. It’s also sent to the LCP-PCP-LS76 autodialer for remote callout.

k. Loop 191 (Standby Generator) – Generator Faulted (YA-191) is displayed at LCP-PCP-LS76 and sent to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring. Faulted status also goes to the autodialer located in LCP-PCP-LS76 for remote callout. The alarm can be reset using the Generator Fault Reset button (HS-191) at LCP-PCP-LS76.

2. Motor/Local Control Panel - Controls: a. Station PLC mode (HS-102) of operation:

1) LIT-100 (MR1) provides the primary lift station process variable control in LCP-PLC-LS76 based on 4-20mA level signal. LCP-PLC-LS76 logic operates the lift station sewage pumps based on level setpoints in LCP-PLC-LS76 for starting and stopping the pumps. The pumps will operate in a lead/lag sequence. The pumps will alternate at each start. If the lead pump is not available, the lag pump will run in its place until the lead pump returns to normal at the next start request. If level in the Wetwell rises to a High-High Level (LSHH-200) as measured by LIT-200 (MR2), the lift station sewage pumps will automatically be placed into a backup mode until the level returns to normal and the high level reset button has been pushed. This is done with relay logic at LIT-200 and LCP-PCP-LS76. a. Normal Operation: Pump start and stop level setpoints will

be set in the PLC function block logic. Level setpoint adjustments can be made at LCP-PLC-LS76 through a laptop connection. As liquid level rises, the lead pump will be started when the level reaches the Lead Pump Start Level setpoint. The lead pump will continue to run until Wetwell


26866 17051-5 1/24/2019

level drops below the Lead/Lag Pumps Stop Level setpoint. If the level reached the Lag Pump Start Level setpoint, the lag pump will be started and will continue to run until the level drops below the Lead/Lag Pumps Stop Level setpoint.

2) LIT-200 (MR2) provides backup lift station control based on hardwired device contacts. The 4-20mA level signal is provided to LCP-PLC-LS76 for monitoring. The following hardwired device contacts for lift station sewage pump operation are provided from the level sensor: Pump 1 Start/Stop (LSH-200A), Pump 2 Start/Stop (LSH-200B) and High-High Level (LSHH-200). The setpoints for LIT-200 (MR2) are integral to the Hydro ranger 200. a. Backup Operation: When there is a High-High Level alarm

(LAHH-101) condition or when the station is manually switched from PLC to MR2 position using HS-102, the station will be placed into backup mode of operation. The pumps will be started and stopped by hardwired contacts from MR2. Pump start and stop levels can be set at MR2 using the manufacturer provided ultrasonic level sensor programming device. As liquid level rises, the pump 1 will be started at the Pump 1 Start Level setpoint. Pump 1 will continue to run until Wetwell level drops to the Pumps 1 and 2 Stop Level setpoint. The Hydroranger 200 will be programmed to alternate the operation of Pumps 1 and 2 while in backup mode. The sewage pumps will remain in backup mode until the high level alarm reset pushbutton is pressed if that is what placed the station into backup mode of operation. If backup mode was selected it will be unselected when placed from MR2 mode to PLC mode of operation.

3. Computer Control System - Controls: a. PLC control logic is described above. SCADA front-end integration is future.

4. Equipment Set Points / Ranges

Device Set Point / Range - Typical Value

LCP-PCP-LS76 High Temp 120 Deg. F

LIT-100 0-30 FT

LIT-200 0-30 FT

PIT-100 0-100PSIG

PIT-200 0-100 PSIG

FQIT-100 0-1500 GPM

FQIT-200 0-1500 GPM


26866 17051-6 1/24/2019

Lead Pump Start Level 7.5 FT

Lag Pump Start Level 8 FT

Lead/Lag Pumps Stop Level 4.5 FT

Wetwell High High Level (LSHH-200) 9 FT

Lead Pump Start Level (LSH-200A) 7.5 FT

Lag Pump Start Level (LSH-200B) 8 FT

Pumps 1 and 2 Stop Level (LSH-200A, LSH-200B) 4.5 FT

Wetwell Low Level (LSL-100) 3.5 FT

D. Interlocks: 1. Interlock #1: High Motor Temp (TSH-100) – Lift Pump 1 2. Interlock #2: High Motor Seal Leak (GSH-100) – Lift Pump 1 3. Interlock #3: Motor Overload (MA-100) – Lift Pump 1 4. Interlock #4: High Motor Temp (TSH-200) – Lift Pump 2 5. Interlock #5: High Motor Seal Leak (GSH-200) – Lift Pump 2 6. Interlock #6: Motor Overload (MA-200) – Lift Pump 2



26866 17052-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 17052

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM PRIMARY SENSORS AND FIELD INSTRUMENTS


A. Scope:

1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, adjust, commission and place into satisfactory operation all primary sensors and field instruments furnished under this Section.

2. Contract Documents illustrate and specify functional and general construction requirements of the sensors and field instruments and do not necessarily show or specify all components, wiring, piping and accessories required to make a completely integrated system. Provide all components, piping, wiring, accessories and labor required for a complete, workable and integrated system.

B. Coordinate the installation of all items specified herein and required to ensure the

complete and proper interfacing of all the components and systems. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with the requirements of Section 17001, Process Control System General Requirements for Process Instrumentation.

B Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Furnish primary sensors and field instruments by the named manufacturers. 2. Obtain all sensors and field instruments of a given type from the same

manufacturer.

C. Manufacturers' Responsibilities and Services: 1. Design and manufacture the primary sensors and field instruments in

accordance with the applicable general design requirements specified in Section 17001, Process Control System General Requirements for Process Instrumentation, and the detailed Specifications herein.

2. Field supervision, inspection, and start-up in accordance with the requirements of Section 17001, Process Control System General Requirements.



26866 17052-2 1/24/2019

A. Comply with the requirements specified in Section 17001, Process Control System General Requirements for Process Instrumentation.

B. Primary sensors and field instruments shall not be delivered to the site until all

product information and Shop Drawings for the sensors and instruments have been approved by ENGINEER.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the requirements specified in Section 17001, Process Control System General Requirements for Process Instrumentation.

1.5 CHEMICAL SERVICE

A. Where a primary element is designated for chemical service, all wetted components and appurtenances for that primary element shall be resistant to corrosion by that chemical. Chemicals referred to commonly as "caustic", "sodium hypochlorite", "hydrochloric acid", "ferric chloride", and "methanol" shall mean the following: 1. "CAUSTIC": Sodium hydroxide (NaOH), 50 percent solution, Specific Gravity

= 1.53. 2. "SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE": Sodium Hypochlorite (NaOCl), 15 percent

solution, Specific Gravity = 1.23. 3. "HYDROCHLORIC ACID": Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), 38 percent solution,

Specific Gravity = 1.4. 4. "FERRIC CHLORIDE": Ferric Chloride (FeCl3), 43 percent solution, Specific

Gravity = 1.46. 5. "POLYMER": Polymer Solution, 0.2 to 0.5 percent solution, Specific Gravity

= 1.00. 6. “METHANOL”: Methanol (CH3OH), 99 percent solution, Specific Gravity =

0.792. 1.6 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION FOR WETTABLE PARTS

A. Provide the following materials of construction for primary sensors and field instrument (wetted) parts that come in contact with the following list of process fluids:


26866 17052-3 1/24/2019

PROCESS FLUID ELASTOMER

METAL

PLASTIC

OTHER

Air

Type 316

SS

Teflon

Alum Buna-N Type 316 SS

Ammonia Type 316 SS Teflon

Carbon Buna-N Type 316 SS

Chemical Sump Drainage

Teflon

Polypropylene

Chlorine Gas or Liquid

Viton

Hastelloy

C, Monel, or Tantalum

Digester Gas

Viton

Alloy C276 Type 316

SS

Ferric Chloride

Tantalum

Teflon

Polypropylene

Ceramic

Fluoride Viton Hastelloy C Glycerine Oil

Neoprene

Viton Buna-N

Type 316

SS

Teflon

Polypropylene PVC/CPVC

Halocarbon

Neoprene

Type 316

SS

Teflon

Hydrochloric Acid

Viton

Tantalum Zirconium Platinum

Teflon

Ceramic

Lime Type 316 SS Teflon

Methanol

Type 316

SS

Teflon

Non Potable Water

Neoprene

Type 316

SS

Teflon

Ceramic


26866 17052-4 1/24/2019

PROCESS FLUID

ELASTOMER

METAL

PLASTIC

OTHER

Odor Control Scrubber Solution

Platinum

Teflon Tefzel

Ceramic

Polymer Buna-N Type 316 SS

Potassium Permanganate Viton Carpenter 20

Raw Sewage

Viton

Type 316

SS

PTFE

Polypropylene

Sodium Chloride Teflon Sodium Hydroxide

Hastelloy B Zirconium Platinum

Teflon

Polypropylene PVC/CPVC

Ceramic

Sodium Hypochlorite

Hastelloy C Tantalum Titanium Platinum

Teflon

PVC/CPVC Kynar

Ceramic

Silicone Oil

Viton

Buna-N

Type 316

SS

Teflon

Polypropylene

Sludge

Neoprene Buna-N

Type 316

SS

PTFE

Ceramic

1.7 IDENTIFICATION TAGS

A. All sensors and field instruments shall have an identification tag conforming to the following requirements: 1. Provide CMMS Tags for all instruments as specified under Section

01630, Computerized Maintenance Management System Tags. 1.8 SUNSHADES

A. Instruments and analyzers installed outdoors shall be firmly supported and protected by sun / rain shades, as specified or shown on DRAWINGS. 1. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Obrien – VIPAK b. Alumaline c. Or Equal

PART 2 PRODUCTS


26866 17052-5 1/24/2019

2.1 PROCESS TAPS, SENSING LINES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Water Pressure Sensing Lines and Accessories for Flow and Pressure Transmitters: 1. Material: Type 316 stainless steel; .049 wall thickness. 2. Pressure Rating: 250 psi. 3. Size: 1/2-inch outside diameter or as shown on the Drawings. 4. Connections: Type 316 stainless steel compression type, "Swagelok",

as manufactured by Crawford. 5. Shut-off Valves:

a. Type: Full port ball. b. Pressure Rating: 250 psi. c. Body, Ball and Stem: Type 316 stainless steel. d. Packing: High Density TFE. e. Handle: Nylon with metal travel stops. f. Support Rings: Stainless steel. g. End Connections: Removable "Swageloks". h. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) 45 Series, as manufactured by Whitey. 6. Manifolds:

a. Type: Five valve and three valve meter manifolds. b. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel body, bonnets and stems,

delrin seats, Teflon packing. c. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Whitey. 2) Anderson-Greenwood

B. Air Pressure Sensing Lines and Accessories for Air Flow/Pressure

Transmitters: 1. Material: Type 316 stainless steel tubing, ASTM A 269, .049 wall

thickness. 2. Pressure Rating: 250 psi. 3. Size: 1/2-inch outside diameter or as shown on the Drawings. 4. Connections: Type 316 stainless steel compression type, "Swagelok"

as manufactured by Crawford. 5. Shut-off Valves:

a. Type: Full port ball. b. Pressure Rating: 250 psi. c. Body, Ball and Stem: Type 316 stainless steel. d. Packing: High density TFE. e. Handle: Nylon with metal travel stops. f. Support Rings: Stainless steel. g. End Connections: Removable "Swageloks" h. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) 43 Series, as manufactured by Whitey.


26866 17052-6 1/24/2019

6. Manifolds: a. Type: Five valve and three valve meter manifolds. b. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel body, bonnets and stems,

delrin seats, teflon packing. c. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1) Whitey.

C. Pressure Tap Sensing Lines and Accessories for Pressure Gages and Pressure Switches: 1. For Process Sensing Taps in Ductile Iron, Steel and Stainless Steel Piping

Systems: a. Material and Fittings: Type 316 stainless steel pipe (ASTM A 312)

and threaded fittings and adapters (ASTM A 403) in accordance with Section 15103, Stainless Steel Pipe.

b. Sizes: ½-inch minimum for main sensing piping and ¼-inch gage and switch connections or as shown on the Drawings.

c. Pressure Rating: Equal to or greater than the applicable system test pressure as specified in Section 15050, Piping Systems.

d. Accessories: 1) For applications not requiring diaphragm seals, provide

separate ¼-inch Type 316 stainless steel threaded gage cocks for each gage and switch.

2) For applications requiring diaphragm seals, provide a separate 1/2-inch threaded Type 316 stainless steel ball valve for seal process side shutoff for each gage and switch. Ball valves shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 15115, Ball Valves, Operators and Appurtenances.

2. For Process Sensing Taps in Copper and Thermoplastic Piping Systems: a. Pipe Material and Fittings: Use same type of pipe material and

fittings as that used in the process piping system. Copper pipe and fittings shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 15105, Copper Pipe. CPVC pipe and fittings shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Section 15106, Thermoplastic Pipe.

b. Sizes: 1/2-inch minimum for main process sensing piping and for gage and switch connections.

c. Pressure Rating: Equal to or greater than the applicable system test pressure as specified in Section 15050, Piping Systems.

d. Accessories: 1) For copper piping system taps with or without seals, provide a

separate ¼-inch minimum threaded brass or bronze gage cock for each gage and switch.

2) For CPVC piping systems with or without diaphragm seals, provide a separate 1/2-inch threaded ball valve for process sensing line shutoff for each gage and switch. Ball valves shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of


26866 17052-7 1/24/2019

Section 15113, Thermoplastic Valves, Operators and Appurtenances.

2.2 INSTRUMENTATION INSTRUMENT TYPE F1 - MAGNETIC FLOWTUBE AND TRANSMITTER

A. Functions: 1. Flowtube: Produce low level, high impedance pulsed DC signal

proportional to the rate of fluid flow using the principle of electromagnetic induction.

2. Pulsed DC Magnetic Flow Transmitter: Drive the flowtube coils with pulsed DC power and convert the flowtube output signal into a DC current output linear to the flow rate.

B. System (Flowtube and Transmitter) Performance Requirements:

1. System Accuracy (with Analog Output): ±0.5 percent of flow rate or better over range from 1 fps to 31 fps; ±.005 fps or better at flows below 1 fps flow range. System accuracy shall be proven by submittal of flow test curves of the actual meters being furnished. Test curves shall show a minimum of three flow points. Tests shall be performed using water and a weight or volume tank. A "Master Meter" used, as a reference standard is not acceptable. The test setup shall be submitted and approved prior to testing.

2. System Repeatability: ±0.15 percent of flow rate or ±.0015 fps, whichever is greater.

3. Drift: Complete zero stability. 4. Minimum Fluid Conductivity Limit: Five microsiemens per centimeter

or less. 5. Fluid Property Effects: Accuracy unaffected by changes in fluid velocity,

density, pressure, temperature or conductivity (above minimum conductivity limits).

C. Transmitter:

1. Output: 4 to 20 mADC, direct acting and isolated, into 0 to 700 ohms. 2. High accuracy, field adjustable scaled pulse output (2 to 800 Hz or

greater) to drive local totalizer and provide scaled pulse output with a durations width of 0.5ms to 2 sec.

3. Power Consumption: Not to exceed 50 watts for flowtube and transmitter combined.

4. Operating Temperature: Suitable for operation with process fluid temperature from 0 to 140°F.

5. Interchangeability: Ratio of flow velocity to voltage reference signals generated identical for all meter sizes to permit interchangeability with transmitter without requiring circuit modifications.


26866 17052-8 1/24/2019

6. Solid state construction. 7. Pulse and analog outputs galvanically isolated from input and earth

ground. 8. Automatic zeroing feature making it unnecessary to zero the instrument

before or after placing it in operation. 9. Precalibrated span adjustment providing continuous span adjustment over

entire range. Range adjustment: Integral pushbuttons continuously adjustable for full-scale settings from 1 to 31 feet per second.

10. Signal Conditioning: Adjustable damping circuit with response times of 1 to 25 seconds minimum.

11. Low Flow Cutoff: Provide automatic low flow cutoff circuitry to stop pulse output and local totalization when flow drops below 0.5 percent ±0.2 percent of the calibrated upper range valve.

12. Enclosure: a. Die cast, low-copper aluminum alloy, NEMA 4. b. Finish: Epoxy coating.

13. Mounting: a. All transmitter and driver electronics shall be remotely mounted

from the flow tubes at locations shown on the Drawings. b. Provide complete Type 316 stainless steel mounting hardware. c. Type of mounting (wall, support frame or pipe stand), as

required.

14. Local Indication: a. 3-1/2 digit minimum LCD meter with field selectable engineering

units; or analog multi-meter with linear 0 to 100 percent scale for flow rate indication. The engineering units shall be as specified in the Instrument List.

b. 7-digit electromechanical totalizer or 8-digit electronic LCD totalizer with reset and lithium battery backup. Count scaling shall be as specified in the Instrument List. Totalizer shall be integral with transmitter and visible through viewing window, or shall be externally mounted in a separate NEMA 4X enclosure or condulet with viewing window and installed adjacent to the transmitter.

15. Power Requirements: Designed for operation on 120 VAC ± ten percent, 60 Hz, ±3 Hz power supply.

16. Accessories: as required. 17. Provide shielded cable assemblies of sufficient length to met mounting

locations as shown on DRAWINGS for connection between flowtube and transmitter electronics.

a. Protect magnetic flow meter transmitter to flowtube shield cable from the sun and weather.

D. Construction and Required Features: 1. Flowtube:

a. Type: Lined metal flowtubes.


26866 17052-9 1/24/2019

b. Liner Material: PFTE. c. ANSI Class suitable for installation with the specified pipe.

2. Tube Material: a. Meter tubes 12-inch and smaller: Type 304 stainless steel. b. Metering tubes 14-inch and larger: Type 304 stainless steel, .125-

inch wall thickness. 3. Pressure Rating: Greater than or equal to test pressure specified in

Section 15050, Piping Systems, for appropriate piping system. 4. Electrodes:

a. Conical or elliptical shaped. 5. Enclosure:

a. Materials and Rating: Cast low-copper aluminum alloy or fabricated sheet steel, NEMA 6 rated.

b. Finish: Finish exterior, except for flange faces, with a high build epoxy paint.

c. End Connections: As required. 6. Electrical Connections: 1/2 inch minimum to 3/4-inch maximum NPT

tapped holes for power conduit fitting and signal conduit fittings. 7. Type 316 stainless steel grounding rings for flowtubes. 8. Type 316 stainless steel grounding straps.

E. Provide one calibrator suitable to calibrate all flow tubes provided.

F. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. Enviromag Magnetic Flow tube and Model 3000 Signal Converter, as manufactured by Krohne America Incorporated.

2. Magmaster MFE/MFF Magnetic Flow tube and Model MFE Signal Converter, as manufactured by ABB/Fischer and Porter.

3. Promag W Magnetic Flow tube and Model 53 Signal Converter, as manufactured by Endress + Hauser.

INSTRUMENT TYPE L1 - LEVEL TRANSMITTER – ULTRASONIC TYPE

A. Type: Non-contact system using transducer to convert electrical pulses from the transmitter into sonic pulses directed towards the metered surface and receives the reflected sonic pulses and converts them back into electrical pulses for reception by the transmitter. Transmitter shall generate and time the electrical pulses, and count and convert the pulse travel times into an analog output signal linearly proportional to level/flow.

B. System Performance Requirements:

1. Accuracy: Not less than ± 0.25 percent of full-scale range. 2. Linearity and Repeatability: Not less than ±1 percent of full scale. 3. Resolution shall be 0.1 percent of range of 2mm (0.08”) whichever is

grater.


26866 17052-10 1/24/2019

4. Minimum Operating Distance from Transducer (Deadband): 12-inches. 5. Beam Pattern: XPS-15. 6. Transmitter Outputs: Provide each of the following:

a. 4 to 20 mADC, direct acting and isolated, signal proportional to level, into 0 to 750 ohms.

b. Minimum of six (6) independently adjustable alarm setpoint, relays outputs rated at five amps, 250 VAC non-inductive.

c. Loss of echo relay, which energizes when measured level falls beyond signal range or signal, is interrupted for any other reason. Relay output shall be rated five amps 250 VAC non-inductive.

7. Environmental Conditions: Suitable for use under the environmental conditions specified in Section 17001, Process Control System General Requirements for Process Instrumentation.

8. Power Consumption: 25 watts, maximum. 9. Temperature Compensation: Range – 58 to 302ºF, integral temperature

sensor in transducer.

C. Required Features: 1. Transducer:

a. Encapsulated by a corrosion resistant and submergence resistant material: PVDF.

b. N/A. c. Designed for suspended PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit

mounting or equipped with ANSI 150 pound flanges for flange mounting.

d. 1-inch external NPT PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit connection.

2. Transmitter: a. Solid state construction. b. Built-in digital filtering for EMI protection and external acoustical

noise rejection. c. Built-in automatic compensation for variations in temperature,

pressure and density of the sonic signal medium. d. LCD indicator scaled in engineering units for the range required. e. Software adjustable zero and span adjustment over 0 to 100 percent

of the calibrated range. f. Lost Echo and Power On Lights. g. Housed in weatherproof, splash proof and corrosion resistant

NEMA 4X enclosure and suitable wall or pipe stand mounting. Provide with a transparent window to permit viewing indicating meter and lights.

h. Internally mounted diagnostic LED’s to allow isolation of faults in terms of major components.

i. Designed for operation on 120 VAC ±10 percent, 60 Hz power supply.

3. Accessories:


26866 17052-11 1/24/2019

a. Transducer cables 2-3 copper conductors, twisted with shield and drain wire, the actual length required, for connection between the transducer and transmitter

b. One Hand held calibrator

D. Product and Manufacturer: Provide the following: 1. Hydroranger 200 and XPS-15, as manufactured by Siemens.

INSTRUMENT TYPE P3 - PRESSURE GAUGE

A. Bourdon Tube Pressure Element Type, Liquid Filled Gage (for pressure ranges of 15 psi and greater and vacuum ranges to 30-inches Hg): 1. Performance Requirements:

a. Accuracy: ±0.5 percent of span (ANSI B40.1 Grade 2A). 2. Construction Features:

a. Case: 1) Solid front design constructed of glass filled polyester. 2) Color: Black.

b. Ring: Threaded, glass filled polyester. c. Full blowout back. d. Window: Glass. e. Dial: White with black marking; 270-degree scale. f. Material: All wetted parts to be metal selected from table in

Article 1.6, above, based on process fluid being measured. g. Movement: Cam and roller movement, 300 Series stainless steel. h. Size: 4-1/2-inch. i. Connection: 1/4-inch male NPT back or bottom, as required. j. Mounting: Stem, flush panel or wall mounting, as required. k. Adjustable pointer. l. Built-in overload and underload movement stops. m. Pressure Snubber: Sintered Type 316 stainless steel snubber

threaded into gage socket or in external stainless steel housing with 1/4-inch NPT male and female connections.

3. Assembly: Where specified equipment is shown to be mounted to annular or diaphragm seals, equipment and seal shall be factory assembled, calibrated and furnished as a single unit.

4. Gauge Filling Liquid: Silicone Oil B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. Helicoid. 2. 3D Instruments, Inc. 3. Ashcroft. 4. Or Equal


26866 17052-12 1/24/2019

INSTRUMENT TYPE P5 - PRESSURE INDICATING TRANSMITTER - CERAMIC FLUSH MOUNTED DIAPHRAGM (FOR SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS)

A. Type: Two-wire, capacitance type, direct mount gage ceramic diaphragm flush mounted pressure indicating transmitter.

B. Required Features and Accessories:

1. Accuracy (includes combined effects of linearity, hysteresis and repeatability): ±0.1 percent of calibrated span.

2. Stability (drift over a six month period): Not more than ±0.1 percent of transmitter’s upper range limit.

3. Ambient Temperature Effect: Total Error per 100°F change between the limits of -20°F and +180°F: Not more than ±1.0 percent of the transmitter u upper range limit (maximum span).

4. Hysteresis is less than or equal to .02% of full scale. 5. Supply Voltage Effect: Less than or equal to 0.1% of full scale per 10

volt change 6. Output:

a. Isolated direct acting 4 to 20 mADC, Plus Hart digital signal b. Digital process variable signal superimposed on 4 to 20 mADC

signal without compromising loop integrity. c. Zero and span adjustments by internal keys or Hart Communicator d. Damping adjustable 0 to 25 seconds minimum.

7. Solid state electronic components. 8. Positive over range protection of at least 1.25 times the maximum span

limit. 9. Calibration Adjustments:

a. Zero: Adjustable in electronics compartment. b. Span: Course and fine span adjustments in electronics

compartment. c. Process Range - 0 PSI to 200 PSI 1. The measurement range can be set up from keys/buttons on

the pressure transmitter, or HART communicator 2. Start and end of measurement range can be continuously

adjusted within the nominal range. 10. Zero elevation and suppression capability to the extent that the amount of

suppression plus calibrated span does not exceed the upper range limits of the sensor.

11. Built-in electrical surge and RFI protection. 12. Electrical Connection ½” – NPT with side cover 13. Supply Voltage: 24 VDC - Tranmitter operations between 11.5 to 36

Volts DC. 15. Process Connection: Threaded ANSI MNPT 2” 316L flush mount into a

saddle tap or weld-a-let fitting. 16. Non-Wetted Parts:

a. Body: Type 316 stainless steel.


26866 17052-13 1/24/2019

b. Housing and Cover: Die cast low copper aluminum alloy finished with epoxy paint system; covers shall be threaded and seated on Buna-N O-rings; NEMA 4/6P (IP66/67) rating.

17. Sensor: The ceramic sensor is a dry “no oil fill required” sensor in contact with process fluid wastewater being measured.

18. Software Functionality a. Transmitter shall be capable of digital communications over the 4

to 20mA output loop without interruption using the Hart Protocol. b. Transmitter shall perform continuous diagnostics, be capable of

self-test functions, and be able to give specific diagnostic information such as measurement error, out of range measurement output signal on error

c. Configuration capabilities shall allow the user the ability to input and store information including range, engineering units, damping, output signal , message descriptor, and tag number.

19. Seal: FPM Viton 20. Hazardous Area Requirements: FM Class I, Division 2, Groups A-D 21. Provide LCD display. Display Units in PSI. Display capable of showing

indication of over range or error 22. Bursting Pressure for all ranges: 1,000 PSI 23. Storage temperature -40 to +120 degrees centigrade

C. Product and Manufacturer: 1. Endress Hauser PMC71-RBCP62DAAA

INSTRUMENT TYPE PE1 - DIAPHRAGM SEAL

A. General: Furnish diaphragm seals for pressure gages, pressure switches and pressure transmitters at locations shown on the Drawings and as specified.

B. Required Features:

1. Provide fill/bleed screw to permit filling of instrument and diaphragm seal.

2. Instrument Connection: 1/4-inch NPT. 3. Process Connection: 1/2-inch NPT. 4. Working Pressure Rating: Equal to or greater than the attached gage or

switch operating pressure specified in Section 15050, Piping Systems, whichever is greater.

5. Filling Fluid: a. Silicone. b. For Chlorine or Fluoride systems: Halocarbon or Flurolube Oil.

6. Provide a clean-out ring which holds the diaphragm captive in the upper housing to allow the upper housing assembly to be removed for recalibration or cleaning of the process side housing without the loss of filling liquid or change in calibration. a. 1/4-inch NPT flushing connection.


26866 17052-14 1/24/2019

C. Construction Features:

1. Top Housing: a. Type 316 stainless steel. b. For Chlorine gas or liquid: Hastelloy C, Monel, or Tantalum.

2. Material: All wetted parts to be metal selected from table in Article 1.6, above, based on process fluid being measured.

D. Assembly and Calibration:

1. The complete diaphragm seal assembly, including gage, switch or transmitter, shall be factory assembled, filled and calibrated to the ranges and switch setpoints specified prior to shipment.

2. System Supplier shall be responsible for assuring that fill volumes and sensitivities of the supplied seals and diaphragms are suitable to provide the required gage, switch or transmitter accuracy over the specified measurement range or at switch setpoints.

3. Location and orientation of the gages, switches and seal assemblies shall be coordinated with the actual piping and equipment installations so that gages and indicators shall be easily read and accessed for maintenance by plant personnel.

4. Where field mounting and orientation conflicts arise due to incomplete coordination with field changes in the process piping and equipment installation, assemblies shall be relocated, re-oriented, re-assembled and re-calibrated as directed by ENGINEER.

E. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

1. Ametek/Mansfield & Green (for low pressures). 2. Emerson/Helicoid. 3. Ashcroft.

2.3 SPARE PARTS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish and deliver the spare parts and test equipment as outlined below, all of which shall be identical and interchangeable with similar parts furnished under this Section. Comply with the requirements of Section 01783, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.

B. Spare parts shall be packed in containers suitable for long term storage, bearing

labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are intended.

C. The following shall constitute the minimum spare parts: None. D. The following shall constitute the minimum test and calibration equipment.

1. All tooling required to insert, extract and connect any internal or external connector, including edge connectors.


26866 17052-15 1/24/2019

2. All special calibration equipment required for system calibration.

E. All spare parts shall have been operated and tested in the factory as part of factory testing prior to shipment of the control system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. INSTALLATION

A. Provide the services of qualified factory-trained servicemen to assist in the installation of the instrumentation and control system equipment.

B. Install each item in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in

accordance with the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Transmitters and instruments require access for periodic calibration or maintenance. Transmitters and instruments shall be mounted so they are accessible while standing on the floor.

C. All items shall be mounted and anchored using Type 316 stainless steel

hardware, unless otherwise noted. D. All field instruments shall be rigidly secured to walls, stands or brackets, as

required, by the manufacturer and as shown on the Drawings. Mounting instruments on handrails will not be allowed.

E. Conform to all applicable provisions of the NEMA and NFPA standards, local,

state and federal codes when installing the equipment and interconnecting wiring.

3.2 START-UP, CALIBRATION, AND TESTING AND TRAINING

A. Comply with the requirements of Section 17001, Process Control System

General Requirements for Process Instrumentation.

B. Calibration of Instruments: a. All instruments are to be field calibrated and witnessed by the

ENGINEER through their entire range or with the required setpoints based on the requirements stated in Specification 17053 – Process Control System Instrument Index prior to start-up. Factory calibrated instruments are required to be recalibrated in the field prior to start-up and witnessed by the ENGINEER. Utilized form 17001-B - Calibration Test Data Form as provided in Specification 01331 – Reference Forms to document the field calibration.

C. Primary Sensors/Transducers and Field Instruments: a. Provide on-site operation and maintenance training by EQUIPMENT


26866 17052-16 1/24/2019

SUPPLIERS and/or the EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER REPRESENTATIVES prior to placing the equipment in continuous operation, conforming to the requirements of Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. The services of equipment manufacturer’s representatives shall be provided for a minimum of 8 hours for each type of the following instruments. 1) Ultrasonic Level Transmitters2) Pressure Indicating Transmitters3) Magnetic Flow Transmitters

b. Training shall accomplish the following:1) Provide instruction covering procedures for routine, preventive and

troubleshooting maintenance and equipment calibration.



26866 17053-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 17053

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM INSTRUMENT INDEX

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, adjust,commission and place into satisfactory operation all primary sensors, fieldinstruments and devices furnished.

2. Contract Documents illustrate and specify functional and general constructionrequirements of the sensors and field instruments and devices and do notnecessarily show or specify all components, wiring, piping and accessoriesrequired to make a completely integrated system. Provide all components,piping, wiring, accessories and labor required for a complete, workable andintegrated system.

B. Coordination:1. Coordinate the installation of all items specified herein and required to ensure

the complete and proper interfacing of all the components and systems.2. Comply with the requirements of Section 17001 - Process Control System

General Requirements for Process Instrumentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)


++ END OF SECTION ++

CITY OF PHOENIX: Water Services DepartmentPROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main and Water MainPROJECT NUMBER: WS90400067 and WS90501005

INSTRUMENT INDEX

Tag Number P&IDSerial Key # Service Description

Spec. Inst. Type Device

Size / Rating

Calibration Range Setpoints COMMENTS

LE/LIT-100 I-4 WETWELL LEVEL NO.1 ULTRASONIC N/A 0-30' N/ALE/LIT-200 I-4 WETWELL LEVEL NO.2 ULTRASONIC N/A 0-30' N/AFE/FQIT-100 I-4 PUMP NO.1 DISCHARGE FLOW MAGNETIC 6" 0-1500GPM N/AFE/FQIT-200 I-4 PUMP NO.2 DISCHARGE FLOW MAGNETIC 6" 0-1500GPM N/APIT-100 I-4 PUMP NO.1 DISCHARGE PRESSURE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 2" 0-100PSIG N/APIT-200 I-4 PUMP NO.2 DISCHARGE PRESSURE PRESSURE TRANSMITTER 2" 0-100PSIG N/API-100 I-4 PUMP NO.1 DISCHARGE PRESSURE PRESSURE GUAGE 1/4" 0-100PSIG N/API-200 I-4 PUMP NO.2 DISCHARGE PRESSURE PRESSURE GUAGE 1/4" 0-100PSIG N/A


26866 17053-2 1/24/2019


26866 17101-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 17101

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM FIBER OPTIC CABLING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install fiber optic cabling,including fiber testing procedures, accessories and splicing requirements.

B. The entire fiber optic system is considered to be one component and provided by asingle source, hereafter referred to as the Supplier.


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations ofthe following, except as otherwise shown or specified.1. ASTM D 1248, Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion

Materials.2. ASTM D 1603, Test Method for Carbon Black in Olefin Plastics.3. ASTM D 1765, Classification System for Carbon Blacks used in Rubber

Products.4. ASTM D 3349, Test Method for Absorption Coefficient of Ethylene Polymer

Material Pigmented with Carbon Black.5. TIA-526-7, OFSTP-7 Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-

mode Fiber Cable Plant.6. TIA-526-14-A, OFSTP-14 Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed

Multimode Fiber Cable Plant.7. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 with Addendums, Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements.8. TIA/EIA-568-B.2 with Addendums, Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components.9. TIA/EIA-568-B.3 with Addendums, Optical Fiber Cabling Components

Standard10. TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways

and Spaces.11 TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications

Infrastructure.


26866 17101-2 1/24/2019

12. J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and BondingRequirements for Telecommunications.

13. TIA-598-C, Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:1. Cut sheets and catalog literature for proposed fiber optic cable, and fiber optic

cable accessories (terminations).2. Manufacturer specifications and data which clearly and unambiguously shows

that the fiber optic cable meets all the requirements specified herein.3. Samples of the proposed cable.4. Physical dimension drawings of all fiber optic accessories.5. Proposed fiber identification sequence and labeling.6. Provide a Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL).7. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.8. Fiber optic cable pulling plan, to include, but not limited to, methods of pulling,

monitoring of pulling tension, and proposed crew size.9. Fiber optic testing plan, to include, but not limited to, tester make, model, serial

numbers, calibration certificates, and certificates of training from fiber opticsmanufactures of personnel performing the testing.

1.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide off-line maintenance aids and on-line diagnostics to check the performanceof the communication links and interfaces of devices on the data highway.

B. Provide a list of recommended special tools for fiber installation, testing ormaintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SUMMARY SPECIFICATIONS

A. The multimode fiber optic cable shall meet the following summary specifications:1. Fiber Type: Multimode.2. Core Diameter: 62.5 microns.3. Cladding Diameter: 125 microns.4. Cable Outside Diameter: 11.6 mm (0.46 in) maximum.5. Cable Weight: 191 kg/km (128 lbs/1000 ft).6. Maximum Attenuation: 3.5 dB/km @ 850 nm, 1.0 dB/km @ 1300 nm.


26866 17101-3 1/24/2019

7. Bandwidth: 200/500 (MHZ X km)2. 8. Buffer Type: Loose tube. 9. Number of Fibers per buffer tube: 12. 10. Cable Central Strength Member: Dielectric. 11. Cable Fill: Dry water blocking. 12. Outer Jacket: PE. 13. Maximum Pulling Load: 600 lbf (2700 N). 14. Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to +70°C. 15. Parallel Plate Crush Resistance: 400 lbf. 16. Quantity: As shown on the Drawings. 17. Packaging: Spools/reels, protected from shipment.

B. The single mode fiber optic cable shall meet the following summary specifications:

1. Core Diameter: 8.3 microns. 2. Cladding Diameter: 125 microns. 3. Cable Outside Diameter: 11.6 mm (0.46 in). 4. Maximum Attenuation: 0.4 dB/km @ 1310 nm, 0.3 dB/km @ 1550 nm. 5. Buffer Type: Loose tube, gel filled. 6. Number of Fibers per buffer tube: 12. 7. Cable Central Strength Member: Dielectric. 8. Outer Jacket: PE. 9. Maximum Pulling Load: 600 lbf (2700 N). 10. Operating Temperature Range: -40°C to +70°C. 11. Parallel Plate Crush Resistance: 400 lbf. 12. Quantity: As shown on the Drawings. 13. Packaging: Spools/reels, protected from shipment.

C. Fibers within the cable shall be color-coded so that each fiber may be individually

identified. The color sequence is as follows:

Fiber/Tube No. Color

1 Blue 2 Orange 3 Green 4 Brown 5 Slate 6 White 7 Red 8 Black 9 Yellow 10 Violet 11 Rose 12 Aqua


26866 17101-4 1/24/2019

D. The outer jackets of the cable shall be continuous, free from holes, splits, blisters orinclusions. The same requirement holds for any inner jackets within a given cablestructure as well as for fiber coatings.

E. Materials used for fiber optic cable shall present no environmental or toxicologicalhazards as defined by current industry standards and shall comply with OSHA andEPA standards or applicable federal or state laws or regulations.

F. The color of the polyethylene outer jacket material shall be black in accordance withASTM D 1248, and contain a suitable antioxidant substance. The carbon black usedshall be furnace-type conforming to designation N 110 in accordance with ASTM D1765. The carbon black content in the jacket material when measured in accordancewith ASTM D 1603 shall be 2.6 percent ±0.25 percent by weight. The lightabsorption coefficient of the jacket material shall be at least 400 when measured at awavelength of 375 nm in accordance with ASTM D 3349.1. Outer polyethylene jacket materials shall meet tensile strength and elongation

minimum requirements for unaged and aged samples as follows:a. Tensile Strength at Break: 2800 psi (Unaged), 2100 psi (Aged).b. Elongation at Rupture: 400 percent (Unaged), 375 percent (Aged).

G. The cable jacket shrinkage test measures the shrinkage or expansion of a cable jacketexposed to temperature aging for a specified period of time. Maximum shrinkageshall be less than five percent for each specimen tested. The test procedure isdescribed in EIA-RS-455, FOTP-86.

2.2 CABLE PACKAGING

A. The cable shall be permanently marked to identify the manufacturer, date ofmanufacture, length markings, a product identification code, and UL messages,where appropriate. The markings shall be printed at regular intervals of not morethan two feet apart.

B. The cable shall be packaged on a reel with inner hub diameter greater than therecommended minimum bending diameter of the cable. The anchor holes on thereels shall admit a 2-1/2-inch diameter spindle without binding. The package shall besturdy enough to endure reasonable handling in the process of shipping and storage.The package shall bear the name of the manufacturer, the product identification codeand the total amount of product on the reel.

C. The following information shall be securely attached to the reel as a tag or clearly andpermanently stenciled or labeled on each reel:1. Customer Order Number.2. Customer Job Number.3. Customer Reel Number.


26866 17101-5 1/24/2019

4. Termination.5. Ship Date.6. Manufacturer’s Name.7. Factory Reel Number.8. Manufacturer’s Cable Code (Type and Fiber count).9. Length of Cable.10. Weight of Cable and Reel.11. Defect Tag.

D. The ends of all cable shall be sealed to prevent the escape of filling compound and toprevent the entry of moisture during shipping, handling, storage and installation.

2.3 ADDITIONAL FIBER

A. The fiber count of the cable shall be 12 fibers, or as shown on contract drawings.Each fiber will be tested at the completion of cable installation to verify that thereare, indeed, 12 fibers, or as shown on contract drawings, which meet theseSpecifications.

B. CONTRACTOR’S option: furnish a cable with more than these numbers of fibersto allow for accidental fibers damaged during installation.

2.4 FIBER OPTIC CABLE MANUFACTURER

A. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:1. Corning Cabling Systems.2. Berk-Tek.3. Or equal.

2.5 MANUFACTURER TEST DOCUMENTATION

A. Test documentation from the fiber optic cable manufacturer shall be delivered to theENGINEER upon delivery of the cable to the job site, as a prerequisite for cableinstallation.

B. The documentation shall include Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) tracesfor each fiber of each reel at 850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode and 1310 nm and1550 nm for single mode. Optical attenuation test data shall be furnished for eachfiber of each reel, as measured at 850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode and 1310 nmand 1550 nm for single mode.

2.6 PRE-INSTALLATION TESTING

A. Test the fiber optic cable prior to its installation. This testing shall be witnessed bythe ENGINEER.


26866 17101-6 1/24/2019

B. Testing shall consist of making an OTDR trace of each fiber of each reel, at both 850nm and 1300 nm for multimode and 1310 nm and 1550 nm for single mode. The testshall incorporate a one km long backscatter suppression cable inserted between theOTDR and the fiber end. Each trace shall include the optical length and averageattenuation.

C. The results of the testing shall be submitted to the ENGINEER prior to installation.Any cable which shows "out-of-spec" performance shall be replaced, at no additionalcost to the OWNER or delay to the Project Schedule.

2.7 CABLE TERMINATION ENCLOSURE AND HARDWARE

A. Cable termination enclosures shall be furnished and installed at each site accessed byfiber optic cable. The enclosures shall be used to terminate each fiber of the cable.

B. The enclosures/cabinets shall be the 19-inch EIA rack mounted type havingprovisions for terminating multiple fiber optic cables. Splice trays, strain relief cableattachment points, fiber organizers and bend radius hardware shall be furnishedwithin each termination cabinet. The cabinets shall be furnished with an integral lockto prevent unauthorized entry. All locks shall be keyed identically, two keys shall befurnished for each cabinet installed.

C. The enclosure cabinets shall house a patch panel internally. The patch panel shallswing out for ease of use. Panel size shall be suited to the number of fibers in thecable, for both directions. ST couplings shall be furnished and mounted for eachmultimode fiber to be terminated and SC couplings shall be furnished and mountedfor each single mode fiber to be terminated.

D. The termination enclosure shall have a swing-down front door that provides access toall splice trays and patch panels. They shall be sized to accept two, 12 fiber cablesand provide space for unstripped, coiled cable, each being up to 25 feet long.

E. The cable termination enclosures and hardware shall be manufactured by CorningCabling Systems, Ortronics, or approved equivalent.

2.8 PIGTAIL CABLES AND CONNECTORS

A. No splicing of fiber optics cable allowed.

B. Fan-out or spider kit shall be installed at the ends of all terminated cables.

C. All connectors shall be identical. They shall be ceramic ST-Type for multimode fiberand SC-Type for single mode fiber.


26866 17101-7 1/24/2019

2.9 WARRANTY

A. The warranty on all materials, services, and adherence of the cabling system to thisspecification shall be for a period of not less than twenty (20) years.1. If items supplied as part of this project have longer warranties, CONTRACTOR

shall supply longer warranty.

B. The warranty shall certify that the cabling system shall support and conform toANSI/TIA/EIA-568B specifications covering any current or future application, whichsupports transmission over a properly constructed horizontal cabling system premisesnetwork.

C. Cabling system shall meet performance requirements of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B,TIA/EIA TSB-67, and TIA/EIA TSB-95 including NEXT, PSNEXT, ELFEXT,PSELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, delay skew, bandwidth, characteristicimpedance, attenuation/loss channel, and attenuation to crosstalk ratio (ACR)requirements.

D. The warranty shall cover the replacement or repair of defective product(s) and laborfor the replacement or repair of such defective product(s).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CABLE INSTALLATION

A. All fiber optic cable shall be installed, terminated, and tested by the fibersubcontractor specified above.

B. In pulling the cable, strain-release, or other tension limiting devices shall be used tolimit the pull tension to less than 600 lbs. The ENGINEER shall witness the cablebeing pulled.

C. Minimum bend radius restrictions shall be satisfied both during and after cableinstallation.

D. All conduit and cabinet entrances shall be sealed with RTV or other re-enterablesealant material to prevent ingress of water, dust or other foreign materials.

3.2 CABLE DAMAGE DURING INSTALLATION

A. If the cable becomes damaged during installation, stop the operation and notify theENGINEER immediately. The OWNER and ENGINEER will decide whether toreplace the entire reel of cable or to install a splice at the damaged section.

B. If the OWNER decides to replace the entire reel of cable, installation will begin atthe last designated splice point. Installation of new cable to replace damaged cableshall not be a basis of extra payment or Contract completion time. In addition toinstallation of the new cable, reimburse the OWNER and entire cost of thereplacement reel of cable. This cost will be withheld from the Contract price.


26866 17101-8 1/24/2019

C. If the OWNER decides to install a splice at the damaged point, and the cable isdamaged a second time, the entire reel of damaged cable (and all subsequentdamaged reels) shall be replaced with new reels at CONTRACTOR’S expense.

3.3 CABLE ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Acceptance testing of the data highway (fiber and electronic equipment) shall beconducted as a part of integrated system field testing, as specified elsewhere. Prior tosuch tests, however, the fiber optic cable shall be tested as specified herein.

B. The fiber subcontractor shall conduct fiber optic cable testing as specified below. Alltesting shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER and the OWNER. A test plan shall besubmitted at least one week prior to the proposed test date(s). The test plan andprocedures shall be mutually agreed upon prior to conducting the tests.

C. Each optical fiber in every span shall be tested after installation and termination. Foreach fiber, an OTDR trace hardcopy is required. This end-to-end trace shall beperformed from both ends of the fiber. The traces shall be made at 850 nm and 1300nm for multimode and 1310 nm and 1550 nm for single mode. Also for each fiber,and end-to-end power attenuation (insertion loss) test shall be performed from bothends of the fiber. The attenuation test shall use a stabilized optical source and anoptical power meter calibrated to the appropriate operating wavelength (850 nm and1300 nm for multimode and 1310 nm and 1550 nm for single mode).

D. All fiber test equipment will have current calibration certificates and be approved bythe fiber manufacture for certifying the installation for warranty.

E. For each installed fiber, the power attenuation shall not exceed the following, testedfrom connector to connector at the respective patch panels:

1. 62.5 m Multimode Attenuation Coefficientsa. Cable Attn. = Cable Length (km) (3.5 dB/km@850nm or

1.0dB/km@1300nm)b. Connection Attn. (ST connectors) = .75dB per connector pairc. Fusion Splice Attn. = Splices 0.30 dB

2. 8 m Single Mode Attenuation Coefficientsa. Cable Attn. = Cable Length (km) (0.4 dB/km@1310nm or 0.3

dB/km@1550nm)b. Connection Attn. (ST connectors) = .75dB per connector pairc. Fusion Splice Attn. = Splices 0.30 dB

3. Note: If lower maximum attenuation values are specified by the chosenmanufacturer, then the CONTRACTOR is responsible for meeting thosemaximum attenuation values specified by the manufacturer.


26866 17101-9 1/24/2019

F. Any fiber optic cables containing one or more fibers not meeting this performance will not be accepted by the OWNER, and shall be repaired or replaced at no additional cost to the OWNER.

G. All fiber optic testing shall be documented on pre-approved test forms. Three copies

of all documents (including OTDR traces) shall be submitted to the ENGINEER upon successful completion of the testing.

H. Work at the termination cabinets shall be performed such that the fiber optic cables,

and the fibers, are not subjected to undesirable bending both during the work and when permanently fixed in place. The cables, fibers, pigtails, etc. shall be organized in a neat and orderly fashion within the enclosure. Inspection of the Work shall be performed by the ENGINEER. Unsatisfactory Work shall be reworked.



26866 17226-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 17226

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM I/O LIST PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. I/O lists are compiled as shown on the P&ID DRAWINGS. The I/O list is only

the new I/O added under this Contract or requires loop testing due to modifications to the systems.

B. The form provided in this section, identifies the person(s) who witnessed all loop

testing. The loop testing shall include the field device through to the computer control system. Once the loop is fully tested and complete, each witness will initial the appropriate space on the form.

C. Completed form to be transmitted to the OWNER.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)



CC

S Pr

ogra

mm

er

Con

st. A

dmin

Con

trac

tor

I&C

Insp

ecto

r

P&ID

She

et N

o.

Service Description Tag Extension Seria

lized

Key

I/O T

ype

Dev

ice

Loo

p #

FCU

No.

FCU

Dig

i-Lin

k

RIO

Pan

el N

ame

Add

ress

I/O o

r Reg

iste

r A

ddre

ss

Exis

ting

Poin

t?

Eng

Uni

ts -

Low

(0

%)

Eng

Uni

ts -

Hig

h (1

00%

)

Eng

Uni

ts

Ala

rm S

etpo

int

Ala

rm P

riorit

y

Comments

I-04 CONTROL POWER FAILURE ALARM JA-150 DI

I-04 HIGH WETWELL LEVEL LSHH-200 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.1 MOTOR WINDING HIGH TEMP ALARM TSH-100 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.1 SEAL LEAK GSH-100 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.1 IN AUTO HS-100 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.1 RUN STATUS MN-100 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.1 MOTOR FAULT MA-100 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.2 MOTOR WINDING HIGH TEMP ALARM TSH-200 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.2 SEAL LEAK GSH-200 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.2 IN AUTO HS-200 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.2 RUN STATUS MN-200 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.2 MOTOR FAULT MA-200 DI

I-04 LOCAL TOTALIZER / RUNTIME RESET HS-172 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.1 FLOW TOTALIZER FQ-100 DI

I-04 PUMP NO.2 FLOW TOTALIZER FQ-200 DI

I-04 MR2 MODE SELECTED HS-102 DI

I-05 GENERATOR ENCLOSURE INTRUSION ALARM NA-185 DI

I-05 ENTRANCE GATE INTRUSION ALARM NA-183 DI

I-05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INTRUSION ALARM NA-184 DI

I-05 GENERATOR FAULT ALARM YA-191 DI

I-05 STATION ON STANDBY POWER YA-190 DI

I-04 REMOTE LAH RESET HS-200 DO

I-04 PUMP NO.1 START/STOP HS-100A DO

I-04 PUMP NO.2 START/STOP HS-200A DO

I-04 LOCAL TOTALIZER / RUNTIME RESET HS-172 DO

I-04 MR1 WETWELL LEVEL LIT-100 AI 0 30 Ft

I-04 MR2 WETWELL LEVEL LIT-200 AI 0 30 Ft

I-04 PUMP CONTROL PANEL TEMPERATURE TT-140 AI 0 200 F

I-04 PUMP NO.1 DISCHARGE PRESSURE PIT-100 AI 0 100 PSIG

I-04 PUMP NO.2 DISCHARGE PRESSURE PIT-200 AI 0 100 PSIG

26866 17226-2 12/20/2018


I-04 PUMP NO.1 FLOW RATE FQIT-100 AI 0 1500 GPM

I-04 PUMP NO.2 FLOW RATE FQIT-200 AI 0 1500 GPM

I-05 RTU CABINET TEMPERATURE TT-130 AI 0 200 F

26866 17226-3 12/20/2018

CITY OF PHOENIX: Water Services Department PROJECT NAME: West Anthem Lift Station No. 76, Force Main and Water Main PROJECT NUMBER: WS90400067 AND WS90501005

26866 17260-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 17260

CONTROL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. Contract Documents illustrate and specify functional and general construction

requirements of the panel components and do not necessarily show or specify all components, wiring, and accessories required for a completely integrated system.

B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, documentation including drawings and

incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to design, furnish, install, calibrate, test, start-up, program, configure, commission and place into satisfactory operation all panels, intermediate termination panels and/or enclosures including panel components and instruments.

C. Conform the design and construction of panels to the specifications herein. 1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the installation of all items specified herein and required to ensure the

complete and proper interfacing of all the components and systems.

B. All control loops to function as described in Section 17051, Computer Control System Process Control Descriptions and depicted on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Intermediate Termination Panel (ITP): An Intermediate Termination Panel is any

junction box that has terminals to terminate wires and no electrical or electronic powered devices. These panels act as interim termination points for field wiring to be connected to the control systems equipment. Please note that junction boxes and pull boxes are different. ITP’s are sometimes referred to as junction boxes. However, pull boxes are not allowed to have any wire splicing devices, including terminal blocks.

B. Local Control Panel (LCP): A Local Control Panel is an industrial piece of

equipment that contains electrical or electronic devices, in addition to wire terminals. Typically, it is a local panel connected to a specific piece of equipment to provide control and/or monitoring of that equipment. A local control panel contains voltages


26866 17260-2 1/24/2019

of 120VAC or below.

C. Motor Control Panel (MCP): An Motor Control Panel is an industrial piece of equipment that houses components for the power distribution and starting of motors. The components may include motor starters and variable frequency drives.


A. Reference Standards: Construction of panels and the installation and interconnection

of all equipment and devices mounted within also comply with applicable provisions of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified.

1. National Fire Protection Association 79 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards (NEMA) 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 5. Operational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations 6. State and local code requirements 7. Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringent

requirement applies. 8. All panel devices shall bear the label of the Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL), Inc.

or be UL Recognized. Some products certified by UL are components that are intended to be used in the manufacture of a complete listed product. These components cannot bear the UL symbol, but may use a special Recognized Component Mark.

a. The UL/UR listed number shall be documented on the Bill of Materials on the drawings.

9. The assembled LCP’s and MCP’s are to be conformed to meet UL 508A requirements and labeling.

B. Panel to be designed, schematics drawn and assembled by the manufacturer. Utilize

one of the following Panel Manufacturers:

1. RDC Electrical 3411 South 44th Street Phoenix, AZ 85040 Office: (602) 437-0760

2. Felix Construction

309 East 10th Drive Mesa, AZ 85210 Tel: (480) 464-0011


26866 17260-3 1/24/2019

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: 1. Reference Section 01330 Submittals. 2. Panels shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements as shown on the

Drawings, and as specified in Division 16, Section 16050 and Division 17000, Sections 17001, 17051, 17052, 17053, 17226 and 17260.

3. Generate drawing package utilizing AutoCAD versions 2004 through 2008. If utilizing a newer AutoCAD version, submit files saved at version 2008.

4. Submit legible hard copies of the panel drawing package printed on 11” x 17” sheets.

5. Submit manufacturer’s technical data sheets and product literature for the panel and all components utilized. Cleary identify exact equipment and material that is being supplied on the manufacturer’s data sheets.

6. Submit a sample nameplate with the submittal. 7. Identify general location of all conduit entry points on the Front Elevation

drawing of the documentation package. 8. Submit calculations and recommended cooling and heating load requirements.

Utilize the Hoffman Temperature Calculation tool at: http://www.hoffmanonline.com/product_catalog/tools/index.aspx?cat_1=34&cat_2=375&SelectCatID=375&CatId=375

9. Submit location and tube routing details for air conditioner drain line. Coordinate drain location with ENGINEER.

1.6 O&M Manuals A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data. B. Provide an electronic copy of the panel drawing package on a separate CD. Panel

Drawings are to be provided electronically in AutoCAD version 2004 through 2008. If utilizing a newer AutoCAD version, submit files saved at version 2008.


A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01651, Transportation and Handling of

Materials and Equipment. B. Comply with the requirements of 01661, Storage of Materials and Equipment. C. Provide a hard copy of the panel drawings, size 11” x 17”, inside the panel upon

delivery. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANEL ENCLOSURES A. General:


26866 17260-4 1/24/2019

1. Conform panels and enclosures to the NEMA requirements as stated in Specification 16050 – General Requirements.

2. All outdoor panels shall be provided with sunshade structures. Sunshade structures shall be constructed as shown on CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

3. Sizes shown on contract drawings are estimates. Furnish panels and enclosures sized to house all equipment, instruments, front panel mounted devices, power supplies, power distribution panels, wiring and other components installed within.

4. Size the panel to provide 10% spare free space capacity. 5. Use stainless steel fasteners throughout. 6. Provide interior mounting panels and shelves constructed of minimum 12 gage

steel. 7. Provide 12”x12’ print pocket in panels with a 24” or larger door. Mount on

inside door where no door mounted devices are located. If there is not enough room for a 12”x12” print pocket, provide a sized pocket to fit available room.

8. Provide enclosure mounting supports as required for floor, frame, or wall mounting. Indoor wall mount panels utilizing stainless steel unistrut. Outdoor wall mount panels utilizing pcv coated unistrut.

B. Construction Features: 1. General Construction Features - Provide the following convenience accessories

inside of each panel. a. One or more 120 VAC light fixtures with a minimum 40 watt lamp or LEDs

with a snap switch for on/off control. b. Provide grounding studs or lugs for metal panels and doors. c. Provide all electrical components and devices, support hardware, fasteners,

and interconnecting wiring required to make the panels and/or enclosures complete and operational.

d. Provide oil resistant gasket completely around each door or opening. e. For panels located in the field or outdoors that have door mounted devices

which do not meet the NEMA rating for the area, provide a window kit that includes a hinged door with a clear plastic window and an oil resistant gasket to encompass all non-NEMA rated panel instruments for this area.

f. Provide full height doors. g. Provide panels with no extra holes or knockouts unless shown on

CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

C. Environment 1. General: a. Provide the following panel(s) with an air conditioner, solar shields, heat

exchanger or ventilation fan based on the submitted calculations for cooling and/or heating load requirements.

1) Remote Telemetry Unit LCP-PLC-LS-76 – Solar Shields. 2) Pump Control Panel LCP-PCP-LS76 – Solar Shields.


26866 17260-5 1/24/2019

3) Communications Control Cabinet LCP-COM-LS-76 – Solar Shields and Air Conditioner.

4) Security Control Cabinet LCP-SEC-LS76 – Solar Shields and Air Conditioner b. Provide a heater for all panels located outdoors to maintain a minimum

temperature of 68°F. c. Provide a separate supplementary protector for the cooling or heating equipment. d. Provide thermostats to automatically control heating and cooling requirements. e. Provide a high temperature switch, for alarm purposes, in all panels that require

air conditioners, heat exchangers or ventilation fans. The contact shall be wired to alarm to the Computer Control System.

1) Products and Manufacturers: a) Hoffman ATEMNC b) Or Equal 2. Air Conditioner: a. Coordinate utilization of air conditioners with the ENGINEER. b. Provide an automatically controlled closed loop air conditioner with filtered and

adjustable air louvers to maintain temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the lowest rated component.

c. Condensate Coltrols: 1) For outdoor installations, provide a condensation drain line for each air

conditioner. 2) For indoor installations, provide an active condensate evaporation system. d. Coordinate space requirements for maintenance. e. Provide NEMA 4X for outdoor locations. f. Coat heating and cooling elements on ambient and enclosure sides including coils

that are in contact with Plant’s ambient environment with Heresite, or equal, for protection from hydrogen sulfide corrosion with hydrogen sulfide levels up to seven ppm.

1) Coordinate application of coating with the ENGINEER. g. Provide integral heater to maintain internal temperatures above 40°F. h. Product and Manufacturer: 1) Hoffman (McClean) G or N Series, Model Spectra Cool 3. Heat Exchanger: a. Coordinate utilization of heat exchangers with the ENGINEER. b. Provide an automatically controlled heat exchanger to maintain temperature

inside each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the lowest rated component.

c. Coordinate space requirements for maintenance. d. Products and Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman 4. Ventilation Fan: a. Coordinate utilization of ventilation fans with the ENGINEER. b. Provide automatically controlled ventilation fans with filter to maintain

temperature of indoor enclosures below the maximum operating temperature of


26866 17260-6 1/24/2019

the lowest rated component. c. Products and Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman 2) Or Equal 5. Heater: a. If panel is not equipped with an air conditioner, provide adequately sized

automatically controlled 120 VAC heater to maintain temperature inside each enclosure above 40°F to a maximum of 80°F when the outside temperature is 0°F through 40°F.

b. Maintain a minimum four inch clearance or minimum clearance recommendations from the manufacturers from any device.

c. Product and Manufacturer: 1) Hoffman 2) Or Equal D. Identification: 1. Provide laminated plastic nameplates with a white background and black lettering for

identification of panels and components. 2. Construct nameplates with 1/16” plastic and with beveled edges. 3. Nameplate Mounting a. Indoor panels: Mount nameplates to the panel utilizing glue. b. Outdoor panels: Mount nameplates to the panel utilizing glue and with two self-

sealing #4-40, round head, stainless steel screws. c. Glue Product and Manufacturer 1) 3M – Nitrile High Performance Rubber & Gasket Adhesive – Part # EC-847 2) Or Equal 4. Provide nameplates according to Table 2.1.C.5 and Section 3.1.B:

Nameplate Specifications

Type Size Font Font Size

Manufacturer Nameplate

*1½” x 6” Arial 1/8“

Panel Nameplate *2” x 7” Arial 1/2“ Device Nameplate *1½”x 2½” Arial 3/16“

Table 2.1.C.5 Nameplate Specifications

* This is a minimum height size requirement. Size nameplates large enough to display the information required to clearly identify the panel.


26866 17260-7 1/24/2019

2.2 PANEL DEVICES:

A. General: 1. Provide DIN rail mounted devices where practical. 2. All devices mounted on the exterior of the panel shall match the NEMA rating of

the panel.

B. Internal Component Labeling: 1. Provide a device label for devices mounted inside the panel that conforms to the

criteria below: a. Instruments: Provide label with the instrument loop number as shown on the

CONTRACT DRAWINGS. Place label below the instrument on the backplane.

b. Supplementary Protector: Label each supplementary protector with CB and the number assigned in the supplementary protector schedule. Place label on the backplane.

c. Fuses: Label each fuse with FU and the number assigned in the fuse schedule. Place a label on the backplane that includes the fuse number and the fuse size.

d. Control Relays: Label each relay with CR and the number assigned in the panel drawings. Place label below the relay on the backplane.

e. Terminal Strips: Label each terminal strip with the terminal strip type. (ex. TB1, TB2, ATB). Place label above the terminal block or at first terminal on the backplane.

f. Door Mounted Devices: Provide a label on the interior of the front panel door for every panel device. The label should contain the same information as shown on the front panel nameplate. Place the label below the device.

g. Wireway Covers: Label wireways with the voltage that is being routed through it. For example; “24 VDC” for DC voltage or “120VAC” for AC voltage. Place label on wireway cover. Coordinate label size to fit on wireway cover.

h. Identify internal components with permanent adhesive plastic labels. 1) Product and Manufacturer: a) Brady USA Inc. b) Or Equal 2) Provide device label size and fonts per Table 2.2.B.1:

Device Label Size Font Size # Points Brady Part #

(Wireways) 24VDC 1”x 4” Arial 48 Points PTL-42-422

(Wireways) 120VAC 1”x 4” Arial 48 Points PTL-42-422

Misc. Device Labels 1”x 1” Arial 16 Points PTL-19-423


26866 17260-8 1/24/2019

Panel Door Devices 1” x 1.5” Arial 8 Points PTL-31-423

Table 2.2.B.1 Panel Interior Device Label

C. DIN Rail 1. General: DIN rail is the metal rail used to mount various electrical components in

a panel 2. Mount all internal components on DIN Rail 3. DIN Rail for terminal blocks shall be raised DIN rail to match the height of the

wireways. 4. Product and Manufacturer, Provide one of the following: a. Phoenix Contact b. Or Equal D. Control Circuit – Supplementary Protectors: 1. Provide single pole supplementary circuit protectors with the following features,

120 Volt AC, DIN rail mounted and UL 1099 listed with auxiliary contacts. 2. Provide end caps, marking strips, insulated side jumpers and other accessories. 3. Product and Manufacturer, Provide one of the following models where “xx” is

the appropriate rating. a. Phoenix Contact, TMC 1-M1-xxA b. Allen-Bradley, 1492-SP1Bxxx c. Idec, NCIV-XXXXX-XXAA E. Air Conditioner or Heater Supplementary Protectors: 1. Provide supplementary protectors with the following features, 120 Volt AC, DIN

rail mounted and UL 489 listed with auxiliary contacts. 2. Product and Manufacturer, Provide one of the following: a. Allen-Bradley, Bulletin 1489 b. Or Equal F. Control Relays: 1. Type: General purpose, plug-in type rated for continuous duty. 2. Construction Features: a. Coil Voltages: 120 VAC b. Contacts: 1) Silver cadmium oxide rated not less than ten amperes resistive at 120 VAC or 28 VDC continuous. 2) For switching low energy circuits (less than 200 ma) fine silver, gold

flashed contacts rated not less than three amperes resistive at 120 VAC or 28 VDC continuous shall be provided.

3) Number of contacts:


26866 17260-9 1/24/2019

a) Minimum: Two double pole/double throw contact sets b) Maximum: Four double pole/double throw contact sets. c. Relays shall have a clear plastic dust cover. d. Socket type to be blade. e. Relays shall have an LED indicator 3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Type R and/or Type K, as manufactured by Square D Company. b. Type RH and/or Type RY, as manufactured by IDEC. c. Potter & Brumfield. G. Time Delay Relay: 1. Type: Dial adjustable, plug-in type time delay relay providing delay-on-make,

delay-on-break one shots or interval operation. 2. Construction Features: a. MOS digital circuit with transformer coupled power. b. Switch selectable ranges c. Minimum Setting: Three percent of range; except 50 ms for one second

range. d. Contacts: 1) Type: DPDT. 2) Rating: Seven amps resistive at 120 VAC, seven amps at 24 VDC. e. Housing: 1) Plug-in design with dust and moisture resistant molded plastic case. f. Power Input: 120 VAC 3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Automatic Timing and Controls Company. b. IDEC. H. Selector Switches, Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights: 1. General: a. Selector switches, pushbuttons and indicating lights shall be supplied by one

manufacturer and be of the same series or model type. b. Type: Heavy duty, oil tight c. Mounting: Flush mounted on panel front, unless otherwise noted. d. NEMA rated to match panel in which mounted. 2. Selector Switches: a. Type: Provide selector switches with number of positions as required to

perform intended functions as shown on the Drawings and specified. b. Contacts: 1) Provide number and arrangement of contacts as required to perform

intended functions specified, but not less than one single pole, double throw contact.

2) Type: Double break, silver contacts with movable contact blade providing scrubbing action.


26866 17260-10 1/24/2019

3) Rating: Compatible with AC or DC current with devices simultaneously operated by the switch contacts, but not less than ten amperes resistive at 120 volts AC or DC continuous.

c. Switch Operator: Standard black knob. 3. Pushbuttons (Standard or Illuminated): a. Momentary Type: Provide momentary, booted type pushbuttons as required

to perform intended functions specified and shown on the Drawings. Boot color to be red for stop buttons and black for other functions.

b. Maintained Type: Provide maintained, push/pull, “Mushroom” type, red in color, to perform intended functions as specified, and as shown on the drawings.

1). Emergency Stop button shall be red and the base of the button shall be yellow.

c. Contacts: Comply with the requirements specified for selector switches. 4. Indicating Lights: a. Type: Compact, integral non-transformer type. b. Lamps: 120 VAC, long life (20,000 hours minimum). c. Common, push-to-test circuitry shall be provided for each panel to simulta-

neously test all indicating lights on the panel using a single pushbutton. d. Button and Lens Colors: 1) Red for indication of open, on, or running. 2) Green for indication of closed, off (ready), or stopped. 3) Amber for indication of equipment malfunction, process trouble or alarms. 4) White for indication of electrical control power on. 5. Rotary Cam Switches: a. Provide rotary cam switches with number of positions and poles as required

performing the signal switching function specified and shown on the Drawings.

b. Contacts: 1) Gold-flashed contacts housed in mechanical contact blocks with number

and arrangement of contacts as required performing intended function. 2) Contact Rating: Compatible with AC or DC through-put current of

signals and devices simultaneously operated by the switch contacts, but not less than 20 amperes at 600 VAC or 250 VDC continuous.

c. Switch Operator: Standard black knob. 6. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Square D. b. General Electric. c. Allen-Bradley Co. I. Potentiometer: 1. Type: Industrial potentiometer operator, direct acting, 3/4 to full turn; and

standard 3-wire potentiometer. 2. Required Features:


26866 17260-11 1/24/2019

a. NEMA rated to match panel in which mounted. b. Resistance Range: 0 to 10,000 Ohms. c. Resistance Element: Wire wound or conductive plastic. d. Power Rating: Two watts. e. Mounting: Flush mounted on panel front, unless otherwise noted. f. Provide legend plate for indication of position (0 to 100 percent). 3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Square D. b. General Electric. c. Allen-Bradley Co. J. Power Supplies: 1. General a. Panel power supply source, type, voltage, number of circuits and circuit

ratings shall be as shown on the Contract Drawings. b. Panels shall be provided with an internal 120 VAC with number of circuits

and separate supplementary protectors sized as required to distribute power to the panel components.

2. Power Supplies/Switches a. General:

1) Din Rail Mountable 2) Input Voltage 12VDC, 24VDC, 120 VAC 3) Setting Range of Output Voltage 5 VDC…15VDC, 24VDC 4) Products and Manufacturer: Provide the following by Phoenix Contact:

a) DC / DC Converters Mini-PS-12-24DC/5-15DC/2 - Part # 2320018 b) Power Supply Unit – Quint-PS/1AC/24DC/5 – Part 2866750 c) Uninterruptible Power Supply – Quint- S/24DC/24DC/5 – Part # 232212

d) Industrial Ethernet Switch – FL Switch SFNT 5TX – Part # 2891003 K. Wire: 1. General a. Provide internal wiring of Type MTW stranded copper wire with thermo-

plastic insulation with no nylon jacket rated for 600 V at 90°C for single conductors.

b. No utilization of Type THHN for panel wiring. c. For DC panel signal wiring, use #16 AWG shielded minimum. d. For AC power wiring, use #14 AWG minimum. For AC signal and control

wiring, use #16 AWG minimum. For wiring carrying more than 15 amps, use sizes required by NEC and NFPA 79 Standards.

e. Identify wires at each end using heat shrink labels with permanent number codes using a Brady LS2000 Labeling System, or equal.


26866 17260-12 1/24/2019

f. Panels conform to the wire color code as shown in Table 2.2.K.1.f Wire Color Code and NFPD 79 Standards.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Carol b. Belden c. Anixter

WIRE COLOR CODE TABLE (Inside Panels)

TYPE FUNCTION INSULATION COLOR WIRE SIZE

AC POWER - HOT 120VAC **BLACK #14 AC POWER -

NEUTRAL 120VAC WHITE #14

AC GROUND 120VAC GREEN #14

AC CONTROL 120VAC **RED #16

ISOLATED DC GROUND GROUND GREEN

W/YELLOW #16

DC POWER SOURCE BLUE #16

DC POWER COMMON WHITE /BLUE #16

CONTROL FOREIGN VOLTAGES ORANGE #16

LOW VOLTAGE AC 24 VAC SOURCE BROWN #16

LOW VOLTAGE AC 24 VAC COMMON BROWN W/WHITE #16

*AC POWER 480 VAC PHASE A BROWN Size to FLA

*AC POWER 480 VAC PHASE B ORANGE Size to FLA

*AC POWER 480 VAC PHASE C YELLOW Size to FLA

TEMPORARY TEMPORARY PURPLE Size to FLA

Table 2.2.K.1.f Wire Color Code

* - For Motor Control Panels (MCP’s) that are permitted to contain 480 VAC

** - Black 120 VAC wires are hot unless powered down via supplementary circuit protector. Red 120 VAC wires are hot based on the control logic state.

L. Single Shielded Pair Cable:


26866 17260-13 1/24/2019

1. Tinned copper, nineteen strand, PVC insulated conductors, No. 16 AWG minimum, twisted with aluminum-polyester shield, stranded tinned 16 AWG copper drain wire and PVC black or gray outer jacket. Wire conductor colors shall be black (-neg) and red (+pos). 600 Volt Tray Cable (TC) rated.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Belden Company (No. 9342). b. Okonite Company. c. Dekoron Wire and Cable Company. M. Wire Terminations: 1. Terminate all field and internal component wiring using insulated ferruled

connectors attached with manufacturer’s recommended tool. 2. Excessive stripping of the wire so as to allow bare wire outside the insulated

ferrule is not permitted. 3. Utilize insulated double ferruled connectors wherever two wires terminate on the

same terminal block connection. 4. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Phoenix Contact – Clipline b. Thomas & Betts c. Weidmuller N. Terminal Blocks: 1. General a. Numerically code terminals utilizing terminal block manufacturer’s marking

system. Information must be printed directly on the terminal label. Sticky back labels are not permitted.

b. Terminal blocks must be DIN rail mountable with screw clamp connections. Spring cage connections are not permitted.

c. Double level terminal blocks are permitted for use with signals on ATB only. d. Terminals used for analog signals on ATB shall be colored blue. e. Terminal block jumpers must be connected via screw clamp. Screw clamped

comb jumpers are permitted. Plug in jumpers are not permitted. 2. Product and Manufacturer: For each terminal strip type provide one of the

following: a. Power Terminal Block (PTB) 1) Phoenix Contact, Type UK 5 N, Color Gray, Model # 30 04 36 2 2) Allen Bradley, Type 1492-J4, Color Gray, Model # 1492-J4 3) Weidmuller, Type WSU 4, Color Dark Beige, Model # 1020100000 b. Field Wiring Discrete Signal Terminal Blocks (TB1 and TB2) 1) Phoenix Contact, Type UDK 3, Double Connection, Color Gray, Model # 27 75 37 5 2) Weidmuller, Type WDU 4/ZZ, Double Connection, Double Level,

Internal Connection, Color Dark Beige, Model # 1905060000 c. Field Wiring Analog or Internal Wiring DC Power (ATB) - Single Level


26866 17260-14 1/24/2019

Terminal Blocks: 1) Phoenix Contact, Type UK 3N BU, Color Blue, Model # 30 01 51 4 2) Allen Bradley, Type 1492-J3-B, Color Blue, Model # 1492-J3-B 3) Weidmuller, Type WDU 2.5 BL, Color Blue, Model # 1020080000 d. Field Wiring Analog or Internal Wiring DC Power (ATB) - Double Level

Terminal Blocks. Alternating double and single level ATB terminal blocks are permitted.

1) Phoenix Contact, Type MBKKB 2,5 BU, Double Level, Color Blue, Model # 27 71 09 4

2) Allen Bradley, Type 1492-JD3-B, Double Level, Color Blue, Model # 1492-JD3-B 3) Weidmuller, Type WDK 2.5 BL, Double Level, Color Blue, Model # 1021580000 O. Surge Protection: 1. Provide DC surge protection with integrated varistor for all analog signal loops

that are terminated to Programmable Logic Controllers provided in accordance with Specification Section 17262 – Programmable Logic Controller, Software and Programming.

2. Provide maintenance free, self-restoring surge protection to protect the electronic instrumentation system from surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. Device shall be removable without interrupting the circuit

3. Provide a separate surge protector for the positive and a separate surge protector for the negative polarity of each loop.

4. Mount the surge protectors on the ATB. 5. Ground the surge protectors to the panel DC ground bus. 6. Label the surge protectors in sequential order starting with the ATB signals. 7. Required Features: a. Amp Rating: Compatible with working voltage and current of device being

protected. b. Voltage Rating: Compatible with the working voltage of protected device. c. Reaction Time: nanosecond range 8. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Phoenix Contact b. Advanced protection Technologies c. EDCO d. Or Equal P. Wireways: 1. General: a. Mount wireways using stainless steel bolts. Drill and tap the sub-panel to

accommodate the bolts. b. Color to be Gray or White throughout the entire panel. Provide only one

color.


26866 17260-15 1/24/2019

c. All wireways to include cover. d. Wireway covers to be labeled as per section 2.2.B 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Panduit b. Thomas & Betts c. Or Equal Q. Motor Starters and Overload Relays: 1. Refer to Specification Section 16423 – Motor Control Centers or 16422 –

Combination Motor Starters

PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1 EXTERIOR PANEL: A. Component Layout: 1. Arrange associated control and indication devices for a particular part of the

process in close proximity to each other. 2. Mount indicating lights above control switches and push buttons. 3. Standard component spacing is 3 ½” center to center and 3 ½” above and below.

It is acceptable to use more space if required, but spatial consistency must be maintained.

4. Maximum height for panel exterior-mounted devices is 6’-0” from the floor. Minimum height for panel exterior-mounted devices is 3’-0” from the floor.

5. Locate alarm horn at the top of the panel. The alarm horn may be located above 6’-0” device height limitation.

6. Unless otherwise noted; route field wiring through the bottom of the enclosure. Provide watertight conduit openings.

B. Exterior Panel Nameplates 1. General a. Refer to Section 2.1.D for material and size requirements. b. Provide specific panel identification on nameplates derived from the

CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS and DRAWINGS. c. Obtain ENGINEER approval for panel identification for panels that are not

identified in the CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS and DRAWINGS. 2. Panel Manufacturer Identifier and Power Requirements Nameplate (NP-1) a. Mount nameplate in the upper left corner of the panel front. b. Provide the following information for each circuit feeding the panel. 1) The first line indicates the name of the manufacturer, location and phone

number of who assembled the panel. 2) The following lines: a) Include panel voltage, current, phase, frequency, short circuit current


26866 17260-16 1/24/2019

rating for each panel feed. b) Provide switchboard name and circuit number for each circuit feeding

the panel. c) Refer to figure 3.1.B.2

MITCHELL & SONS, TOLLESON, AZ - (602) 555-1212

120 VAC, 0.5 AMPS, 1Ø, 60HZ, SCCR 5KA, FED FROM LP-34, CIRCUIT 6

120 VAC, 7.5 AMPS, 1Ø, 60HZ, SCCR 8KA, FED FROM LP-34, CIRCUIT 8

Figure 3.1.B.2

Panel Manufacturer Identifier and Power Requirements Nameplate (NP-1)

3. Panel Identification Nameplate (NP-2) a. Mount panel identification nameplate in the top, center of the panel. b. Provide the following information: 1) The first line of text is an abbreviation of the panel as shown on the

CONTRACT DRAWINGS. 2) The second line of text on the nameplate is used to spell out the process

abbreviation. 3) Refer to figure 3.1.B.3.

LCP-BWT1-FL

BACKWASH WASTE TANK #1

Figure 3.1.B.3

Panel Identification Nameplate (NP-2) 4. Panel Component Nameplates a. Mount nameplates above all control and indicating devices.

Second Line of Text

First Line of Text


26866 17260-17 1/24/2019

b. Provide the following information: 1) The first line indicates the instrument device loop identifier and number

as shown on the DRAWINGS. 2) The second line identifies the system equipment that the component is

associated with. 3) The third line identifies the control position, condition of the equipment

or the alarm state being monitored. 4) Refer to figure 3.1.B.4

MN-061

SNPW BOOSTER PUMP 1

RUNNING

Figure 3.1.B.4

Panel Component Nameplates

3.2 INTERIOR PANEL

A. General: 1. All Wall Mounted Panels - Where conduit enters the panel, maintain a minimum

of 4” clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring.

2. Concrete Pad or Floor Mounted LCP’s and MCP’s – Where conduits enter the panel through the concrete pad, maintain a minimum of 6” clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring. Where conduit enters the panel sides or top, maintain a minimum of 4” clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring.

3. Elevated Floor Mounted LCP’s and MCP’s - Where conduit enters the panel, maintain a minimum of 4” clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring.

Second Line of Text

Third Line of Text

First Line of Text


26866 17260-18 1/24/2019

4. Concrete Pad, Floor Mounted or Elevated Floor Mounted ITP’s - Where conduits enter the panel through the top or bottom, maintain a minimum of 6” clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring.

5. Locate and install all devices and components so that connections can be easily made and that there is ample room for servicing each item.

6. Maintain a minimum 2’0” clearance between components mounted on side panels and components mounted on the opposing side panel.

7. Components mounted on the back panel are to be unobstructed by any components mounted on side panels.

8. Adequately support and restrain all devices and components mounted on or within the panel to prevent any movement.

B. Panel Incoming Power: 1. Panel power fed from lighting panels, or other sources with fused or circuit

breaker protection, shall be wired to the Power Terminal Blocks (PTBs). Power sources entering the panel are to be provided with a separate neutral and ground. The PTBs shall have a separate terminal for the hot and neutral for each circuit. The ground to be terminated to the AC ground bar.

2. Mount the PTBs near the top left corner of the panel. 3. Multiple power sources may be required for each panel. Power requirements are

identified on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS. The following additional power sources may be required for the panel.

a. Control Logic Power and Light Fixture b. Air Conditioning 4. Arrange the terminal strip in an orderly manner with circuit conductors grouped

together. For instance, terminate the hot and neutral conductors on consecutive terminals. Label terminals and internal wiring as H1 and N1 (Control Logic), H2 and N2 (Air Conditioning). Identify each additional source in sequential order beginning with H3 and N3.

5. Terminate all incoming power on one side of the terminal strip.

C. AC Power Distribution: 1. Identify the wire extending from the PTB to the supplementary protector as H1

and H2, etc. Using H1 as an example; the wire terminated to the line side of the supplementary protector is labeled H1, the wire terminated to the load side of the supplementary protector is labeled as L1-1.

2. If L1-1 passes through an additional supplementary protector to feed panel components, this supplementary protector can be shown on the drawings in a horizontal or vertical position on a schematic rung and the wire terminated to the line side of the supplementary protector is labeled L1-1. The wire terminated to the load side of the supplementary protector is labeled L1 – (the Supplementary Protector #) and the wire color is black.


26866 17260-19 1/24/2019

3. If the panel controls multiple pieces of equipment, such as two pumps with separate control circuits, provide a supplementary protector for each control circuit.

4. Powering 120 VAC field 4-wire instruments from the panel is not permitted.

D. DC Power Distribution: 1. Mount DC power supplies near the top right of the panel. Mount fuses associated

with the power supply in close proximity to the power supplies. 2. Identify terminals used for DC power distribution as PTB-DC. 3. Provide a fuse for each analog loop that loop power is provided by a power

supply located in the panel.

E. Grounding: 1. AC Ground: a. Provide the AC ground bus bar with cage type or screw terminals installed

near the bottom of the back panel with extended mounting bolts. b. Provide adequate metal to metal contact between the AC ground bus bar and

the back plane. c. Connect all AC power sources and devices to ground at this ground bus. d. Connect all panel enclosure doors to the AC ground bus. e. Connect all side panels to the AC ground bus. f. Provide a connection point on the ground bus for connection to the ground

grid system. 2. DC Ground: a. Install the isolated DC grounding bus bar with cage type or screw terminals

installed near the bottom of the back panel at a minimum distance of 6” from the AC ground bus.

b. The isolated grounding bus bar consists of two non-conductive mounting blocks with a single copper grounding bar attached between them.

c. Connect all shields (SH) requiring loop grounding in the panel from the analog signal terminals to the DC grounding bus bar.

d. To avoid ground loops, connect analog cable signal shields to ground at one location only, preferably in the LCP, MCP or ITP; not in the field. Maintain consistency for the termination point of signal shield for all analog signals.

e. Provide a connection point on the ground bus for connection to the ground grid system.

f. Figure 3.2 illustrates a typical ground system within a panel. The illustration depicts the physical terminations of the ground wires in the panel. Ground Conductor AWG size to ground grid system shall be as stated in Specification 16061 – Grounding Systems.


26866 17260-20 1/24/2019

Figure 3.2

Typical Grounding Systems

F. Circuit Protection: 1. Provide an isolating supplementary protector for each group of control logic. For

example: the start, stop and reset control circuit for Pump #1 has a dedicated supplementary protector supplying power to the control logic. Pump #2 requires a separate isolating supplementary protector for the control logic.

2. Provide an isolating supplementary protector for each component requiring 120 VAC power.

3. A supplementary protector is not required for control circuits powered from a fused control power transformer in an MCP.

4. Size supplementary protector to handle the connected load. 5. Mount supplementary protector next to the PTBs near the top left corner of the

panel. 6. Provide an auxiliary contact for each supplementary protector. Wire each

auxiliary contact from the supplementary protector in series to one “Power fail’ relay. Send one Power Fail status to the Computer Control System.

G. Internal Panel Wiring:


26866 17260-21 1/24/2019

1. Route all internal wiring using wireways. Terminate all internal wires on one side of the terminal blocks. The opposite side of the terminal block shall remain available for field wires.

2. Where wires pass through panel walls, provide suitable bushings to prevent cutting or abrading of insulation.

3. Adequately support and restrain all wiring runs to prevent sagging or other movement. Wires extended from the control logic to the panel door devices are to be wrapped in plastic protective wire wrap designed for this purpose.

4. Wire splicing is not allowed at any time. 5. Utilize two wires (hot and return leg) with field wiring for each field input. It is

not acceptable to utilize one common Hot for multiple field inputs. 6. Terminate wires with a non-insulated ferrule type crimp connector. Excessive

stripping of the insulation to allow bare wire strands between the insulation and the ferrule is not permitted.

7. Orientate wire labels on the individual conductor or cable so that wire labels are legible without having to twist or move the connectors. Securely heat shrink the labels around the conductor. Label wires or cables with the number assigned in the panel documentation. Refer to Section 2.2.K.1.e for wire label materials.

8. DC wiring for analog and discrete field or Computer Control System signals that enter or leave the panel are to be terminated on the Analog Terminal Block (ATB).

9. AC wiring for discrete field signals that enter or leave the panel are to be terminated on the Terminal Block 1 (TB1).

10. AC wiring for discrete Computer Control System signals that enter or leave the panel are to be terminated on Terminal Block 2 (TB2).

11. The terminal blocks (TB1, TB2 or ATB) can be mounted on the left or right side panels.

12. Provide a minimum of 10% spare terminal DIN rail space per terminal strip. 13. Signals from the field that enter the panel and only pass through the panel from

the field to the Computer Control System require internal wiring from TB1 to TB2.

14. Arrange all control wiring associated with a particular piece of process equipment together on adjacent terminal blocks.

15. Identify wire number by the schematic rung numbers. Label TB1 and TB2 terminals with the rung number associated with the internal wire number connected to the terminal. Label ATB terminals in sequential order starting with the number 1. Identify analog shield terminations with an “SH” on the terminal block.

16. Multi-conductor cables of two pair or more shall have the outer cable insulation removed before entering the wireway.

17. Route all DC power and analog signals at a minimum of six inches from AC power and controls. When the six inch minimum distance is not available, provide a metallic barrier that extends 3” beyond the tallest wireway between the analog and discrete wireways.


26866 17260-22 1/24/2019

H. Wireways: 1. Mount wireways from the internal panel components and terminal blocks with a

minimum 2” spacing. 2. Arrange wireways to maintain a six inch minimum distance between analog and

discrete circuit wiring. 3. Provide wireways for all field wiring. Arrange wireways to allow field wiring to

enter from the top or bottom of the panel. 4. Align wireways between back and side panels. 5. Install a wireway on both sides of each terminal strip. 6. Size wireways to prevent conductor fill from exceeding 50% of the interior cross-

sectional area of the wireway. 7. In addition to the above requirements, for ITP’s, wireways are not to be common

for two terminal strips. Each terminal strip shall have a dedicated wireway on each side of the strip.

I. Control Logic: 1. The Start commands are to be designed utilizing normally open contacts from

pushbuttons and/or the Computer Control System and shall be of a momentary signal that will require a seal circuit to maintain operation. Constant signals from positions switches are not allowed unless noted on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

2. All system failure, safety logic control devices or normal operations that are intended to cause the equipment to stop are to be wired in series with the start seal circuit. The unsealing of the start command on any fault or normal operation that causes the equipment to stop will require another start command to reseal.

3. Provide interlocks for the control functions of Local and Computer Modes in series with the Start and Stop logic. Provide a closed switch or relay contact to the Computer Control System to identify when the equipment is in Computer Mode.

4. Provide control logic of voltage 120 VAC. 5. Use power relays when control relay contacts are insufficient for the designated

load. 6. Terminate the “Hot” conductor on the common of the switch or relay contact. 7. Control alarm logic shall be wired in a fail safe mode from the field device to the

panel circuitry to alarm when a field wire has failed.

3.3 PANEL DRAWING DOCUMENTATION

A. General: 1. Files of the title block, panel symbols for front and internal sub-panel elevations,

terminal strips, control schematics, analog loops, etc. are available in hard copy and AutoCAD .dwg format from the OWNER upon request through the ENGINEER via Example Panel Drawing Packages and Drawing Templates.


26866 17260-23 1/24/2019

2. Provide drawing copies in the following format: a. Hard Copy - B Size - 11” X 17” b. Hard Copy - D Size - 22” X 34” c. Soft Copy in .DWG 3. The panel drawing documentation package consists of the following drawings

types arranged in the following order. a. Cover Sheet b. Symbols and Legends 1 – Exterior and Interior Panel Symbols c. Symbols and Legends 2 – Schematic Symbols d. Front Panel Elevation e. Interior/Sub Panel Layout f. Terminal Strip Drawings g. Control Schematics h. Analog Loop Diagrams

4. Drawing Scale: a. Provide Front Elevation and Interior/Sub Panel Layout Drawings

proportionately correct and to scale. Create all drawings on a D Size layout. 5. Border and Title Block: a. Provide each drawing with a border and title block information. b. Utilize the border and title block as provided in the Drawing Templates

referenced in Section 3.3.A.1. B. Panel Drawing Types: 1. General: a. Provide a complete documentation package for each panel consisting of the

drawings in the order listed in Section 3.3.A.3. 2. Cover: a. Cover sheet for the panel documentation shall include the following

information. 1) Located on the left half of the sheet to include the Manufacturers Name,

Address, Phone Number, Web Address, Project Reference Number and UL508A Certification Number.

2) Located on the right half of the sheet include the title “City of Phoenix” “Water Service Department” and the project title, City of Phoenix project number, the panel full title, the panel abbreviation, the facility area in which the panel exists, submittal date, volume number and sheet count.

3. Symbols & Legends a. Utilize the Symbols and Legend sheets as provided by the OWNER upon

request from the ENGINEER. b. Additional symbols may be added if an existing symbol on the Symbol and

Legend sheets does not exist. 4. Front Elevation Drawing a. The Front Elevation drawing illustrates the arrangement of the panel and

position of the devices on the front face of the panel.


26866 17260-24 1/24/2019

b. Provide panel dimensions in inches. Provide dimensions for height, width, and depth. If the panel is small in size, the Front Elevation Drawing and Internal layout Drawing can be combined on one drawing.

c. Provide the nameplate schedule on the Front Elevation drawing. d. Device Callouts 1) Device callout hexagons are utilized to reference a device to the bill of

materials. Place the bill of material item number inside the hexagon. 2) Provide a leader from the hexagon that will point to the device. 3) For a typical of multiple devices of the same type, only one device callout

is necessary. e. Provide air conditioning heating and cooling information as provided by the

Hoffman Temperature Calculation tool at: http://www.hoffmanonline.com/product_catalog/tools/index.aspx?cat_1=34&cat_2=375&SelectCatID=375&CatId=375

5. Interior Sub Panel Layout: a. General: 1) The Interior Sub Panel Layout drawing identifies the individual interior

components and their physical location. 2) Draw all components within the panel to scale. 3) Include all interior sub panels if the panel has sub panels on the side walls. b. Provide the following information on the Interior Sub Panel Layout Drawing.

Utilize the formats provided on the Drawing Templates. The information can be shown on a second sheet if needed to drawing clutter.

1) Bill of Materials a) Include the devices on the Front Panel Elevation and the Interior Sub

Panel(s) Elevation. b) Include items that are not specifically shown on the Front Panel

Elevation or the Interior Sub Panel Layout drawing, such as wire size, color and type, on the bill of materials.

c) The utilization or insertion of Microsoft Excel files for the Bill of Materials is not allowed.

2) Fuse Schedule 3) Supplementary Protector Schedule c. Label and identify all devices, including terminal strips, relays, fuses, timers,

power supplies and other special components on the drawing. d. For unique devices not shown on the Symbols and Legend Sheets, use

rectangles and squares with the appropriate dimensions of the device. e. Device Callouts 1) Device callout hexagons are utilized to reference a device to the bill of

materials. Place the bill of material item number inside the hexagon. 2) Provide a leader from the hexagon that will point to the device. 3) For a typical of multiple devices of the same type, only one device callout

is necessary. 6. Terminal Strip Drawing:


26866 17260-25 1/24/2019

a. General: 1) Terminal Strip Drawings provides locations for wiring terminations from

field devices and other equipment external to the panel. 2) Display the wiring connections exactly as they are physically installed.

For example, if field wiring is terminated to the left side of the terminal strip, the terminal strip drawing displays the wiring connections to the left side of the terminal block.

3) There are 5 different types of terminal strips and each has a specific function. The following is a brief description of each:

a) For LCP’s and MCP’s: i. Power Terminal Block (PTB) – Power supply/supplies to the

panel (120 VAC or higher). Identify terminal block number with the wire number assigned in the control logic drawings. Identify power sources with the originating panel, voltage and circuit number.

ii. Field Wiring Discrete Signal Terminal Blocks (TB1) – Discrete field inputs and outputs to/from the panel. Identify terminal block number with the rung number assigned in the control logic drawings.

iii. Field Wiring Discrete Signal Terminal Blocks (TB2) – Discrete inputs and outputs to/from the Computer Control System. Identify terminal block number with the rung number assigned in the control logic drawings.

iv. Field Wiring Analog (ATB) or Internal Wiring DC Power Terminal Blocks - Field or Computer Control System Analog inputs and outputs to/from the panel, including 4-20 mA, 1-5 VDC, thermocouple or Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTD’s). Identify terminal block number with consecutive numbers starting with number 1. The shield wire terminal block is to be label “SH”.

b) For ITP’s: i. TB-A thru Z – Discrete field inputs and outputs to/from the panel. ii. ATB-A thru Z – Analog inputs and outputs to/from the panel. 4) It is acceptable, if space available, to combine TB1, TB2, ATB and PTB

on a single terminal strip drawing. 5) Identify spare terminals with an “SP” inside the rectangle. 6) Display terminals in the order they appear in the panel. 7) Place field wire labels on each line extending toward the terminal.

Obtain this information from the cable and conduit schedules. If wire labels are unavailable, place seven “X’s” where wire tag normally resides. Provide this information prior to final deliverable of the Operations & Maintenance Manuals.

8) Signal description consists of 3 lines of text. Center the text next to the terminals.


26866 17260-26 1/24/2019

a) The 1st line of text lists the Equipment Name. b) The 2nd line of text is for the Signal Function. c) The 3rd line of text is the Signal Loop Number, if applicable. 7. Control Schematic: a. General: 1) Control Schematics show the controls associated with pieces of process

equipment and provide a visual depiction of the majority of control wiring.

b. Control Schematic Components: 1) Power Rail: a) Represent the power rail with two parallel vertical lines that extend

vertically down the schematic. b) Each drawing includes two sets of power rails separated by 2.5”. c) Identify each power rail with the wire number such as L1 at the top

and bottom of each power rail. d) The left power rail represents the “Hot” side of the power source. The

right power rail represents the “Neutral” side of the power source. 2) Power Source: a) Identify power source(s) with the originating panel, voltage and

circuit number between the “Hot” terminal and “Neutral” terminal on the first rung of the portion of the schematic for each source.

b) Indicate the terminals from the PTB providing the source and neutral powering the rail.

c) A supplementary protector or fuse is displayed in the power rail directly below the power source (Hot) terminal. Label the supplementary protector or fuse with the supplementary protector or fuse number and current rating.

d) Power layout for LCP’s: i. In the first portion of the schematic, display power to the general

purpose receptacle and panel light. ii. In the second portion of the schematic, display power to the air

conditioner and/or heater. iii. In the third portion of the schematic, display the power to the

control logic. iv. See Sections 3.2.B Panel Incoming Power and 3.2.C AC Power

Distribution. e) Power layout for MCP’s: i. The first portion is for the typical 480 VAC motor control circuit

with starter and disconnect, the next sections are the same as for the LCP’s.

3) Rung Number: a) Rung numbers are used to identify the location and cross referencing

of devices within the schematic and provide a practical means of labeling conductors and terminals within the panel.


26866 17260-27 1/24/2019

b) Rung numbers are a sequential series of numbers starting with number 1. Locate the numbers vertically along the left side of the “Hot” power rail.

c) Rungs are to be spaced on 0.5” centers based on a D Sized drawing. 4) Wire Numbering: a) On the downstream side of the first device on a rung, the wire number

takes the rung number appearing to the left of the power rail. If a second device is located in the circuit, the wire number to the right of the second device takes the rung number, but is appended with an “A”. The wire number to the right of the third device is appended with a “B”, and so on.

b) When the electrical connection originated on the previous rung, the wire numbers continue to use the previous rung number as the base.

c) Connections to the power neutral rail take on the power neutral rail’s wire number N#.

5) Electrical Connections: a) Represent electrical connections as a solid small circle where two or

more wires interconnect. b) Represent electrical connections as a hollow small circle where wires

terminate to a device. 6) Electrical Wiring: a) Electrical wires or circuits are represented by horizontal rungs that

connect terminal blocks, relays, contacts and all other components used in the electrical schematic.

b) Space the schematic electrical wiring every other rung at a minimum. c) Identify each wire with the rung number as the wire number. d) Label each wire with the conductor insulation color below each

electrical wire. Refer to Table 2.2.K.1.f. e) Indicate electrical wiring that is external to the panel with dashed

lines. 7) Device Labeling: a) Device symbols in the schematic for field devices, pilot lights,

switches, push buttons etc. requires two lines of text above the device and one line of text below the device to describe the usage of the device.

i. The first line of text above the device is the name of the equipment the device is associated with.

ii. The second line of text above the device is the control function of the device.

iii. The line of text under the device is the loop number. b) Relay and timer symbol labels are to be identified with consecutive

number starting with the number 1 or the rung number. For relay coils and contacts, identify the relay base terminal connection.


26866 17260-28 1/24/2019

Normally open or normally closed contacts refer to the de-energized or “off the shelf” state.

c) Symbols in the schematic for contacts of relays, timers, etc. require two lines of text above the contact and two lines of text below the contact to describe the usage and coil reference of the contact.

i. The first line of text above the contact is the name of the equipment the device is associated with.

ii. The second line of text above the device is the control function of the device.

iii. The first line of text under the device is the relay or timer number to reference the relay or timer in the schematic.

iv. The second line of text under the device is the rung number of the relay or timer to reference where the relay or timer is located in the schematic. If using the rung number for the relay or timer coil, the rung number under the contact is not required.

v. For relays and timer contact references, at the right of the neutral power rail, the schematic rung number location of all associated contacts is shown. If the contact is normally closed, underline the reference number. If a contact is unused, “SP” is shown.

8) Field Contacts: a) Show Field Contacts connected to their respective TB1 or TB2

Terminals. b) The connection lines from the contact to the terminal are dashed to

designate they originate from outside the panel. 9) Selector Switches: a) Always show the switch in the far-left position, the switch contacts

are shown as either opened or closed in this state. If they’re in the closed state, the contact is shown closed, indicated by a line shown below and touching the two side small circles. If the contact is open in this position, a line is drawn above the two side small circles, but not touching them.

b) Show each position of the switch directly above its respective location on the switch. This indicates whether it is a two, three, four, or more position (pole) switch, and shows what the nameplate on each position will read.

c) To indicate which positions the contact is closed, show a contact legend in parenthesis below and to the right of the contact. If the contact is closed in a position, an “X” is shown in the order of the contact position in which it is closed. If the contact is open in a position, an “O” is shown.

d) When a selector switch is continued onto another sheet or further down on the same sheet, the continuation note is shown below the selector switch. Where the switch is continued, the same note appears, but on the top of the contact.


26866 17260-29 1/24/2019

10) Push Buttons: a) Represent the push button contact in its “off the shelf” state. 11) Terminals: a) Terminal numbers are dependent upon the specific rung number that

they appear in the schematic logic. As a horizontal electrical connection is followed from left to right, the first terminal number takes on the number of the rung. The second terminal number also takes the rung number but is appended by the letter A, the third by the letter B, and so on.

12) Programmable Logic Controller: a) Panels that contain a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) require

connection information for the PLC I/O modules. i. Utilize the PLC drawings as provided in the Drawing Templates

referenced in Section 3.3.A.1.a. b) Module Layout: i. Represent the module with a 1 1/2” wide vertical rectangle with a

length suitable to encompass a maximum of 16 channels or 8 analog per section based on type of module. Two cards can be shown per sheet.

ii. Display field wiring (inputs) including TB1 and field device connections with a description on the left side of the module symbol.

iii. Label the module with model number, input voltage, rack number and slot number above the module symbol.

iv. Number each screw terminal per manufacturer’s data. v. Display the associated PLC register address with each signal. vi. Identify the positive and negative legs of the analog cable. vii. Include all required jumpers for signal type and all 120VAC and

24VDC power requirements. 13) 480 Volt Equipment: a) Provide the motor horsepower, full load amps and motor

identification. 14) Contact Development: a) The last sheet of the control schematic displays contacts for internal

panel relay contacts that connect with external field equipment or the Computer Control System (CCS).

b) Organizes into two sections. The first section lists all contacts extending to the CCS. Title this section “Contacts to CCS”. The second section lists all contacts extending into the field equipment external to the panel. Title this section “Contacts to Field”. Group multiple contacts related to a single piece of equipment together.

c) Each contact includes a signal description and its associated relay number and relay rung number location. Device signals require the appropriate symbol from the Schematic Legend Sheet.


26866 17260-30 1/24/2019

8. Analog Loop Diagrams: a. General: 1) The analog loop diagram only displays the portion of the instrument loop

that passes through a particular panel. 2) The analog loop diagram displays the connections between field

instruments, panels and the CCS. 3) Analog loop diagrams are reserved for analog signals and control loops,

but may be used to show complex connections for a particular instrument or device.

4) Divide each loop into three different segments. a) The left segment is “FIELD” connections. This segment provides

information on terminations external to the panel (i.e., connected panels, instrument transmitters). If the first segment is another panel, the panel name replaces the “FIELD” label.

b) The center segment is the internal panel wiring and controls. c) The right segment information represents output or input signals to

downstream panels or the CCS. 5) Identify shield grounding location. 6) Identify surge protection devices for each signal. Include surge protection

for positive and negative leads. Utilize the surge protection block symbol from the legends and symbols sheet.

7) Identify the cable number, wire color and polarity for each cable in the loop.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in conformance with NEC. Mounting panels on handrails is not allowed.

B. Unless otherwise noted, install indoor free standing panels on 4-inch concrete pad. Extend pad 4-inches beyond outside dimensions of base, all sides. Lay grout after panel sills have been securely fastened down.

C. Unless otherwise noted, install outdoor free standing panels on a reinforced concrete pedestal:

1. Minimum Thickness: 8-inches with No. 4 steel reinforcing bars at 12-inches on centers, each way.

2. Minimum Size: 4-inches larger than outer dimensions of base, all sides. 3. Provide excavation and backfill work in conformance with Section 02315,

Structural Excavation and Backfill. 4. Provide concrete work in conformance with Section 03300, Cast-In-Place

Concrete.


26866 17260-31 1/24/2019

5. Seal the contact surface between the panel base and concrete surface with a gasket, gasket sealant and along the outside perimeter of the panel using RTV sealant.

6. Install anchor bolts and anchor in accordance with Section 05051, Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts.

D. Elevated Panels with floor stands: 1. When installing conduits through bottom, utilize bushings to retain the NEMA

rating of the panel.

E. Install each item in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3.5 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. Maintain a set of red-line panel drawings to reflect changes or deviations that occur during installation, start-up and commissioning and incorporates these deviations into the final Operation & Maintenance Manual.

3.6 SPARE PARTS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish and deliver the spare parts and test equipment as outlined below, identical and interchangeable with similar parts furnished under this Specification. Comply with the requirements of Section 01783, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.

B. Pack spare parts in containers suitable for long term storage, bearing labels clearly designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are intended.

C. The following constitutes the minimum spare parts: 1. Five of each type of control relay for each 40 or less furnished for this Contract. 2. One replacement power supply for each type and size furnished for this Contract. 3. One per ten (two, if fewer than twenty) of each type of panel mounted instrument

including lights and pushbuttons. 4. One dozen of each type and size of fuse used in panels and instruments.

D. The following constitutes the minimum test and calibration equipment: 1. All tooling required to insert, extract and connect any internal or external

connector, including edge connectors. 2. All special calibration equipment required for system calibration.

3.7 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS:

A. Perform system testing and make any adjustments necessary in accordance with this Section and Section 17001, Process Control System General Requirements.


26866 17260-32 1/24/2019

B. Perform power supply, voltage adjustments to tolerances required by the appurtenant equipment.

C. A Factory Acceptance Test shall be conducted before the panel is shipped to the site. The Factory Acceptance test shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER and OWNER. The Factory Acceptance Test Report listed in Specification Section 01331 – Reference Forms – Form 17260-A shall be utilized to document the test.

1. The following is a list of panels that require the Factory Acceptance Test to be witnessed by ENGINEER and OWNER:

a. LCP-PLC-LS76 b. LCP-PCP-LS76 2. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the

Drawings, specified and required to perform factory testing, before shipment, at the manufacturer's facility to verify that system components are functioning properly and that they meet the functional and performance requirements of the Contract Documents.

3. Submit information on factory testing procedures to verify that testing shall fulfill the requirements as specified herein. Submittal shall be made at least two months in advance of any scheduled testing and shall include dates of scheduled tests.

4. Notify ENGINEER, in writing, at least four weeks before expected initiation of tests. OWNER and ENGINEER may elect to be present at CONTRACTOR’S facilities during operational test of system equipment, either for individual units or as an integrated system. Presence of OWNER and ENGINEER during testing does not relieve CONTRACTOR from conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall in no way imply acceptance of the equipment.

D. System Hardware Operational Testing 1. All input/output devices and components shall be tested to verify operability and

basic calibration. 2. All system hardware components equipment shall be tested to verify proper

operation of the equipment as stand alone units. Test shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. AC/DC power checks. b. Power fail/restart tests. c. Diagnostics checks. d. Test demonstrating that all specified equipment functional capabilities are

working properly. e. All system components shall be tested to verify that communication between

units is working properly.


26866 17260-33 1/24/2019

3.8 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICE

A. Provide the services of qualified factory-trained service representative to check and approve the installation of the panel(s).

B. The factory trained service representative shall be provided for installation

supervision, start-up and testing services. The representative shall make a minimum of 5 visits to the site to approve the completed installation and to perform start-up testing of the equipment. The representative shall coordinate each visit with the ENGINEER prior to arrival on the site. The representative shall test operate the system in the presence of the ENGINEER and verify that the equipment conforms to requirements. The representative shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until the installation and testing is entirely satisfactory.

C. The factory trained service representative shall be provided for operation and

maintenance personnel training services. The representative shall make a minimum of 3 visits to the site to perform the services as described under Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. The representative shall coordinate each visit with the ENGINEER prior to arrival on the site.

D. For the factory trained service representative, all costs, including travel, lodging,

meals and incidentals, shall be considered as included in the bid price. E. Warranty: 1 Year from date of final acceptance.



26866 17262-1 12/18/2018

SECTION 17262

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER, SOFTWARE, AND PROGRAMMING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE

A. Contract documents illustrate and specify general requirements of the

Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC), Operator Interface Terminal (OIT), software, networking, and programs, and does not necessarily show or specify all components, wiring, and accessories required for a completely integrated system.

B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, documentation, furnish, install, calibrate,

test, start-up, program, configure, commission, and place into satisfactory operation of all PLCs, OITs, networking hardware, software, and programs.

C. Conform the design and programming of all PLCs, OITs, software, and programs

to the specifications herein. D. Provide all necessary tools, such as cabling, software, etc., as required to fulfill the

programming requirements of the contract documents. 1.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the installation of all items specified herein as required to ensure the

complete and proper functionality of all PLCs, OITs, software, programs, networking, and accessories.

B. Provide all PLCs, OITs, software, networking and programs to meet the functional requirements as detailed in Section 17051 – Computer Control System Process Control Descriptions and depicted on CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

C. Install and wire all Inputs/Outputs (I/O) as specified in Section 17260 – Control

Panels. D. Install PLCs or remote I/O in control panels with voltages of 120 VAC or less. E. Relinquish all usernames and passwords to the OWNER, this includes but is not

limited to all hardware, software, and programs. All usernames and passwords are property of the OWNER.

F. Provide separate 120 VAC receptacles in the control panel for PLC hardware with

120 VAC receptacle outlet plugs. Label each receptacle’s use, i.e. “For fiber Optic Converter Use Only”. Provide an isolating supplementary protector for each receptacle.


26866 17262-2 12/18/2018

G. Provide all PLC and OIT hardware and accessories with Heresite conformal coating, or equal protection, against hydrogen sulfide levels up to seven ppm. Verify all PLC and OIT model numbers are Heresite conformal coating model numbers.

1.3 DEFINTIONS

A. Distributed I/O: Hardware that has been specially designed to function as Remote I/O.

B. OIT: Operator Interface Terminal, sometimes referred to as Human-Machine

Interface (HMI). C. Peer-to-Peer: Communication between two or more devices, typically PLCs, in

which each device can control the communication exchange. D. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. E. Remote I/O: Remote I/O is any and all I/O that is located remotely from the

processor. Remote I/O can be over a variety of communication protocols and can use standard rack based I/O, or special Remote I/O hardware referred to as Distributed I/O.


A. Reference Standards: PLCs, OITs, networking hardware, software, programs, and accessories must

comply with applicable provisions of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). 2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineering (IEEE). 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards (NEMA). 5. Operational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations 6. State and local code requirements. 7. Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringent

requirement applies. 8. Provide all panel devices with the label of the Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL),

Inc. Document the UL/UR listed number on the Bill of Materials (BOM) on the control panel drawings.

9. National Fire Protection Agency (NPFA).


26866 17262-3 12/18/2018

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals:

1. The PLC submittal requirements are to be submitted with the control panel submittal package. Reference Section 17260 – Control Panels.

2. Provide the manufacturer’s technical data sheets, cut sheets, and product literature for all PLCs, OITs, networking hardware, software, programs, and accessories. Clearly identify exact equipment and materials that are being supplied on the manufacturer’s data sheets.

B. PLC Program Coordination Workshop:

1. Conduct a program software coordination workshop with the PLC PROGRAMMER, ENGINEER, and OWNER prior to shipment of the equipment. a. Workshop Agenda:

1) Review the control logic and function block programming styles. 2) Review the PLC I/O signal list. 3) Review the hardware configuration. 4) Review the network configuration. 5) Review CONTRACT DRAWINGS and Section 17051 – Process

Control Description. b. Attendees:

1) PROGRAMMER/CONTROL PANEL SUPPLIER 2) CONTRACTOR 3) OWNER 4) ENGINEER

2. Conduct a minimum of a 8 hour workshop on site, unless stated otherwise. This workshop is to ensure that the software code, OIT screens, hardware configurations, and addressing are compatible with the OWNER’S systems.

3. Provide 4 hard copies and 1 soft copy of all PLC programming with addressing, comments, and descriptions at a minimum of 2 weeks prior to the workshop.

4. Provide workshop meeting minutes and action items.

1.6 O&M MANUALS

A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01781 – Operations and Maintenance Data and the following: 1. Provide a hard copy of all PLC programs complete with comments and address

descriptions. 2. Provide a compact disc (CD) with a copy of all OIT screens and PLC programs

with complete annotated documentation and READ/WRITE access to the PLC programs. Relinquish all rights of the program to the OWNER.


26866 17262-4 12/18/2018

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS A. General:

1. Utilize M340 PLCs at the water and wastewater plants. Utilize M580 PLCs at SCADA and Lift Station remote sites because of the M580’s upgraded security properties, or if the following limitations occur. a. Large memory systems. b. Remote I/O. c. Hot Standby or Redundancy.

2. Provide PLCs with the following functionality: a. All operational, protective, status, and alarm functions as described per

Section 17051 – Process Control Description, 17260 – Control Panels and the CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

b. Perform process control functions, data collection, communicate with other PLCs, and distribute process information along the local area network (LAN).

c. Capable of stand-alone operation during any communication failure. d. Capable of downloading and uploading programs from a remote

workstation over the LAN and locally programmed from a portable laptop computer.

e. Field expandable to allow for the growth of the system by simple addition and configuration of hardware.

f. I/O modules are capable of insertion and removal under power. g. I/O modules can only be inserted one direction to prevent improper

installation of modules. h. Key all modules and connectors to safeguard against improper insertion of

a module into the backplane slot. i. Each component must include a clearly visible faceplate with appropriate

data such as the manufacturer’s model number and a brief description of the component’s functionality.

j. Provide all cables and connectors as specified by the manufacturer. Assemble and install cables per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

k. Provide configurable alarming capability. Each alarm point can be configured to display an alphanumeric message in the alarm buffer. The alarm buffer can be displayed from a web page, or an OIT.

3. PLC Module Fusing: a. Provide each analog and discrete I/O module with at least one properly sized

fuse per module voltage source. 4. Surge Protection: a. Provide DC surge protection for all analog signal loops that are terminated

to Programmable Logic Controllers. b. Provide a separate surge protector for the positive and a separate surge

protector for the negative. c. Purchase and mount surge protector as stated in Specification Section 17260

– Control Panels.


26866 17262-5 12/18/2018

5. Meet the following for PLCs utilizing Ethernet protocols: a. Protocols that are assigned to port 502 of the transmission control

protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP) stack by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA).

b. Devices must utilize embedded web pages, or a physical means such as DIP switches, to be recognized and properly addressed on the network. Ethernet protocols that require network management software, or utilize configuration files that must be downloaded to Ethernet devices, for proper network addressing, and recognition are not acceptable.

c. Provide an Ethernet networking connection either built into the central processing unit (CPU) or via an Ethernet networking module.

d. Provide all equipment from non-third party vendors to meet the above criteria.

6. Virtual private network (VPN) access is NOT granted for offsite configuration, programming, troubleshooting, testing, and/or support.

B. PLC Modules:

1. Modules: Provide the following modules as needed to meet the requirements of the

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: a. Analog Inputs Modules:

1) BMX ART 0414H 2) BMX ART 0814H 3) BMX AMI 0410H 4) BMX AMI 0810H

e. Discrete Inputs Modules: 1) BMX DAI 1604H

f. Discrete Outputs Modules: 1) BMX DRA 1605H

i. Fiber Converter 1) BMX NRP 0200 multi-mode 2) BMX NRP 0201 single-mode 2. The following types of terminals and wiring systems are permitted:

a. If removable I/O module terminal blocks are used for terminating wires to the module, provide screw clamp terminal blocks (BMX FTB 2000).

b. Provide pre-formed wiring cable as necessary, permitted all wires from the pre-formed cable are terminated to individual terminal blocks and are connected to field wiring.

c. Provide Advantys Telefast wiring in conjunction with screw type Adavantys Telefast ABE7 sub-bases as necessary.

C. M580 PLCs: 1. Provide one of the following Modicon M580 CPUs:

a. BME P5810 20H 2. Provide one of the following Modicon Ethernet Backplanes: a. BME XBP 0400H


26866 17262-6 12/18/2018

b. BME XBP 0600H c. BME XBP 0800H d. BME XBP 1200H 3. MODULES: The M580 and M340 use the same Modicon X80 I/O platform.

Refer to paragraph 2.1.B.1 for modules. 4. Redundancy:

a. Provide redundant capable processors without requiring a separate redundancy module.

b. Communicate via fiber optic cable or Ethernet cable attached directly to the processor for redundant communication between PLCs.

c. Provide the primary processor with the capability to automatically transfer its program to the standby processor upon replacement. Systems that require special programming software, physical media, or manually initiated method to load the program into the standby processor are not permitted.

d. Provide redundant capable processors with a coprocessor to handle communications between the primary and backup processor. Provide a coprocessor to allow communications to occur simultaneously to the program scan. 1) Controllers that stop program execution to perform communication

transfer are not permitted. 2) Primary to backup communications that limit processor program scan

times are not permitted. 3) Controllers that rely on scan time management techniques to minimize

scan time are not permitted. 4) Controllers that caution against scan dependent logic are not permitted. 5) Processors that require doubling tag count compared to a non-

redundant version are not permitted. e. Provide redundancy systems that require remote I/O to contain all inputs

and outputs to ensure proper transfer to the hot standby PLC. f. Provide redundancy systems that allow for outputs to transition from

primary to backup control without momentary lapse or bump. Provide bumpless outputs placed in main program. Processors whose bumpless integrity requires outputs to be placed in a single file or a file with a highest priority are not permitted.

g. Processors that have a delay or pause for cached or uncached messages are not permitted. Processors that allow messages to become inactive during switchover are not allowed.

h. Redundant controllers that stop backplane communication for diagnostic or switchover purposes are not permitted.

i. Provide primary and standby processors that automatically synchronize. Processors that require manual synchronization are not permitted. Processors that allow deactivation of automatic synchronization are not permitted.

j. Provide Ethernet communication to peer-to-peer devices including OITs and other PLCs for redundancy systems. Controllers that can have message


26866 17262-7 12/18/2018

communications outages over Ethernet are not permitted.

D. Chassis I/O Sizing: 1. General:

a. Size the PLC chassis to handle the required I/O plus all spare I/O. When calculating spare I/O points, all fractional I/O points must be rounded up to the next whole I/O point. Provide the PLC chassis to be capable of handling all required and future like I/O modules. Group similar module types together.

b. Stored according to Section 01661 – Storage of Materials and Equipment, all unpopulated I/O modules.

2. Use the following criteria when calculating the spare I/O: a. Analog Inputs (AI): 20% spare AI required. b. Discrete Inputs (DI): 20% spare DI required. c. Discrete Outputs (DO): 20% spare DO required.

E. Chassis Layout: 1. General Chassis Layout:

a. If the power supply is not integrated into the chassis, install the power supply in the first slot (Slot 0).

b. Install the CPU to the right of the power supply in slot 1. c. Install the Network Over Ethernet (NOE) module for networking, to the

right of the CPU. d. Install any specialty modules if applicable, to the right of the NOE module. e. Install all DI modules to the right of any specialty modules. If there are no

specialty modules install all DI modules to the right of the NOE module. f. Install all DO modules to the right of the DI modules. g. Install all the AI modules to the right of the blank module or DO modules. h. Install all the AO modules to the right of the AI modules.

1). If the analog and discrete modules use different voltage signals then install a blank module or leave an empty slot between the analog and discrete modules.

2. I/O types associated with a device (i.e. pump or blower): a. Place on the same input module all inputs of the same I/O type. b. Place on the same output module all outputs of the I/O type.

3. Remote I/O for Excess I/O or Redundancy: a. If a PLC’s local I/O modules exceed their capacity of the local backplane,

connect excess I/O to remote I/O. Place all I/O in remote I/O racks for redundant configured PLCs.

b. Connect remote I/O to the PLC through a remote I/O module with a minimum data transfer rate of 1.5 Mbaud to all remote I/O racks. Provide all PLCs with the capability of supporting up to 31 remote I/O drops.

F. Wiring:

1. In addition to Section 17260 – Control Panels requirements, ensure all thermocouples and resistive temperature devices (RTD) are wired directly to


26866 17262-8 12/18/2018

the PLC. 2. Pre-formed wiring and Advantys Telefast harnesses are permitted. 3. Wiring spare I/O is not permitted, unless Advantys Telefast wiring and

Adavantys Telefast ABE7 sub-bases are used. G. PLC Environmental Requirements:

1. All PLCs must meet or exceed the following environmental requirements: a. Minimum temperature range:

1) Operating: 0-55o C (+32 to +131o F) 2) Storage: -23 to +70 o C (-13 to +158 o F) b. Relative humidity: 30 to 95% non-condensing c. Altitude: 1) Operation: 0-6,500 feet minimum

2) Storage: 0-9,800 feet minimum d. Degree of protection: NEMA 1(IP20) e. Vibration resistance in accordance with at least one of the following

installed rating: 1) DIN rail mounted PLC: 10-57 Hz, amplitude 0.075 mm, acceleration

25-100 Hz. 2) Panel or plate mounted PLC: 2-25 Hz, amplitude 1.6mm, acceleration

25-200 Hz. 3) In compliance with IEC 60068 and IEC 61131.

f. Shock resistance: 147m/s2 for 11ms. 2. Environmental Limitations:

a. Equipment should be rated for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating

H. Overall PLC System Protection: 1. Provide the PLC CPU with the capacity to read the inputs, perform any system

logic, conduct on-line diagnostics, and control the outputs. Diagnostics includes memory checks, communication motoring, I/O bus monitoring, watchdog timing, and user program validation. Provide diagnostic information accessibility from the program, programming software, or remotely from the OIT.

2. Provide the PLC CPU with the capacity of monitoring the health and status of every module in both the local and remote I/O backplanes. Show an active or inactive state for each single bit on each module. Provide information accessibility from the program, programming software, or remotely from the OIT.

3. Provide the PLC CPU with light emitting diodes or liquid crystal displays to indicate the health and status of the CPU for the following conditions:

a. Ready Status b. Run Status c. Serial Port Activity d. Local Area Network Status 4. Store the program in either random access memory (RAM) or flash memory.


26866 17262-9 12/18/2018

Store all data registers in RAM. 5. Provide the ability to permit data values and program changes while the PLC is

operating, without interrupting the overall system process. 6. All PLCs shall be backed by an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) or

“battery backup”. A UPS shall provide emergency power between the time utility power is lost and the backup generator begins to provide power. Phoenix contact shall be the manufacture of all UPS systems. Uninterruptible power supply with IQ technology for DIN rail mounting, input: 24 V DC, output: 24 V DC/5 A, including mounted universal DIN rail adapter UTA 107/30. UPS systems shall power PLC equipment, communication modules and switches, and all instruments power supplies at full load. UPS systems shall provide status bits to the PLC. These status bits shall indicate if the UPS has faulted and when battery backup power is being used.

I. Communication Services:

1. Provide the PLC with the following capabilities: a. Modbus TCP Messaging: Provide the web services utilizing Modbus TCP

messaging over port 502 of the TCP packet. Protocols reliant on User Datagram Protocol (UDP) are not acceptable.

b. I/O Scanning Service: Provide I/O scanning to allow the PLC to control I/O scanning capable I/O located remotely from the main panel.

c. Faulty Device Replacement (FDR): Act as a faulty device replacement client/server enabling the automatic download of IP address and configuration to FDR client devices.

d. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP): Manage the different components through a SNMP connection to monitor network, and device integrity.

e. Global Data: Global data service to ensure real time communication between stations in the same distribution group while minimizing network loading. Provide global data services utilizing Real-Time Publisher Subscriber producer consumer based protocol.

f. Network Time Protocol (NTP) synchronization service: Capable of synchronizing from its internal clock from a reference clock on a NTP server allowing for time stamping internal events.

g. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP): Capable of SMTP email transmission service.

h. Bandwidth Monitoring Service: Capable of monitoring the bandwidth to determine load level.

2.2 PLC SOFTWARE:

A. Acceptable PLC Programming Software Tools: 1. Develop all PLC programming applications utilizing the 12.0 version of Unity

Pro XL.


26866 17262-10 12/18/2018

2.3 PLC PROGRAMMING:

A. General PLC Programs: 1. Develop all PLC programming utilizing function block programming. 2. Generated code for PLCs is the property of the OWNER. 3. All control loops are to function as described in Section 17051 – Computer

Control System Process Control Descriptions, and as depicted on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

4. Enable Unity Pro’s grid view feature. Develop the function block applications in a workspace that is 70 columns across by 1230 rows down. Provide the function block workspace with the capability to be printed on standard 8.5 x 11paper.

5. Provide straight lines that are adequately spaced apart with 90 degree turns as necessary for connecting signal wires to function blocks. Limit unnecessary turns or extremely long signal wire runs. Minimize the crossing over, intersecting, and overlapping of all signal wires.

6. Provide a “top down” approach when writing the program functionality. Provide a logical order from the first step of the sequence or process to the last.

B. User Defined Function Blocks (DFB):

1. Develop the programming software to allow the PLC to automatically manage calls and execution to insure proper code execution.

2. Embedded DFBs are prohibited. 3. Provide an internal database using unmapped variables. The variables

associated with this block must be separate from the PLC database to prevent mapping conflicts.

4. Provide each block as a single instruction in the programming environment. Designate pin assignments and names for all inputs and outputs. All inputs and outputs required for DFB logic must pass through a pin attached to that DFB. Utilize these pins to connect to the PLC database. DFB’s that use serial communications to communicate to non-PLC devices (i.e. a generator) reference this serial communication internally in the DFB without pins.

5. Provide documentation which clearly explains the purpose, function and operation of all DFB’s to the OWNER.

6. Provide the OWNER access to modify, copy, edit, delete, and add to all DFB logic.

7. Provide mapping of all I/O (mapped addresses) referenced through the program to unmapped addresses. Provide unmapped addresses for programming logic.

C. PLC and I/O health status:

1. Provide a programming section that monitors the status of the processor and attached I/O modules.

2. All PLC’s, OIT’s, and HMI’s require a heartbeat and handshake to provide a communication check.

D. Program Algorithms:


26866 17262-11 12/18/2018

1. Provide algorithms for various operations including some of the following: a. Summing several variables, raising to a power, roots, dividing,

multiplying, and subtracting. b. A 3-mode Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) function block which

can adjust all three modes independently. c. Lead, lag, dead time, and ratio compensators. d. Process totalization.

2. Provide algorithms with the capability of outputting positional or incremental control outputs.

3. Provide algorithms with alarm checks when appropriate. E. Naming Convention for Programming Sections: Provide each programming section with a short descriptive name, including an

underscore as a space between words and using mixed case. 1. The following names are acceptable:

a. CfgAnalog b. Filter_Backwash

2. The following names are NOT acceptable: a. FILTERBACKWASH (all caps) b. SectionOne (not descriptive)

F. Programming Sections: Provide programming sections for PLCs that contain high level logic. Group similar

programming function blocks into the same programming section. Multiple sections of the same type are permitted (i.e. a program may have two DI-Mapping sections; DI_Mapping01, DI_Mapping02). The following is a list of major programming sections that are used and the order in which they are to be executed in. 1. PLC Status 2. Communication 3. DI Mapping 4. AI Mapping/Scaling 5. Alarms 6. Process Control Sections 7. Valve Control Sections 8. Motor Control Section 9. Flow Totalization Section 10. DO Mapping 11. AO Mapping/Scaling

G. Program Addressing: Utilize the following standards for all programming addressing.

1. Addressing Scheme

Variable Type Group Description Data Type Address Range


26866 17262-12 12/18/2018

Discrete Inputs / Reads Physical DI’s T_DIS_IN_GEN %CH… Module Status T_GEN_MOD %CH…MOD From RTU/Field Device/CCS EBOOL %M001 - %M199 From OIT EBOOL %M800 - %M999 Discrete Outputs / Writes Physical DO’s T_DIS_OUT_GEN %CH… Module Status T_GEN_MOD %CH…MOD

PLC Hardware & Process Alarms EBOOL %M200 - %M399

To RTU/Field Device/CCS EBOOL %M400 - %M799 To OIT EBOOL %M1000 - %M1199 PLC Internal EBOOL %M1200 - %M1999 Other EBOOL %M2000 - %M… Analog Inputs / Reads Physical AI’s T_ANA_IN_BMX %CH Module Status T_GEN_MOD %CH…MOD From RTU/Field Device/CCS WORD %MW001 - %MW199 From OIT INT/UINT/DINT/UDINT %MW1000 - %MW1199 From OIT REAL/OTHER %MW1200 - %MW1399 Analog Outputs / Writes Physical AO’s T_ANA_OUT_BMX %CH Module Status T_GEN_MOD %CH…MOD To RTU/Field Device/CCS REAL/WORD %MW200 - %MW999 PLC Internal Any %MW1400 - %MW1999 To OIT INT/UINT/DINT/UDINT %MW2000 - %MW2199 To OIT REAL/OTHER %MW2200 - %MW2399

Array Move to %MW Example Reading Registers from Instrumentation or Power Monitoring then Moving to %MW Any %MW2400 - %MW…

2. Conform unusual addressing conflicts to the current addressing standard.

Submit any unusual addressing conflicts that cannot be resolved to the ENGINEER prior utilization of the address.

H. Analog Scaling; Scale all hardware analog inputs and outputs to be used internally in the PLC to

engineering units (EU). All analog data to be passed to/from the Computer Control System (CCS) shall be passed in the proper data type to maintain the EU without scaling or conversion.

I. Variable/Tag Names: Derive all input and output names from the tag number assigned on the

CONTRACT DRAWINGS. Internal variable names are mixed case. Physical inputs and outputs are upper case. Use underscores instead of dashes to separate


26866 17262-13 12/18/2018

portions of the variable names. J. Commenting: Provide comments with the function blocks and sections as needed to clarify the

intent of the logic. Comments and names are required for each input or output pin of a user Defined DFB.

2.4 OIT SCREENS

A. Provide one of the following Magelis OITs to meet the requirements of the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Model numbers do NOT include conformal coating the CONTRACTOR must add this option from the manufacture. 1. HMI GTO1310 2. HMI GTO2310 3. HMI GTO3510 4. HMI GTO4310 5. HMI GTO5310 6. HMI GTO6310 7. HMI GTO2315 8. HMI GTO5315 9. HMI GTO6315

B. Provide a Compact Flash card for uploading and retrieval of historical data logging

from the Magelis OIT. 1. Manufacturer and Part Number: a) Modicon, 1GB MPCYN00CF100N C. Panels Installed Outdoors: Mount OIT’s on the inside of the inner cabinet door of

the control panel. D. Animate instruments or devices utilizing a color scheme to indicate its current

status. The color red indicates “on”, “running”, or “open” and green indicates “off” or “closed”. Provide text with every color indicating the status the color (i.e. if a button is red then text should overlay the button saying “On”, “Running”, or “Open”).

E. Coordinate OIT screens to resemble existing screens that are in operation with the

OWNER, this includes event logging, alarming, trending, fonts, colors, and graphical buttons.

F. Provide a process flow diagram screen with graphics or text as described in the

control description. Tabular data is to be reviewed and approved by the OWNER prior to development.

G. Utilize the exported database from the corresponding Unity Pro processor for the

tag database.


26866 17262-14 12/18/2018

2.5 NETWORKING

A. General:

1. Refer to the network drawing as shown on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS. 2. Provide simplex power receptacles for network devices in a cabinet that

requires a power source.

B. Serial (RS-232, RS-422, and RS-485): 1. Provide all serial connections as stated per CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

2. Install in the control panel, all necessary cables and hardware that use serial network topology (i.e. media converters, protocol converters, and properly terminated cabling).

C. Ethernet: 1. Provide all Ethernet connections as stated per CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

2. Install in the control panel all necessary cables and hardware that use Ethernet devices.

3. Provide a DIN rail mounted Cisco Managed Ethernet switch in control panels that have multiple Ethernet devices.

4. All Ethernet switches are to be managed switches. 5. Provide protocol and media converters as needed.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION:

A. Inspect areas, surfaces, and substrates that enclose PLCs for compliance requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance. Adhere to compliance or tolerance requirements of the manufacturer.

3.2 APPLICATIONS:

A. Primary selection of PLCs is based upon OWNER preference followed by I/O, memory, communication, expansion, and other criteria. If multiple PLC panels from different vendors will be supplied, coordinate with other vendors to insure that PLCs are of similar type and are equipped to utilize identical communication networks.

3.3 INSTALLATION:

A. Anchor PLCs within enclosures as recommended by the PLC manufacturer. B. Provide spacing around PLC as required by the PLC manufacturer to insure

adequate cooling. Insure that the air surrounding and penetrating the PLC has been


26866 17262-15 12/18/2018

conditioned to maintain the required temperature and humidity range of the PLC. C. Size wires entering and exiting all PLC components and modules to comply with

the PLC manufacturers requirements. D. Blocking or obstructing ventilation slots by any means is not permitted. E. Install all wiring, wire ducts, or other devices without obstructing the removal of

modules from the backplane. F. Provide accessibility and visibility to all PLC status lights, communication ports,

and memory card slots when enclosure door is open. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION:

A. Identify PLC components and wiring according to all applicable codes, standards, and contract document sections.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Field Service: Provide a qualified service representative/programmer to perform the following:

1. Inspect PLCs, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. 2. Assist in field testing of equipment. Test and adjust PLCs and associated

programs if necessary.

3.6 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. Maintain a set of red-line panel drawings and CONTRACT DRAWINGS to reflect changes or deviations that occur during installation, start-up, and commissioning. Incorporate these deviations into the final Operation & Maintenance manual.

B. Provide record drawings in accordance with Section 01782 – Record Documents.

3.7 SPARE PARTS:

A. Furnish and deliver spare parts and test equipment as outlined in Section 01783 –

Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. B. Pack spare parts in containers bearing labels clearly designating the contents and

for which pieces of equipment they are intended for. Store PLCs according to manufacturer’s requirements. Minimum storage requires include storage indoors in a clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect


26866 17262-16 12/18/2018

PLCs from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Additionally, protect PLCs from all forms of electrical and magnetic energy that could reasonably cause damage.

C. The following constitutes the minimum spare parts:

1. I/O modules: Provide a minimum of one spare of each type of card identified. 2. Processors: Provide a minimum of one spare for each type of CPU identified. 3. PLC oriented power supplies: Provide a minimum of one spare of each type of

power supply identified. Provide an additional spare for each type of power supply identified.

4. Memory Cards: a. Memory cards: If an SD memory card is installed then provide a minimum

of one spare memory card. b. Expandable flash memory cards: If a memory extension card is installed to

expand the internal memory of a processor then provide the backup processor with a memory extension card to ensure proper memory size of the backup processor.

5. Specialty Modules: Provide a minimum of one spare of each type of module identified.

6. Backplane: Provide a minimum of one spare backplanes.

3.8 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENTS: A. Perform system testing and make any adjustments necessary in accordance with

this section and Section 17001 – Process Control System General Requirements. B. Install and test all project generated programming code prior to performing the

Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) and Site Acceptance Test (SAT) as stated in Section 17260 – Control Panels.

3.9 SOFTWARE DEVELOPER’S SERVICE:

A. Provide a qualified software PROGRAMMER representative to check and approve

the installation of all PLCs and components. B. Provide a qualified representative for installation supervision, start-up, and testing

services. Conduct a minimum of 3 trips to the site to approve the completed installation and to perform start-up testing of the equipment. Coordinate each visit with the ENGINEER prior to arrival on the site. Test the operation of the system in the presence of the ENGINEER and verify that the equipment conforms to the Site Acceptance Test (SAT) document. Revisit the job site as often as necessary until the installation and testing has been signed off by the OWNER or ENGINEER.

C. Provide a qualified software PROGRAMMER representative for operation and

maintenance personnel training. Conduct a minimum of 3 trips to the site to perform


26866 17262-17 12/18/2018

the services as described under Section 01821 – Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. Coordinate each visit with the ENGINEER prior to arrival on the site.

D. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals, and incidentals for the CONTRACTOR

and PROGRAMMER, are considered included in the CONTRACT price. E. Warranty: 1 year from the date of final acceptance.



26866 18005-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 18005

INTEGRATED SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish, install, calibrate, test, start-up, commission and place in satisfactory operation a complete Security System. The Security System shall be as specified in Division 18, Integrated Security Management System Sections, and as shown on the Drawings. The system includes, but is not limited to the following major equipment: 1. Integrated Security Management System 2. Access Control System (ACS). 3. Digital Video Management System (DVMS). 4. Closed Circuit Television System (CCTV). 5. Intrusion Detection System (IDS). 6. Local Area Network (LAN) with Network Management System.

B. The Security System shall be a fully functional security system with access control,

intrusion detection, CCTV, and DVMS processes integrated into a common monitoring and control platform capable of being controlled from any workstation on the facilities’ LAN and/or any off site workstation on the enterprise-wide security system WAN. The processes, which the Security System shall monitor, and control are described in the Division 18, Integrated Security Management System Sections of the Project Specifications.

C. The ACS vendor shall be an authorized distributor of the Andover Continuum™

product line. D. The DVMS vendor shall be an authorized distributor of the PureActiv™ system

product line.

E. A System Integrator that is a trained and certified installer of the Andover Continuum™ and PureActiv™ product lines shall be obtained to provide the following services: 1. System Integrator shall install and configure all Security Systems hardware and

software, with the exception of door locks and door hardware. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for proper materials, installation, grounding, integration, configuration, testing, and performance calibrations of


26866 18005-2 1/24/2019

all new and existing hardware and software components of the Security System, including but not limited to: a) Door, window, and hatch locks, hardware, and contact switches. b) Card access readers and keypads. c) Glass break and motion detectors. d) Photoelectric beam (light beam) detectors (transmitters, receivers, and

tamper switches). e) Fence IDS processor modules, termination and link units. f) CCTV cameras, lenses, pan/tilt units, housings and lightening

protection. g) CCTV video and data fiber optic transceivers (transmitters and

receivers). h) DVMS data acquisition units, primary server, and backup server. i) Network switches and media converters. j) Card reader pedestal configurations. k) Gate operators, UPS power supply, and controller security system

enclosure. l) ACS site and net controllers, I/O and access control modules, and UPS

power supply modules. m) On-site ACS back-up software. n) IR lighting fixtures. o) Back-up power operation for all Security System components. p) Security equipment panel and enclosure components.


A. General: 1. The System Integrator shall identify those system components, which they are

not to install or configure. 2. The System Integrator shall supply its company’s Quality Assurance Plan. The

plans shall include, but not necessarily be limited to: method of testing, raw material criteria, methods of documentation, station control, “Burn-In”, final tests and serialization coding and packaging.

B. Security System Integrator’s Qualifications:

1. Be a financially sound firm having at least five years continuous experience in designing, implementing, supplying and supporting instrumentation and control systems, which are comparable to the Security System in terms of hardware, software, cost and complexity.

2. Have supported standard lines of digital processing and control equipment and application software continuously for the last five years.

3. Have in existence at the time of bid advertisement, an experienced engineering and technical staff capable of implementing, supplying and supporting the Security System and handling the Security System submittals and training requirements.


26866 18005-3 1/24/2019

4. Have a minimum of two years experience in hardware application and programming of computer control systems and Ethernet based networks.

5. Have a thorough working knowledge of security system processes and control philosophy in accordance with standard practices of the security industry.

6. Have a system of traceability of the manufactured units and purchased components through production, assembly and testing.

7. Have a system of “Burn-In” for all components and available supportive documentation.

8. Have a demonstrated record of prompt response to field failures. 9. Have a documented program of failure analysis. 10. Have a record of prompt shipments in accordance with contract obligations

required for previous projects. 11. Shall have a warranty covering parts, spare parts and labor and in the case of

microprocessor-based equipment and its appurtenances, a guaranteed availability clause.

C. Technical Proposal Requirements: The successful, responsive, responsible Bidder

shall submit to OWNER a copy of a Technical Proposal from the System Integrator that has selected to provide the Security System. The Technical Proposal shall be submitted 21 days after the Notice to Proceed. The Technical Proposal shall be complete and contain all information as specified below. 1. Financial Statement: Include the value of security systems delivered during the

last two fiscal years. Also, include the value of other security systems currently being installed during the period.

2. Experience: a. Provide evidence of compliance with the specific experience requirements

listed in Paragraph 1.2.B., above, in the form of an experience certification signed by an officer of the company.

b. Describe at least three completed municipal projects utilizing security system equipment identical to or similar to (indicate which) that specified. Indicate owner, value, completion date, names and phone numbers of owner’s representatives familiar with each project. Letters of recommendation may be submitted.

c. Furnish list of last ten projects completed. 3. Personnel: Provide a listing of those personnel committed to be assigned to the

Project. List shall include Project Manager, Project Engineer, Field Representative, and local service representative. Indicate addresses of personnel not based at Security System Integrator’s main office. Provide documentation including resumes of personnel demonstrating experience in Security Systems installation and integration.

4. Exceptions: List all exceptions and deviations from the requirements of the Specifications. Reference Section Number, Article, and Paragraph of proposed variance and provide an explanation of why the proposed substitution meets (or exceeds) the functional or equipment requirements specified.


26866 18005-4 1/24/2019

5. Shipment Records: Provide evidence of timely delivery of equipment on past projects.

6. Integrated Security Management System Hardware: a. Provide descriptive literature and catalog information covering the features

and capabilities of all proposed hardware components. b. Describe standard software packages proposed, including any customized

software required to meet the functional intent of the system Specifications. 7. Instrumentation and Panel Mounted Devices: Provide descriptive literature and

catalog cuts for each type of sensor, transmitter, indicator, and other such devices required by the project.

8. Training: Provide information and literature as to the organization proposed and the factory facilities to be utilized for the training specified. Indicate the qualifications of the factory training staff.

9. Start-Up and Field Testing: Indicate how the Availability Demonstration will be accomplished.

10. Maintenance: Provide the following information: a. Location of service facility along with minimum and maximum response

time. b. Location of parts facility with delivery time and method.

D. Operating Experience or Bonding Alternative:

1. The facilities outlined in the Contract Documents, included herein, have been designed to meet stringent quality standards. OWNER and ENGINEER have selected and designed a Security System to provide effective security monitoring and control for the facilities required to meet these stringent quality criteria limitations. The criteria for selection of these systems includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. The use of standard, "non-custom" equipment and application software. b. The ability of OWNER’S personnel to make modifications and adjustments

in the field to react to actual field conditions. c. The ability of OWNER to obtain training of OWNER’S personnel in well

established equipment manufacturer training programs. d. The availability of factory service and a well stocked spare parts inventory,

which could be drawn upon by OWNER in emergency situations. e. The ability of OWNER to obtain all software drivers and custom software

needed to integrate the security system components for use on other OWNER projects at no additional cost for the software and driver development.

f. The ability of OWNER to obtain all security systems software and driver licenses needed to add additional system components of identical make and model within the water treatment plant campus at no additional cost on future security system upgrade projects.

2. The requirements listed in Paragraph 1.2.B., above, include specific experience

requirements. Should a Security System Integrator lack the required five years


26866 18005-5 1/24/2019

experience, it will have the option of posting a performance bond in the amount of 100 percent of the system equipment price. This bond shall cover a period of time that a Security System Integrator is deficient from the five-year experience requirement. For example, if a Security System Integrator has only two years experience, the Security System Integrator must post along with an experience certification signed by an officer of the company, a bond in the amount of 100 percent of the system equipment price for a period of three years following acceptance of the system by OWNER. The purpose of this bond shall be to indemnify OWNER against all losses incurred by reason of the failure of any system or equipment in any aspect of the quality standards required or intended by these Specifications. OWNER considers losses to include costs incurred to remove a defective system, modify structures as required, purchase and install replacement systems and costs involved with correcting, to OWNER’S satisfaction, all system and equipment deficiencies to the quality standards required and intended by these Specifications. The premium cost of this bond shall be included in the price bid for this equipment. The bond shall be in addition to any other bonds specified in the Contract Documents. All Security System Integrator lacking the total five years operating experience shall submit, as part of the specified Technical Proposal submittal, a copy of the bond from an acceptable surety along with a letter from the surety stating that it will issue the bond for the full value of the equipment price.

E. Security System Integrator’s Responsibility:

1. Retain the Security System Integrator to undertake the responsibilities specified below. However, execution of these specified duties by the Security System Integrator shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of the ultimate responsibility for the Security System. a. Design, fabrication and implementation of the Security System and all

subsystems in accordance with the Contract Documents and all referenced standards and codes.

b. Preparation, assembly and correction of all Security System submittals in accordance with the Contract Documents.

c. Proper interfacing of ACS hardware, software, field devices and panels, including required interfacing with packaged control systems furnished by other equipment suppliers, and with the plant electrical system.

d. Supervision of the installation of Security System, devices, panels, consoles, cabinets, wiring and other components required.

e. Installation, configuration, integration, calibration, testing, start-up and commissioning of the Security System.

f. Training of OWNER’S personnel in operation and maintenance of the Integrated Security Management System.

g. Handling of all warranty obligations for the Security System components.

F. Reference Standards:


26866 18005-6 1/24/2019

1. The following organizations have generated standards that are to be used as guides in assuring quality and reliability of components and systems; govern nomenclature; define parameters of configuration and construction, in addition to specific details in the Contract Documents: a. ISA, The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society. b. API, American Petroleum Institute. c. UL, Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. d. AWWA, American Water Works Association. e. NRC, Nuclear Regulatory Commission. f. NEMA, National Electrical Manufacturers Association. g. OSHA, Occupational Safety and Health Administration. h. ANSI, American National Standards Institute. i. MIL, Military Standards. j. NFPA, National Fire Protection Association. k. SAMA, Scientific Apparatus Manufacturers Association. l. NFPA, National Fire Protection Association 79, Annex “D” Standards. m. IEEE, Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. n. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. o. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code. p. FM, Factory Mutual. q. City of Phoenix Water Services Department Security Guidelines and

Standards. 1.3 COORDINATION AND PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Responsibility for the scheduling and coordinating the system installation with regard to all other Work on the site and in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions, belong to CONTRACTOR. Said coordination shall be documented on the Project Schedule.

B. Routine progress and coordination meetings will be scheduled by ENGINEER.

CONTRACTOR and a representative of the Security System Integrator shall be required to attend one meeting each month.

C. The purpose of the meetings shall be to review the progress of the Work involving

the Security System and provide coordination for installation of the equipment to ensure that the Project Schedule is met.

D. Representatives at the meetings shall have the competence and authority to make any

and all necessary decisions. Decisions and statements made at the meetings shall commit CONTRACTOR and Security System Integrator to agreed procedures and schedules.


26866 18005-7 1/24/2019

1.4 SECURITY SYSTEM INTEGRATOR PROJECT PERSONNEL

A. Require the Security System Integrator to provide the following project personnel: 1. Project Manager:

a. The Security System Integrator shall appoint a Project Manager who shall coordinate and schedule all Work and assure that the Project Schedule is met.

b. The Project Manager shall act as the liaison with CONTRACTOR for the installation of the Security System equipment and shall assist in all matters required for proper coordination and interfacing of the equipment and processes.

2. On-Site Project Engineer: a. Security System Integrator to appoint a full-time, on-site Project Engineer

to remain during the period from the Security System Integrator’s installation through Final Completion of the Work.

b. Project Engineer to ensure Security Systems installation remains on schedule and to communicate to the Project Manager where potential problems may arise.

c. Project Engineer shall assist the Field Engineer with testing and to ensure existing plant processes are not interrupted during testing.

3. Field Engineer: a. The Security System Integrator shall appoint a Field Engineer with respon-

sibilities as follows: 1) Provide advice and technical consultation relative to installation

techniques and procedures for equipment furnished. 2) Installed system checkout, calibration, adjustment, start-up and

commissioning. 3) Maintenance services during availability demonstration. 4) Involvement in the on-site system training of plant personnel. 5) Resolving of Security Systems integration, configuration, and

calibration problems encountered during initial start-up, testing, and commissioning of all Security System equipment.

b. The Field Engineer shall have a minimum of five years experience in systems engineering and start-up and shall have a thorough working knowledge of both the hardware and software supplied for the Security System.

4. Training Personnel: a. Comply with requirements of Section 18008, Integrated Security

Management System Training, and Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. General:


26866 18005-8 1/24/2019

a. Shop Drawing submittals are to be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

b. Shop Drawing preparation shall not commence until after the Pre-Submittal Meeting specified below.

c. Security System Integrator shall not commence until related submittals have been approved by ENGINEER.

d. Shop Drawings shall be submitted in complete packages grouped to permit review of related items as generally outlined in Paragraph 1.5.A.3., below.

e. Review of Shop Drawings will be for conformance with Contract Documents and with regard to functions specified to be provided.

2. Submittal Requirements: a. Product information for all Security System components, devices,

equipment, and contact closures. Include the following: 1) Manufacturer’s product name and complete model number. 2) Equipment tag and circuit number from Contract Documents. 3) Manufacturer’s data sheets and catalog literature. 4) Description of construction features. 5) Performance and operation data. 6) Installation and mounting details, instructions and recommendations. 7) Service requirements. 8) Dimensions. 9) List of recommended spare parts.

b. Enclosures and Cabinets Information: 1) Layout Drawings, include the following:

a) Front, rear, and internal panel views to scale. b) Dimensional information. c) Tag number and functional name of components mounted in and

on enclosures or cabinet. d) Product information on all panel components. e) Nameplate location and legend including text, letter size and

colors to be used. f) Location of anchoring connections and holes. g) Location of external wiring and/or piping connections. h) Mounting and installation details. i) Calculations for cooling.

2) Wiring diagrams, include the following: a) Name of enclosure or cabinet. b) Wiring sizes and types. c) Wire Management sizes and types. d) Terminal strip numbers. e) Color coding. f) Functional name and manufacturer’s designation for components

to which wiring is connected. 3) Electrical schematics in accordance with NFPA 79 Standards. 4) Plan showing equipment layout in each area.


26866 18005-9 1/24/2019

5). Network diagrams with all proposed IP addresses and proposed QOS and VLAN Configuration.

B. System Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Furnish Operations and Maintenance Manuals for the Security System in accordance with Section 01781, Operation and Maintenance Data, and the supplemental requirements below. Operation and Maintenance Data for the Security Systems shall be submitted to the Water Services Department, Security Management Unit representative.

2. The Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall include the following: a. Name, address and telephone number of the Security System Integrator

local service representative. b. Complete list of supplied system hardware parts with full model numbers

referred to system part designations, including spare parts and test equipment provided.

c. Copy of all approved submittal information and system Shop Drawings as specified herein with corrections made to reflect actual system as tested and delivered to the site for installation. Half-size black line reproductions shall be provided for all Shop Drawings larger than 11 by 17-inches.

d. Manufacturer’s original copies of hardware, software, installation, assembly and operations manuals for Security System components and peripheral devices. Manuals shall include the following information: 1) General descriptive information covering the basic features of the

equipment. 2) Physical description covering layout and installation requirements and

all environmental constraints. 3) Functional and operational descriptions covering the procedures for

start-up, shutdown, and calibration of Security System equipment and explaining how the various functions are performed.

4) Principles of operation explaining the logic of operation; provide information covering operation to a component level.

5) Maintenance procedures covering checkout, troubleshooting, and servicing; checkout procedures shall provide the means to verify the satisfactory operation of equipment, troubleshooting procedures shall serve as a guide in determining faulty components and servicing procedure shall cover requirements and recommended time schedule for calibration, cleaning, lubrication and other housekeeping and preventive maintenance procedures.

6) As-built wiring, schematic and logic diagrams. 7) Safety considerations relating to operation and maintenance

procedures.

C. Record Drawings and Documentation: 1. CONTRACTOR and Security System Integrator revise all system Shop

Drawings, submittals and software documentation to reflect as-built conditions


26866 18005-10 1/24/2019

in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and the supplemental requirements below.

2. Five copies of all revised Shop Drawings and documentation shall be submitted to the ENGINEER to replace out-dated drawings and documentation contained in the System Operations and Maintenance Manuals. Half-size black line sets shall be provided for all drawings larger than 11 by 17-inches. Specific instructions for out-dated drawing removal and replacement shall be provided with the Record Drawing submittal.

3. Half-size black line prints of wiring diagrams applicable to each enclosure shall be placed inside a clear plastic envelope and stored in a suitable print pocket or container inside each enclosure. Wiring diagrams shall be provided in AutoCAD .dwg format, version 2004.

D. Reports:

1. Two copies of the following reports shall be submitted to ENGINEER and OWNER: a. Installation Inspection, Field Calibration, and Field Testing Reports as

specified in Section 18007, Integrated Security Management System Start-Up, Commissioning and Field Testing.

1.6 EQUIPMENT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Make all arrangements for transportation, delivery and storage of the equipment and materials in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, requirements of the Security System Integrator, and requirements of equipment manufacturers.

B. Security System equipment shall be packaged at the factory prior to shipment to

protect each item from damage during shipment and storage. Containers shall be protected against impact, abrasion, corrosion, discoloration or other damages. Clearly label contents of each container and provide information on the required storage conditions necessary for the equipment. Keep OWNER and ENGINEER informed of equipment delivery.

C. All equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions and relevant organization standards. Equipment shall be protected from weather, moisture and other conditions that could cause damage. Items that require a controlled environment for storage such as panels and microprocessor units shall be stored in a climate controlled warehouse or facility. Security System Integrator shall notify CONTRACTOR, in writing, with copies to OWNER and ENGINEER of the storage requirements and recommendations for the equipment prior to shipment.


26866 18005-11 1/24/2019

1.7 GENERAL INTEGRATED SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

REQUIREMENTS

A. Power Supplies: 1. All electrically powered equipment and devices shall be suitable for operation

on 115-volt, ± 10 percent, 60 Hz ± 2 Hz. If a different voltage or closer regulation is required, a suitable regulator or transformer shall be provided.

2. Appropriate power supplies shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR for all Security System devices. Power supplies shall be mounted in enclosures and installed in the appropriate room or field panel.

3. Design all power supplies for a minimum of 130 percent of the maximum simultaneous current draw.

4. Furnish a power on-off switch or an air circuit breaker for each item requiring electrical power.

5. Provide isolation transformers, line voltage regulators and power distribution panels for the distributed digital portions of the Security System to eliminate electrical noise or transients entering on the primary power line.

B. Signal Requirements:

1. Provide signal converters and repeaters, where required 2. Signals shall be isolated from ground. 3. The system and associated input/output wiring will be used in a plant

environment where there can be high energy AC fields, DC control pulses, and varying ground potentials between the security devices or input contact locations and the system components. The system installation shall be adequate to provide proper protection against interferences from all such possible situations.

C. Miscellaneous:

1. All instrumentation and Security System components shall be heavy-duty types, designed for continuous service in a municipal treatment plant environment. The system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, where possible, and consist of equipment models, which are currently in production. All equipment provided shall be of modular construction and be capable of field expansion through the installation of plug-in circuit cards or modules and additional enclosures as necessary.

2. All Security System components shall be designed to return automatically to operational configuration upon restoration of power after a power failure or when transferred to standby power.

3. Surge protection shall be provided for all Security System components, which could be damaged by electrical surges.

4. All field-mounted Security System components shall be designed for installation in humid and corrosive service conditions. All field mounted instrument enclosures and appurtenances shall conform to NEMA 4X requirements, unless otherwise specified.


26866 18005-12 1/24/2019

5. All relays with interconnections to field devices shall be wired through terminal blocks.

6. All enclosure mounted instruments, switches, and other devices shall be selected and arranged to present a pleasing coordinated appearance.

7. All components furnished shall be tagged with the item number and nomenclature indicated on the Contract Documents.

8. Ranges and scales specified herein shall be coordinated to suit equipment actually furnished.

9. Field-mounted devices shall be treated with an anti-fungus spray as manufactured by Humi Seal Corporation, Type 1A331A33, or equal. Purchase 12, 16 oz spray cans to be utilized after the instrument is permanently mounted. The devices requiring the ant-fungus spray will be field directed by the Engineer. All remaining 16 oz cans are to be turned over to the owner.

10. Field-mounted devices shall be protected from exposure to freezing temperatures and shaded from direct sunlight.

D. Environmental Conditions:

1. The Integrated Security Management System shall be designed and constructed for continuous operation under the following temperature and humidity conditions: a. Control Rooms:

1) Ambient Temperature: 60°F to 80°F normal range; 40°F to 105°F occasional maximum extremes.

2) Relative Humidity: 80 percent, normal; 95 percent maximum. b. Indoor locations for digital processing equipment hardware, control panels

and instruments: 1) Ambient Temperature: 40°F to 120°F. 2) Relative Humidity: 98 percent maximum.

c. Outdoor locations for instruments: 1) Ambient Temperature: -10°F to 131°F. 2) Relative Humidity: 100 percent maximum.

E. System Designs: 1. Range, scale and setpoint values specified in other Division 17, Instrumentation

and Controls, Sections are for initial setting and configuration. Modifications to these values may be required based on actual equipment furnished and as necessary to implement proper and stable process action and that is determined as systems are placed in operation. These modifications shall be done at no additional cost to OWNER.

2. For any items where ranges, scales and setpoints may not have been specified, submit a recommendation to ENGINEER for review.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)


26866 18005-13 1/24/2019




26866 18007-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 18007

INTEGRATED SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, START-UP COMMISSIONING AND FIELD TESTING

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.0 DEFINE TERMS

A. Burn In Phase – This phase is the first phase in the process. Power up the complete system for a define length of time. No work will be done to the system during this period, unless there is an equipment failure. The goal is to ensure that power and communication to each equipment works during that length of time.

B. Testing and Start Up Phase – This phase cannot be started until the Burn in Phase is

completed. All items in the start up phase must be completed before beginning of the Field Operations Checks Phase. This phase will ensure all calibration and verification of connections are completed.

C. Field Operations Checks Phase – This phase cannot be completed until the Testing

and Start Up Phase has been completed. System Integrator will develop the scope of the field operations checks for each piece of equipment. This phase will consist of testing each piece of equipment.

D. Commissioning Phase – This is a defined period of time after the Field Operations

Checks Phase as been completed. The OWNER will monitor the system to ensure system works to its full intended purpose.

1.1 BURN IN, TESTING AND START UP, FIELD OPERATIONS CHECKS, AND

COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the drawings, specified and required to furnish and install all equipment and coordinate all activities required to perform Burn In, Testing and Start Up, Field Operation Checks, and Commissioning of the Integrated Security Management System.

B. Retain the services of the System Integrator to supervise and/or perform Burn In,

Testing and Start Up, Field Operation Checks, and Commissioning of all system components.

C. Shall submit to the ENGINEER 3 copies of the schedule with proposed start dates

and test procedure guidelines for Burn In, Testing and Start Up, Field Operation


26866 18007-2 1/24/2019

Checks, and Commissioning, at least 45 calendar days in advance of the Commissioning Phase. Prior to starting the Burn In Phase on equipment, install and configure all Security Systems software, drivers, and devices, including any modifications, and perform independent software and hardware configuration testing. Complete testing of each equipment/system process and control function and detection area shall be documented by CONTRACTOR and witnessed by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Submit completed testing documentation including any operating and maintenance manuals, with signatures of the witnessing ENGINEER and OWNER, to the ENGINEER upon successful completion of each testing period.

D. Document all component and system failures and all corrective actions far all four

phases identified in this section.

1.2 BURN IN PHASE

A. Perform a complete system burn in period for 48 hours. 1. Burn In Phase can only begin when all Security Control System components are

installed, integrated, configured and calibrated. Operation and Maintenance manuals as specified in Section 18005, Integrated Security Management System General Requirements and a schedule for training must be approved prior to Burn In Phase.

2. All spare parts must be on site and accepted prior to Burn In Phase.

B. The Burn In Phase is to test the electrical integrity of the equipment. Burn In Phase is to energize the system and all of its components for continuous 48 hour period. The Field Operations Checks Phase shall not begin until the continuous 48 hour Burn In Phase has been successfully completed and OWNER and ENGINEER agree that the Field Operations Checks Phase can begin. 1. If the system or component fails during this 48 hour, the system or component

shall be repaired or replaced and a new 48 hour shall begin. 2. No modification or changes can take place during this 48 hour period. If

modification or changes does occur a new 48 hour period will start once modification or changes has been completed.

3. At the end of the 48 hour period a complete system check including all components shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR and observed by the ENGINEER prior to starting the Field Operations Checks Phase.

1.3 TESTING AND START-UP PHASE

A. Following the Burn In Phase perform the following: 1. Verify the installation is complete for all Security System components and all

cable and wiring connections between the various system components prior to placing the various processes and equipment into operation. Testing and Start-Up shall include the following items as a minimum:


26866 18007-3 1/24/2019

a. All cables and wiring shall be checked at each termination point for correct size, type, color, termination and number.

b. All control and monitoring loops shall be checked for signal continuity from source (such as field instrument/equipment, control panel, etc) to end destination.

2. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjustment, including calibration of all devices, checking operation functions, and testing of final control and detection actions. When there are future operational functions included in this Work, they should be included in the system testing. All problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in start-up of the various unit processes.

3. All failure shall be documented and reported to the ENGINEER. 4. All Security System components shall be checked to verify compliance with the

Specifications and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Provide all test equipment required to perform the testing during system Testing and Start-up.

C. Furnish to the ENGINEER certified calibration reports for Security System devices,

as applicable, as soon as calibration is completed. Factory calibrations are not acceptable as a replacement for field calibrations. All instruments must be field calibrated and witnessed by the ENGINEER. 1. Receipt of any calibration certificate shall in no way imply acceptance of the

work or device. 2. The calibration certificate forms shall be prepared and furnished by

CONTRACTOR and shall contain the information as specified in Section 01331, Reference Forms

3. Each calibration certificate shall be signed and dated by an authorized representative of CONTRACTOR. Six copies of each completed certificate shall be submitted to ENGINEER.

D. Furnish ENGINEER six copies of an installation inspection report certifying that all

equipment has been installed correctly and is operating properly. The report shall be signed by authorized representatives of both CONTRACTOR and the System Integrator. Test all Security System components, functions and configurations for optimum performance, including but not limited to: 1. All cabling and wiring shall be checked at each termination point for correct

size, type, color, termination and number. 2. All Security System components shall be checked to verify compliance with the

Specifications and approved Shop Drawings. 3. All detection devices and processes shall be tested throughout its intended

coverage area to ensure there are no coverage gaps and false alarms are properly calibrated to a minimum.


26866 18007-4 1/24/2019

4. All fixed cameras are properly focused and zoomed into the optimum viewing angle for the intended viewing and detection processing coverage area, for both day time and night time operations.

5. All pan/tilt/zoom cameras are properly configured for the optimum number of pre-set positions to maximize operator surveillance and detection processing functionality, for both day time and night time operations.

6. All Local Area Network links are properly configured with the approved IP addressing schema and network traffic bottle neck points are eliminated through optimum port assignment, VLAN, and QOS configurations.

7. All Security System components return automatically to operational configuration upon restoration of power after a power failure or when transferred to standby power supply.

8. All Access Control System functions properly operate when the backup server is connected and the primary server is disconnected; as well as, when the primary server is connected and the backup server is disconnected.

9. All Access Control System monitoring functions automatically transfers to the backup operator workstation graphical user interface when connection to the remote primary and backup servers is lost; as well as, automatically transfers normal operations when the connection to the remote primary and backup servers is restored.

10. All Digital Video Management System functions properly operate when the backup server is connected and the primary server is disconnected; as well as, when the primary server is connected and the backup server is disconnected.

E. Operation and Maintenance manuals as specified in Section 18005, Integrated

Security Management System General Requirements and a schedule for training must be approved submitted and approved by ENGINEER prior to commencing the Field Operations Checks Phase. 1. The Drawings corrected and modified during Commissioning shall form the

basis for the “As-Built” Record Drawing requirement as specified in Section 18005, Integrated Security Management System General Requirements

F. Any defects or problems found during the Start Up Phase effort shall be corrected

and then retested to demonstrate proper operation.

1.4 FIELD OPERATIONS CHECKS PHASE

A. Following successful completion of the Testing and Start Up Phase, the Field Operations Check Phase shall begin for the system and all components. These field operations checks shall be performed to verify all equipment instrumentation is operating properly as a fully integrated system and that the intended detection, monitoring and control functions are fully implemented, configured, and operational.


26866 18007-5 1/24/2019

B. Develop and submit this Field Operation Checks scope 30 days prior to the scheduled

Testing and Start Up Phase. The OWNER and the ENGINEER has 14 days to review and make comments and recommendation on the scope and checklist that was developed. The System Integrator and CONTRACTOR have 10 days to incorporate or rebut comments and recommendation with documented reasons. The OWNER and ENGINEER will review changes and come to an agreement with the CONTRACTOR within the last 10 days.

C. Field operation checks shall include but not limited to checks completed during

regular day shift hours, night shift hours, and various simulated normal and abnormal conditions. All field operations checks will be witnessed by the ENGINEER and also could include the OWNER and the WSD Security Management Unit.

D. Any defects or problems found with the Integrated Security Management System during the Field Operations Checks effort shall be corrected and then retested to demonstrate proper operation. 1. All cause of problems and corrections to the system shall be documented and all

documentation shall be turned over to the ENGINEER and OWNER at the end of the Commissioning Phase.

E. Upon completion of the Field Operations Checks Phase, a copy of all checklists will

be given to the OWNER and ENGINEER. ENGINEER will verify all checks are done prior to starting the Commissioning Phase.

1.5 COMMISSIONING PHASE

A. Commissioning Phase shall begin following completion of the Field Operations Checks Phase. Commissioning Phase lets the OWNER or DESIGNEE operate the system and all of its components for sixty consecutive days without any system or equipment failures. If a failure occurs a new sixty day period will start unless the failure is attributed to the OWNER’S equipment. All failures shall be documented with the cause and correction that occurs during the Commissioning Phase.

B. The conditions listed below shall constitute system failures which are considered

critical to the operability and maintainability of the system. The Commissioning Phase sixty day period shall be terminated if one or more of these conditions occur. Following correction of the problem, a new sixty consecutive day period shall begin. 1. Failure to repair a hardware or software problem within 2 business days from the

time of notification of a system failure has been reported to the Construction Project Manager.

2. Recurrent hardware problems: If the same type of problem occurs three times or more.


26866 18007-6 1/24/2019

C. The following conditions shall constitute a system failure in determining the system availability based on the equation specified in Paragraph 1.5.D., below 1. Failure of Integrated Security Management System, Access Control System

(ACS), Digital Video Management System (DVMS), Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System, Intrusion Detection System (IDS) or the Local Area Network (LAN) processing functions.

2. Loss of communications between devices on the communications network. 3. Failure of one or more input/output components. 4. Failures of any type affecting ten or more input/output points simultaneously. 5. Failure of any type affecting one or more regulatory control loops or sequential

control strategies thereby causing a loss of the automatic control of the process variable or process sequence operation.

6. Failure of power supply. Where redundant power supplies are provided, failure of one power supply shall not constitute a system failure provided the backup power supply operates properly and maintains supply power. Failure of the backup supply to operate properly and maintain supply power shall constitute a system failure.

7. Failure of three or more primary sensors/transducers or devices simultaneously.

D. The system availability shall be calculated based on the following equation:

A = MTBF x 100% MTBF + MTTR

where, A = system availability in percent

MTBF = average time interval between consecutive system failures MTTR = mean time required to repair system failures

E. Time between failures shall be the period between the time that a reported system failure has been corrected and the time of subsequent notification of CONTRACTOR that another system failure has occurred in terms of operating hours.

F. Time to repair shall be the period between the time that CONTRACTOR is notified

of a system failure by ENGINEER and the time that the system has been restored to proper operation in terms of hours with an allowance for the following dead times which shall not be counted as part of the time to repair period. 1. Actual travel time for service personnel to get to the plant site up to a maximum

of six hours from the time CONTRACTOR is notified of a system failure. 2. Time for receipt of spare parts to the plant site once requested up to a maximum

of 24 hours. No work shall be done on the system while waiting for delivery of spare parts.

3. Dead time shall not be counted as part of the system available period. The dead time shall be logged and the duration of the Commissioning Phase extended for an amount of time equal to the total dead time.


26866 18007-7 1/24/2019

G. Completion of a sixty consecutive day period without any restarts and with a system

availability in excess of 99.7 percent will constitute acceptance of the Security System by OWNER. Submit a request of acceptance after the sixty consecutive day period without any restarts to the ENGINEER for approval.

H. All parts and maintenance materials required to repair the system prior to completion

of the Commissioning Phase shall be supplied at no additional cost to OWNER. If parts are obtained from the contractual spare parts inventory, they shall be replaced to provide a full complement of parts as specified.

I. Turn over all failures and correction forms prior to acceptance to the ENGINEER. J. A Security System Malfunction/Repair Reporting Form will be completed by the

OWNER and ENGINEER to document system failures, to record notification, arrival and repair times and repair actions. Format of the form will be developed and agreed upon prior to the start of the Commissioning Phase.




26866 18008-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 18008

INTEGRATED SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TRAINING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to perform and coordinate all required training at times acceptable to OWNER and ENGINEER.

B. Retain the services of the Systems Integrator to provide operation and maintenance

training for all Security System equipment as specified herein.

C. Responsibility for all costs associated with, including all required materials, texts and required supplies, belongs to CONTRACTOR.

D. All training shall be conducted in the normal eight hour working days until

conclusion of the training course.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit his plan for training conforming to the requirements of Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel. Included in the plan shall be course outlines and schedules for training.

1.3 ON-SITE TRAINING

A. Integrated Security Management System: 1. Provide on-site operation and maintenance training by Systems Integrator prior

to placing the equipment in continuous operation, conforming to the requirements of Section 01821, Instruction of Operations and Maintenance Personnel and shall include the following sub-systems: a. Access Control System (ACS) b. Digital Video Management System (DVMS) c. CCTV System

d. Intrusion Detection System (IDS) 2. Training shall accomplish the following:

a. Provide instruction covering use and operation of the equipment to perform the intended functions.

b. Provide instruction covering procedures for routine, preventive and troubleshooting maintenance for the following sub-systems:


26866 18008-2 1/24/2019

c. Explain procedures for placing the equipment in and out of operation and

explain necessary actions and precautions to be taken regarding the overall Integrated Security Management System.

B. The minimum training hours shall comply with Section 01821, Instruction of

Operations and Maintenance Personnel and be provided for all scheduled work shifts as required.




26866 18121-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 18121

SECURITY SYSTEMS CABLE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION


Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install instrumentation, telephone cables and security system fiber cables.

2. The types of cable include the following: a. Coaxial Cable b. Telecommunications Cable c. Security Cable

B. The entire instrumentation cable system is considered to be one component and

shall be provided by a single source, hereafter referred to as the Supplier. The only exception permitted is telecommunication cable, as defined in this specification, and the provider of telecommunication cable shall be pre-approved by the City of Phoenix Information Technology Services.


A. Refer to Section 18005 - Integrated Security Management System General Requirements.

B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations

of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 with Addendums, Commercial Building

Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 1: General Requirements. 2. TIA/EIA-568-B.2 with Addendums, Commercial Building

Telecommunications Cabling Standard Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components.

3. TIA-569-B, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

4. TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure.

5 J-STD-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

6. City of Phoenix, Information Technology Services cabling standards.

C. Permits and Inspections:


26866 18121-2 1/24/2019

1. Material and workmanship shall conform to all applicable legal and code requirements, and as specified in the Contract Documents.

2. Shall perform all tests required to demonstrate conformance with the Contract Documents.

D. Job Conditions:

1. Shall ensure that all conduits, junction boxes, outlets, and other openings are kept covered to prevent foreign matter entry.

2. During installation ensure all materials are kept safe from dirt, water, or other materials that could damage it.

3. The installation is to be supervised on a regular basis by a person designated by the CONTRACTOR. This person shall be authorized and shall be competent to be in charge of the project.

E. This section does not detract in any way with Quality Assurance Provisions of

Division 1.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Proposed instrumentation cables and cable accessories (terminations)

identification sequence and labeling. 2. Manufacturer’s technical information for telecommunications cable and

underground splicing for approval by the City of Phoenix, Information Technology Services.

3. Cut sheets and catalog literature for proposed instrumentation cables and cable accessories (terminations).

4. Manufacturer specifications and data which clearly and unambiguously shows that the instrumentation cables and cable accessories (terminations) meets all the requirements specified herein.

5. Samples of the proposed instrumentation cables. 6. Physical dimension drawings of instrumentation cables and cable

accessories (terminations). 7. Provide a Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL). 8. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures. 9. Proposed cable test forms.

1.4 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

A. Refer to Section 18007 - Integrated Security Management System, Start Up, Commissioning and Field Testing.

B. All instrumentation cable systems shall be installed and tested in accordance

with the manufacturer’s warranty requirements, the latest ANSI/TIA/EIA testing procedures.


26866 18121-3 1/24/2019

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. The CAT5e compliant cabling system shall be a complete end to end (channel) Ortronics/Berk-Tek Netclear solution or equal, and warrant that all materials and equipment furnished under the contract are in good working order, free from defects, and in conformance with system specifications. All installed equipment for CAT5e compliant cabling system must conform to the manufacturer’s official applications assurance and product warranty information. The CAT5e compliant cabling system warranty shall begin at the system acceptance date and remain in effect for a period of 25 years from that date. A single Supplier shall be responsible for certifying and warranting all components of the CAT5e compliant cabling system.


A. Coaxial Cable 1. Cable for the connection of non fiber optic CCTV cameras shall be as specified

below: a. RG-59 Quad Shielded for distances less than 600 feet (200 meters). b. RG-6 Quad Shielded for distances more than 600 feet (200 meters) and less

than 850 feet (270 meters). c. RG-11 Quad Shielded for distances more than 850 feet (270 meters) and

less than 1200 feet (400 meters). 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Berk Tek b. Commscope c. Or equal

B. Telecommunications Cable:

1. All cables installed for City of Phoenix telephone and enterprise network systems shall be installed per the latest version of the Information Technology Systems Telecommunications Cabling System Standards.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Berk Tek. b. Or equal.

C. Security Cabling:

1. Cable for the connection of security systems device modules shall be as specified below:

a. Card Reader Cables: 18 AWG minimum, 6 conductors shielded. b. Door Contact Cables: 18 AWG minimum, 2 conductors shielded.


26866 18121-4 1/24/2019

c. Glass Breakage Sensor Cable: 18 AWG minimum, 4 conductors shielded. d. Motion Detector Cables: 18 AWG minimum, 4 conductors shielded. e. Electrified Locks Cables: 16 AWG minimum, 2 conductors non shielded. f. Infinet Bus Cables: 24 AWG, 1 pair shielded, Low Capacitance 12.5 pF,

100 Ohms. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Belden. b. Mohawk. c. Or equal.

D. Cable Markers:

1. Provide only heat shrinkage type cable identification, which shall be type-written.

2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide the following: a. By W.H. Brady Company. (Part # PSPT-500-1W for a twisted pair shielded

cable) b. Or equal


A. Separation Requirements: 1) Coaxial Cables shall not be routed separately from other cables unless

noted on drawings. 2) Telecommunications Cables are to be routed separately from other

cables. 3) Security System Cables are to be routed separately from other cables

unless noted on the drawings.

B. Install all cables complete with proper identification and terminations at both ends.

C. Terminate stranded conductors with pre-insulated crimp type spade or barrel

compression fitting terminals properly sized to fit fastening device and wire size.

E. Install and terminate vendor furnished cable in accordance with vendor

equipment requirements. F. Coordinate the installation and termination of the Telecommunications cables

with the City of Phoenix, Information Technology Services.

G. Install in conformance with the National Electrical Code and the City of Phoenix Electrical Code.


26866 18121-5 1/24/2019

3.2 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Performance Specification Requirements: Where specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

B. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is

specified for a specific application. All equipment shall be installed per applicable UL listing for that device or component.

C. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation

of product in the applications indicated. Anchor products securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other work.

3.3 CABLE DAMAGE DURING INSTALLATION

A. If an instrumentation cable becomes damaged during installation stop operations and notify the ENGINEER immediately. If requested by the ENGINEER test the cable in accordance with the test procedures of this specification. Requiring a test of the damaged cable shall not be a basis of extra payment or extension of Contract completion time. The ENGINEER will decide whether to replace the entire reel of cable or to install a splice at the damaged section.

B. If the ENGINEER requests to have the entire reel of cable, begin the installation

at the last designated splice point. The damaged cable between these points shall be removed, coiled, tagged, and given to the OWNER. Installation of new cable to replace damaged cable shall not be a basis of extra payment or extension of Contract completion time.

C. If the ENGINEER approves installation of a splice at the damaged point, then

submit the proposed splicing method to the ENGINEER. Furnish all materials and labor necessary to perform the splice in accordance with the approved requirements. Requiring one or more splices, or additional cable, to replace the damaged portions of the cable shall not be a basis of extra payment or extension of Contract completion time.

D. If the ENGINEER requests installation of a splice at the damaged point, and the

cable is damaged (by appearance or as demonstrated by test results) a second time, the entire reel of damaged cable (and all subsequent damaged reels) shall be replaced with new reels. Installation of new cable to replace damaged cable shall not be a basis of extra payment or extension of Contract completion time.


26866 18121-6 1/24/2019

3.4 TESTING

A. Acceptance testing of instrumentation cables shall be per Section 18007 - Integrated Security Management System, Start Up, Commissioning and Field Testing.

B. Instrumentation cable shall not be tested without an ENGINEER witness on site

to observe the means in which the cable is being tested. All test that occur without an ENGINEER witness shall be retested. Retesting of instrumentation cables shall not be a basis of extra payment or extension of Contract completion time.

C. All instrumentation cable testing shall be documented on pre-approved test

forms. Three copies of all test documents and forms shall be submitted to the ENGINEER upon successful completion of the testing.

D. Telecommunications cables shall be tested in accordance with and in the

presence of the City of Phoenix, Information Technology Services. A written proposed schedule shall be submitted a minimum of seven days prior to the testing of each telecommunications cable for inspection coordination.



26866 18260-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 18260

INTEGRATED SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope:

1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS illustrate and specify functional and general construction requirements of the enclosure components and do not necessarily show or specify all components, wiring, and accessories required for a completely integrated system.

2. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, documentation including drawings and incidentals as shown on the drawings, specified and required to design, furnish, install, calibrate, test, start-up, program, configure, commission and place into satisfactory operation all enclosures including enclosure components and instruments.

3. Conform the design and construction of enclosures to the specifications herein.

B. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the installation of all items specified herein and required to ensure

the complete and proper interfacing of all the components and systems.

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Security Power Supply Enclosure: An Security Power Supply Enclosure is an

industrial rated enclosure that contains a power supply and/or networking modules for CCTV Cameras, Intrusion Detection Systems, and door hardware. A security power supply enclosure contains voltages of 120VAC or below.

B. Security System Enclosure (SSE): A Security System Enclosure is an industrial

rated enclosure that contains security controllers and modules, in addition to wire terminals. Typically, it is a local enclosure connected to security devices (i.e. card readers, door contacts, motion detectors, and glass breaks to provide control and/or monitoring of these devices. A security system enclosure contains voltages of 120VAC or below.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Construction of enclosures and the installation and

interconnection of all equipment and devices mounted within also comply with applicable provisions of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified.


26866 18260-2 1/24/2019

1. National Fire Protection Association 79 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption. 3. City of Phoenix – Amendments to the National Electrical Code. 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards (NEMA) 5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 6. Operational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations 7. State and local code requirements 8. Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringent

requirement applies. 9. All panel devices shall bear the label of the Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL), Inc.

or be UL Recognized. Some products certified by UL are components that are intended to be used in the manufacture of a complete Listed product. These components cannot bear the UL symbol, but may use a special Recognized Component Mark.

a. The UL/UR listed number shall be documented on the Bill of Materials on the drawings.

10. The assembled enclosures are to be conformed to meet UL 508 requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. Reference Section 01330 Submittals. 2. Enclosures shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements as shown on

the Drawings, and as specified in Division 18, Section 18005, 18910, 18920, 18930 and 18940.

3. Generate drawing package utilizing AutoCAD 2004 or newer. 4. Submit legible hard copies of the enclosure drawing package printed on 11” x

17” sheets. 5. Submit an electronic copy of the enclosure drawing package on a CD. 6. Submit manufacturer’s technical data sheets and product literature for the

enclosures and all components utilized. Cleary identify exact equipment and material that is being supplied on the manufacturer’s data sheets.

7. Submit a sample nameplate with the submittal. 8. Identify general location of all conduit entry points on the Front Elevation

drawing of the documentation package. 9. Submit calculations and recommended Air Conditioning Unit for cooling and

heating load requirements. Utilize the Hoffman Temperature Calculation tool at: http://www.hoffmanonline.com/product_catalog/tools/index.aspx?cat_1=34&cat_2=375&SelectCatID=375&CatId=375

10. Submit location and tube routing details for air conditioner drain line. Coordinate drain location with ENGINEER.


26866 18260-3 1/24/2019

B. Panel to be designed, schematics drawn and assembled by the manufacturer. Utilize one of the following Panel Manufacturers:

1. RDC Electrical 3411 South 44th Street Phoenix, AZ 85040 Office: (602) 437-0760

2. Industrial Power Solutions

1656 South 173rd Drive Goodyear, AZ 85338 (623) 687-0180

3. Keller Electrical Industries, Inc.

1881 East University Drive Phoenix, AZ 85034 Tel: (602) 437-3015 Fax: (602) 437-8163

1.5 O&M MANUALS

A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01781, Operations and Maintenance Data.

B. Submit an electronic copy of the panel drawing package on a separate CD. Panel Drawings are to be provided electronically in AutoCAD version 2004 through 2008. If utilizing a newer AutoCAD version, submit files saved at version 2008.


A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01651, Transportation and Handling of

Materials and Equipment. B. Comply with the requirements of 01661, Storage of Materials and Equipment. C. Provide drawings of the enclosure upon delivery of the enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ENCLOSURES

A. General:

1. Conform panels and enclosures to the NEMA requirements as stated in Specification 16050 – General Requirements.

2. Sizes shown on CONTRACT DRAWINGS are estimates. Furnish enclosures sized to house all equipment, instruments, front enclosure mounted devices,


26866 18260-4 1/24/2019

power supplies, power distribution enclosures, wiring and other components installed within.

3. Size the enclosure to provide 20% spare capacity. 4. Floor Pad: Refer to Part 3.4 of this Section. 5. Use stainless steel fasteners throughout. 6. Provide interior mounting enclosures and shelves constructed of minimum 12

gage steel. 7. Provide enclosure mounting supports as required for floor, frame, or wall

mounting. Indoor wall mount enclosures utilizing stainless steel unistrut. Outdoor wall mount enclosures utilizing PVC coated unistrut.

B. Construction Features:

1. General Construction Features: a. Provide grounding studs or lugs for metal Enclosures and doors. b. Provide all electrical components and devices, support hardware,

fasteners, and interconnecting wiring required to make the enclosures complete and operational.

c. Provide oil resistant gasket completely around each door or opening. d. For enclosures located in the field or outdoors that have door mounted

devices which do not meet the NEMA rating for the area, provide a window kit that includes a hinged door with a clear plastic window and an oil resistant gasket to encompass all non-NEMA rated enclosure instruments for this area.

e. Provide full height doors. f. Provide enclosures with no extra holes or knockouts unless shown on

CONTRACT DRAWINGS. C. Environment

1. General: a. Provide the following Panels with an air conditioner based on the

submitted calculations and recommended cooling and/or heating load requirements.

1) LCP-SEC-LS76 b. Provide a separate lighting enclosure circuit for air conditioners, heat

exchangers, ventilation fans or heaters. c. Provide calculations for cooling and heating load requirements. d. Provide thermostats to automatically control heating, cooling, ventilation

requirements. 2. Air Conditioners:

a. Coordinate utilization of air conditioners with the ENGINEER. b. Provide an automatically controlled closed loop air conditioner with

filtered and adjustable air louvers to maintain temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the lowest rated component.

c. Provide a condensation drain line for each air conditioner.


26866 18260-5 1/24/2019

d. Coordinate space requirements for maintenance. e. Provide NEMA 4X for outdoor locations. f. Coat heating and cooling elements including external housing that are in

contact with Plant’s ambient environment with Heresite, or equal, for protection from hydrogen sulfide corrosion with hydrogen sulfide levels up to seven ppm. 1) Coordinate application of coating with the ENGINEER.

g. Product and Manufacturer: 1) Hoffman (McClean)

3. Heat Exchangers: a. Coordinate utilization of heat exchangers with the ENGINEER. b. Provide an automatically controlled heat exchanger to maintain

temperature inside each enclosure below the maximum operating temperature rating of the lowest rated component.

c. Coordinate space requirements for maintenance. d. Products and Manufacturers:

1) Hoffman 4. Ventilation Fans:

a. Coordinate utilization of ventilation fans with the ENGINEER. b. Provide automatically controlled ventilation fans with filter to maintain

temperature of indoor/outdoor enclosures below the maximum operating temperature of the lowest rated component.

c. Products and Manufacturers: 1) Hoffman 2) Or Approved Equal

5. Heaters: a. Provide adequately sized automatically controlled 120 VAC heaters to

maintain temperature inside each enclosure above 40°F to a maximum of 80°F when the outside temperature is 0°F through 40°F.

b. Product and Manufacturer: 1) Hoffman 2) Or Approved Equal

D. Identification:

1. Provide laminated plastic nameplates with a white background and black

lettering for identification of enclosures and components. 2. Construct nameplates with 1/16” plastic and with beveled edges. 3. Nameplate Mounting a. Indoor panels: Mount nameplates to the control panel utilizing glue. b. Outdoor panels: Mount nameplates to the control panel utilizing glue and

with two self-sealing ¼” stainless steel screws by APM Hexseal. c. Glue Product and Manufacturer 1) Gorilla Glue 2) Or Equal


26866 18260-6 1/24/2019

4. Provide nameplates according to Table 2.1.D.5 and Section 3.1.B:

Nameplate Specifications

Type Size Font Font Size

Enclosure Nameplate

*2” x 7” Arial 1/2“

Device Nameplate *1½”x 2½” Arial 3/16“ Manufacturer Nameplate

*2” x 4” Arial 3/16“

Table 2.1.D.5 Nameplate Specifications

* This is a minimum size requirement. Size nameplates large enough to display the information required to clearly identify the enclosure.

2.2 ENCLOSURE DEVICES:

A. General:

1. Provide DIN rail mounted devices where practical.

B. Internal Component Labeling: 1. Provide a device label for devices mounted inside the enclosure that conforms

to the criteria below: a. Components: Provide component labeling as shown on the CONTRACT

DRAWINGS. Place label below the component or most visible area. b. Circuit Breaker: Label each circuit breaker with CB and the number

assigned in the circuit breaker schedule. Place label below the instrument or most visible area.

c. Fuses: Label each fuse with FU and the number assigned in the fuse schedule. Place label below the instrument or most visible area.

d. Control Relays: Label each relay with CR and the number assigned in the enclosure drawings. Place label below the relay.

e. Terminal Strips: Label each terminal strip with the terminal strip type. (ex. TB1, TB2, ATB). Place label above the terminal block or at first terminal.

f. Door Mounted Devices: Provide a label on the interior of the front enclosure door for every enclosure device. The label should contain the same information as shown on the front enclosure nameplate. Place the label below the device.

C. Circuit Breakers:


26866 18260-7 1/24/2019

1. Provide single pole circuit breakers with the following features, 120 Volt and 240 Volt AC, DIN rail mounted and UL listed.

2. Provide end caps, marking strips, insulated side jumpers and other accessories. 3. Product and Manufacturer, Provide one of the following models where “xx” is

the appropriate rating. a. Phoenix Contact, TMC 1-M1-xxA b. Allen-Bradley, 1492-SP1Bxxx c. Idec, NRC-11-0-L-xxA-AA

D. Wire:

1. General

a. Provide internal wiring of Type MTW stranded copper wire with thermo-plastic insulation with no nylon jacket rated for 600 V at 90°C for single conductors.

b. No utilization of Type THHN for enclosure wiring. c. For DC enclosure signal wiring, use #16 AWG shielded minimum. d. For AC power wiring, use #14 AWG minimum. For AC signal and

control wiring, use #16 AWG minimum. For wiring carrying more than 15 amps, use sizes required by NEC and NFPA 79 Standards.

e. Identify wires at each end using heat shrink labels with permanent number codes using a Brady LS2000 Labeling System, or equal.

f. Enclosures conform to the wire color code as shown in Table 2.2.D.1.f Wire Color Code.

WIRE COLOR CODE TABLE (Inside Enclosures)

TYPE FUNCTION INSULATION COLOR AC POWER (HOT) 120VAC BLACK

AC POWER (NEUTRAL) 120VAC WHITE

AC GROUND 120VAC GREEN

AC CONTROL 120VAC RED ISOLATED DC GROUND GROUND GREEN

W/YELLOW DC POWER SOURCE BLUE

DC POWER COMMON WHITE /BLUE

CONTROL FOREIGN VOLTAGES ORANGE

LOW VOLTAGE AC

24VAC SOURCE BROWN


26866 18260-8 1/24/2019

LOW VOLTAGE AC

24VAC COMMON

BROWN W/WHITE

SIGNAL (TWSH PAIR) ANALOG RED (POSITIVE)

BLACK (NEGATIVE)

Table 2.2.D.1.f Wire Color Code 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Carol b. Belden c. Anixter

G. Wire Terminations:

1. Terminate all field and internal component wiring using insulated compression

type ferruled lugs attached with manufacturer’s recommended tool. 2. Excessive stripping of the wire so as to allow bare wire outside the insulated

ferrule is not permitted. 3. Utilize double ferruled connectors wherever two wires terminate on the same

terminal block connection. 4. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Phoenix Contact b. Thomas & Betts c. Weidmuller

H. Terminal Blocks:

1. General

a. Numerically code terminals utilizing terminal block manufacturer’s marking system. Information must be printed directly on the terminal label. Sticky back labels are not permitted.

b. Terminal blocks must be din rail mountable with screw clamp connections. Spring cage connections are not permitted.

c. Double level terminal blocks are permitted for use with signals on ATB only.

d. Terminals used for analog signals on ATB shall be colored blue. e. Terminal block jumpers must be connected via screw clamp. Screw

clamped comb jumpers are permitted. Plug in jumpers are not permitted. 2. Product and Manufacturer: For each terminal strip type provide one of the

following: a. Power Terminal Block (PTB)

1) Phoenix Contact, Type UK 5 N, Color Gray, Model # 30 04 36 2 2) Allen Bradley, Type 1492-J4, Color Gray, Model # 1492-J4


26866 18260-9 1/24/2019

3) Weidmuller, Type WSU 4, Color Dark Beige, Model # 1020100000 b. TB1 and TB2

1) Phoenix Contact, Type UDK 3, Double Connection, Color Gray, Model # 27 75 37 5

2) Weidmuller, Type WDK 2.5V, Double Connection, Double Level, Internal Connection, Color Dark Beige, Model # 1022300000

c. ATB - Single Level 1) Phoenix Contact, Type UK 3N BU, Color Blue, Model # 30 01 51 4 2) Allen Bradley, Type 1492-J3-B, Color Blue, Model # 1492-J3-B 3) Weidmuller, Type WDU 2.5 BL, Color Blue, Model # 1020080000

d. ATB-Double Level. Alternating double and single level ATB terminal blocks are permitted. 1) Phoenix Contact, Type MBKKB 2,5 BU, Double Level, Color Blue,

Model # 27 71 09 4 2) Allen Bradley, Type 1492-JD3-B, Double Level, Color Blue, Model

# 1492-JD3-B 3) Weidmuller, Type WDK 2.5 BL, Double Level, Color Blue, Model #

1021580000 I. Wireways:

1. General:

a. Mount wireways using stainless steel bolts. Drill and tap the sub-enclosure to accommodate the bolts.

b. Color to be Gray or White throughout the entire enclosure. Provide only one color.

c. All wireways to include cover. 2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:

a. Panduit b. Thomas & Betts c. Or Approved Equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES:

A. Component Layout:

1. Arrange associated devices and modules for a particular part of the system in

close proximity to each other. 2. Standard component spacing is 3 ½” on the sides and 3 ½” above and below. It

is acceptable to use more space if required, but spatial consistency must be maintained.


26866 18260-10 1/24/2019

3. The maximum height for enclosures exterior-mounted devices is 6’-0” from the floor. Minimum height for enclosures exterior-mounted devices is 3’-0” from the floor.

6. Unless otherwise noted; route field wiring through the bottom of the enclosure. Provide watertight conduit openings.

B. Exterior Enclosure Nameplates

1. General

a. Refer to Section 2.1 for material requirements. b. Provide specific enclosure identification on nameplates derived from the

CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS. c. Obtain ENGINEER approval for enclosure identification for enclosures

that are not identified in the CONTRACT SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS.

2. Panel Manufacturer Identifier and Power Requirements Nameplate (NP-1) a. Mount nameplate in the upper left corner of the panel front. b. Nameplate size to be 2” x 6” maximum. c. Font to be Arial and letter size to be 1/8 inch d. Provide the following information for each circuit feeding the panel.

1) The first line indicates the name of the manufacturer who assembled the panel and electrical components. 2) The following lines identify each circuit breaker or supplementary

protector number, voltage, full load current, phase, frequency and the power feeding panel circuit number.

3. Security System Enclosure Identification Nameplate (NP-2) a. Mount enclosure identification nameplate in the top, center of the

enclosure. b. Nameplate size to be 2” x 7”. c. Font to be Arial and letter size to be 3/4 inch. d. Provide the following information:

1) The first line of text is an abbreviation of the enclosure as shown on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS. a) Refer to figure 3.1.B.3a

SSE 01

Figure 3.1.B.3a Enclosure Nameplate

3.2 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES


26866 18260-11 1/24/2019

A. General:

1. All Wall Mounted Enclosures - Where conduit enters the enclosure, maintain a minimum of 4” clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring.

2. Concrete Pad or Floor Mounted SSE’s – Where conduits enter the enclosure through the concrete pad, maintain a minimum of 12” clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring. Where conduit enters the enclosure sides or top, maintain a minimum of 4” clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring.

3. Elevated Floor Mounted SSE’s - Where conduit enters the enclosure, maintain a minimum of 4” clearance from any device or wireway to allow room for routing of field wiring.

4. Locate and install all devices and components so that connections can be easily made and that there is ample room for servicing each item.

5. Maintain a minimum 2’0” clearance between components mounted on side enclosures and components mounted on the opposing side enclosure.

6. Components mounted on the back enclosure are to be unobstructed by any components mounted on side enclosures.

7. Adequately support and restrain all devices and components mounted on or within the enclosure to prevent any movement.

8. Reserve a 10% space on the back or side enclosure(s) for future use. B. Enclosures Incoming Power:

1. Enclosure power fed from lighting enclosures or other sources with fused or

circuit breaker protection shall be wired to the Power Terminal Blocks (PTBs). Power sources entering the enclosures are to be provided with a separate neutral and ground. The PTBs shall have a separate terminal for the hot, neutral and ground for each circuit.

2. Mount the PTBs near the top left corner of the enclosure. 3. Multiple power sources may be required for each enclosure. Power

requirements are identified on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS. The following additional power sources may be required for the enclosure. a. Security Device Power b. Light and Receptacle c. Air Conditioning

4. Arrange the terminal strip in an orderly manner with circuit conductors grouped together. For instance, terminate the hot and neutral conductors on consecutive terminals. Label terminals and internal wiring as H1 and N1 (Control Logic), H2 and N2 (Light and Receptacle), H3 and N3 (Air Conditioning). Identify each additional source in sequential order beginning with H4 and N4.

5. Terminate all incoming power on one side of the terminal strip.

C. AC Power Distribution:


26866 18260-12 1/24/2019

1. Identify the wire extending from the PTB to the circuit breakers as H1, H2, and

H3 etc. Using H1 as an example; the wire terminated to the line side of the circuit breaker is labeled H1, the wire terminated to the load side of the circuit breaker is labeled as L1-1.

2. If L1-1 passes through an additional circuit breaker to feed enclosure components, this circuit breaker is to be shown on the drawings in a horizontal position on a schematic rung and the wire terminated to the line side of the circuit breaker is labeled L1-1, the wire terminated to the load side of the circuit breaker is labeled as the rung number on which it is located.

3. A power source that is used in multiple control circuits requires a circuit breaker for each circuit. For instance, if H1 is applied to multiple circuit breakers, the wire on the line side of the 1st breaker is labeled H1and the wire terminated to the load side of the circuit breaker is labeled L1-1, the wire on the line side of the 2nd breaker is labeled H1and the wire terminated to the load side of the circuit breaker is labeled L1-2 and the wire on the line side of the 3rd breaker is labeled H1 and the wire terminated to the load side of the circuit breaker is labeled L1-3.

4. Powering 120VAC field 4-wire instruments from the enclosure is not permitted.

D. DC Power Distribution:

1. Mount DC power supplies near the top right of the enclosure. Mount fuses

associated with the power supply in close proximity to the power supplies. 2. Identify terminals used for DC power distribution as PTB-DC.

E. Grounding:

1. AC Ground:

a. Provide an AC ground bus bar manufactured of a single copper bar installed near the bottom of the back enclosure with extended mounting bolts.

b. Provide adequate metal to metal contact between the AC ground bus bar and the back plane.

c. Connect all AC power sources and devices to ground at this ground bus. d. Connect all enclosure doors to the AC ground bus. e. Connect all side enclosures to the AC ground bus. f. Provide a connection point on the ground bus for connection to the ground

grid system. The grounding electrode conductor shall be sized as shown on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

2. DC Ground: a. Install an isolated DC grounding bus bar near the bottom of the back

enclosure at a minimum distance of 6” from the AC ground bus.


26866 18260-13 1/24/2019

b. The isolated grounding bus bar consists of two non-conductive mounting blocks with a single copper grounding bar attached between them.

c. Connect all shields (SH) from analog terminals to the DC grounding bus bar.

d. To avoid ground loops, connect analog cable signal shields to ground at one location only, preferably in the enclosure; not in the field. Maintain consistency for the termination point of signal shield for all analog signals.

e. Provide a connection point on the ground bus for connection to the ground grid system. The grounding electrode conductor shall be sized as shown on the CONTRACT DRAWINGS.

f. Figure 3.2.F illustrates a typical ground system within a enclosure. The illustration depicts the physical terminations of the ground wires in the enclosure.

Figure 3.2.F - Enclosure Ground F. Circuit Protection:

1. Provide an isolating circuit breaker for each group of control logic. For

example: the start, stop and reset control circuit for Pump #1 has a dedicated circuit breaker supplying power to the control logic. Pump #2 requires a separate isolating circuit breaker for the control logic.

2. Provide an isolating circuit breaker for each component requiring 120VAC power.

3. A circuit breaker is not required for control circuits powered from a fused control power transformer in an enclosure.


26866 18260-14 1/24/2019

4. Size circuit breakers to handle the connected load. 5. Mount circuit breakers next to the PTBs near the top left corner of the

enclosure. 6. Provide a power failure relay with an auxiliary contact for each circuit breaker.

Wire each contact in series to send one loss of power signal to the Computer Control System.

G. Internal Enclosure Wiring:

1. Route all internal wiring using wireways. Route all DC power and analog

signals at a minimum of six inches from AC power and controls. When the six inch minimum distance is not available, provide a metallic barrier that extends 3” beyond the tallest wireway between the analog and discrete wireways.

2. Where wires pass through enclosure walls, provide suitable bushings to prevent cutting or abrading of insulation.

3. Adequately support and restrain all wiring runs to prevent sagging or other movement. Wires extended from the control logic to the enclosure door devices are to be wrapped in plastic protective wire wrap designed for this purpose.

4. Wire splicing is not allowed at any time. 5. Utilize two wires (hot and return leg) with field wiring for each field input. It is

not acceptable to utilize one common Hot for multiple field inputs. 6. Terminate wires with a non-insulated ferrule type crimp connector. Excessive

stripping of the insulation to allow bare wire strands between the insulation and the ferrule is not permitted.

7. Orientate wire labels on the individual conductor or cable so that wire labels are legible without having to twist or move the connectors. Securely heat shrink the labels around the conductor. Label wires or cables with the number assigned in the enclosure documentation. Refer to Section 2.2.F.1.e for wire label materials.

8. DC wiring for analog and discrete field or Computer Control System signals that enter or leave the enclosure are to be terminated on the Analog Terminal Block (ATB).

9. AC wiring for discrete field signals that enter or leave the enclosure are to be terminated on the Terminal Block 1 (TB1).

10. AC wiring for discrete Computer Control System signals that enter or leave the enclosure are to be terminated on Terminal Block 2 (TB2).

11. The terminal blocks (TB1, TB2 or ATB) can be mounted on the left or right side enclosures.

12. Provide a minimum of 10% spare terminal din rail space per terminal strip. 13. Signals from the field that enter the enclosure and only pass through the

enclosure from the field to the Computer Control System require internal wiring from TB1 to TB2.

14. Arrange all control wiring associated with a particular piece of process equipment together on adjacent terminal blocks.


26866 18260-15 1/24/2019

15. Identify wire number by the schematic rung numbers. Label TB1 and TB2 terminals with the rung number associated with the internal wire number connected to the terminal. Label ATB terminals in sequential order starting with the number 1. Identify analog shield terminations with an “SH” on the terminal block.

16. Provide DC surge protection for all analog signal loops. Mount the surge protectors on the ATB. Connect surge protectors so that power is not interrupted in the event of failure or replacement. Effectively ground the surge protectors to the enclosure DC ground bus. Label the surge protectors in sequential order starting with the ATB signals.

17. Multi-conductor cables of two pair or more shall have the outer cable insulation removed before entering the wireway.

H. Wireways:

1. Mount wireways from the internal enclosure components and terminal blocks

with a minimum 2” spacing. 2. Arrange wireways to maintain a six inch minimum distance between analog and

discrete circuit wiring. 3. Provide wireways for all field wiring. Arrange wireways to allow field wiring

to enter from the top or bottom of the enclosure. 4. Align wireways between back and side enclosures. 5. Install a wireway on both sides of each terminal strip. 6. Size wireways to prevent conductor fill from exceeding 50% of the interior

cross-sectional area of the wireway. I. Control Logic:

1. The Start commands are to be designed utilizing normally open contacts from

pushbuttons and/or the Computer Control System and shall be of a momentary signal that will require a seal circuit to maintain operation. Constant signals from positions switches are not allowed unless noted on the DRAWINGS.

2. All system failure, safety logic control devices or normal operations that are intended to cause the equipment to stop are to be wired in series with the start seal circuit. The unsealing of the start command on any fault or normal operation that causes the equipment to stop will require another start command to reseal.

3. Provide interlocks for the control functions of Local and Computer Modes in series with the Start and Stop logic. Provide a closed switch or relay contact to the Computer Control System to identify when the equipment is in Computer Mode.

4. Provide control logic of voltage 24VDC. 5. Use power relays when control relay contacts are insufficient for the designated

load. 6. Terminate the “Hot” conductor on the common of the switch or relay contact.


26866 18260-16 1/24/2019

3.3 ENCLOSURE DRAWING DOCUMENTATION

A. General:

1. Develop enclosure drawings using Autocad 2004 through 2008. If utilizing a newer AutoCAD version, submit files saved at version 2008. Autocad files of the title block, enclosure symbols for front and internal sub-enclosure elevations, terminal strips, control schematics, analog loops, etc. are available in hard copy and electronic format from the OWNER upon request through the ENGINEER via Example Enclosure Drawing Packages and Drawing Templates.

2. Provide drawing copies in the following format: a. Hard Copy - B Size - 11” X 17” b. Hard Copy - D Size - 22” X 34” c. Soft Copy in .DWG

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in conformance with NEC.

B. Unless otherwise noted, install indoor free standing enclosures on 4-inch concrete

pad. Extend pad 4-inches beyond outside dimensions of base, all sides. Lay grout after enclosure sills have been securely fastened down.

C. Unless otherwise noted, install outdoor free standing enclosures on a reinforced concrete pedestal: 1. Minimum Thickness: 8-inches with No. 4 steel reinforcing bars at 12-inches on

centers, each way. 2. Minimum Size: 4-inches larger than outer dimensions of base, all sides. 3. Provide excavation and backfill work in conformance with Section 02315,

Structural Excavation and Backfill. 4. Provide concrete work in conformance with Section 03300, Cast-In-Place

Concrete. 5. Seal the contact surface between the enclosure base along the outside perimeter

of the enclosure using RTV sealant. 6. Install anchor bolts and anchor in accordance with Section 05051, Anchor

Bolts, Toggle Bolts and Concrete Inserts.

D. Install and interconnect all equipment, devices, electrical hardware, instrumentation and controls and process controller components into and out of and among the enclosures as shown on the Drawings.

E. Install each item in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with the CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.


26866 18260-17 1/24/2019

3.5 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintain a set of red-line enclosure drawings to reflect changes or deviations that

occur during installation, start-up and commissioning and incorporates these deviations into the final Operation & Maintenance manual.

B. Provide record drawings in accordance with Section 01782, Record Documents. 3.6 SPARE PARTS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish and deliver the spare parts and test equipment as outlined below, identical

and interchangeable with similar parts furnished under this Specification. Comply with the requirements of Section 01783, Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.

B. Pack spare parts in containers suitable for long term storage, bearing labels clearly

designating the contents and the pieces of equipment for which they are intended. C. The following constitutes the minimum spare parts:

1. Provide one of each type of module and power supply.

D. The following constitutes the minimum test and calibration equipment: 1. All tooling required to insert, extract and connect any internal or external

connector, including edge connectors. 2. All special calibration equipment required for system calibration.



26866 18822-1 12/21/2018

SECTION 18822

SECURITY GATE OPERATOR PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. Provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as required to

install new gate operators and battery backup system as shown on the Drawings and as specified.

3. Types of products required include the following: a. Gate operators and control systems. b. Auxiliary system components, accessories, fasteners and fittings.


A. Reference Standards. Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. ASTM A 53, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A 90, Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel

Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings. 3. ASTM A 123, Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products. 4. ASTM A 153, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. 5. ASTM A 428, Test Method for Weight of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron

or Steel Articles. 6. ASTM A 491, Specification for Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence

Fabric. 7. ASTM A 570, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled,

Structural Quality. 8. ASTM A 585, Specification for Aluminum-Coated Steel Barbed Wire. 9. ASTM A 653, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 10. ASTM A 780, Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-

Dip Galvanized Coatings. 11. ASTM A 817, Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Wire for Chain-Link

Fence Fabric. 12. ASTM A 824, Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension

Wire for Use with Chain Link Fence. 13. ASTM B 6, Specification for Zinc.


26866 18822-2 12/21/2018

14. ASTM D 412, Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.

15. ASTM D 746, Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact.

16. ASTM D 792, Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement.

17. ASTM D 1499, Practice for Operating Light- and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type) for Exposure of Plastics.

18. ASTM D 2240, Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. 19. ASTM E 329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or

Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. 20. ASTM E 548, Guide for General Criteria Used for Evaluating Laboratory

Competence. 21. ASTM F 552, Terminology Relating to Chain Link Fencing. 22. ASTM F 567, Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence. 23. ASTM F 626, Specification for Fence Fittings. 24. ASTM F 668, Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)-Coated Steel

Chain-Link Fence Fabric. 25. ASTM F 900, Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. 26. ASTM F 1043, Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal

Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework. 27. ASTM F 1083, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated

(Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. 28. ASTM F 1184 - Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide

Gates. 29. ASTM F 1664, Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)-Coated Steel

Tension Wire Used With Chain-Link Fence. 30. ASTM F 1665, Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)-Coated Steel

Barbed Wire Used With Chain-Link Fence. 31. ASTM G 23, Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc

Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. 32. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), C2 - National

Electrical Safety Code. 33. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), 81 - Standard Guide

for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System.

34. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA ICS 1, Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements.

35. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA ICS 2, Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.

36. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA ICS 6, Industrial Control and Systems: Enclosures.

37. National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA MG 1, Motors and Generators.


26866 18822-3 12/21/2018

38. Chain Link Fence Manufacturer’s Institute (CLFMI), CLF 2445 - Product Manual.

39. Underwriters’ Laboratories, Incorporated, Standards for Safety, UL 467, Grounding and Bonding Equipment.

40. The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (Public Law 101-336), Appendix A to Title 28 Code of Federal Regulations Part 36 (Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities - ADAAG).

41. Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction by the Maricopa Association of Governments.

1. UL 325, Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and System.

C. The gate operator shall be installed according to manufacturers’

recommendations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Copies of manufacturer’s technical product information, specifications and

installation instructions for all system components such as gate operators and motors, security, loop detectors, and communications.

2. Furnish gate operating instructions and motor nameplate data, ratings, and other characteristics.

3. All structural calculations verifying that all system components comply with the requirements of the Specifications.

4. Large scale details drawn at a scale of 3-inches equals one foot for all connections and gate details, including motor mounting arrangements.

5. Drawings at a scale of 1/4-inch equals one foot of typical fence assembly, identifying all gate swing, slide, or other operation, hardware, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, with required installation and operating clearances, and details of post anchorage, attachments and bracing.

6. Gate Operator: Show locations and details for installing operator components, switches, and controls. Indicate motor size, electrical characteristics, drive arrangement, mounting, and grounding provisions.

7. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring, communication and access control features. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and site-installed wiring and between components provided by gate operator manufacturer and those provided by others.

8. Qualifications Data: Submit qualifications data for the following: a. Erector. b. Test agency.

9. A list of all hardware, fasteners and accessories.


26866 18822-4 12/21/2018

10. Maintenance Manual for Motorized Gate Operators: Provide five copies of manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance practices. Include the following information: a. Product name and number. b. Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer and local

distributor. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for repairs.

B. Test Reports: Submit the following:

1. Factory test results indicating the operator's operation sequencing and electrical integrity.

C. Certificates: Submit the following:

1. Verification that gate operators comply with the OWNER'S requirements for safety and emergency access.

2. Verification that electrical components, devices, and accessories are listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to the OWNER and are marked for intended use.

D. Warranty: Submit the following:

1. Warranty for gate operators. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Packaging and marking shall comply with CLF 2445. 2. Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened packaging with all

factory-applied tags, labels and other identifying information intact, legible and accurately representing material approved on Shop Drawings by ENGINEER.

3. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

4. Deliver materials to the site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. B. Storage of Materials:

1. Store all materials under weatherproof cover, off the ground and away from other construction activities.

2. Do not store material in a manner that would create a humidity chamber. Provide for free movement of air under protective cover and between components.

C. Handling of Materials:


26866 18822-5 12/21/2018

1. Handle material in a manner that is in compliance with product institute standards and that will prevent damaging coatings.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: The special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive OWNER of other rights or remedies OWNER may otherwise have under the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranties:

1. Furnish manufacturer's written five-year warranty for gate operators. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GATE OPERATORS

A. Product and Manufacturer: Provide the following: 1. Hy-Security Model Series 222DX. 2. Hy-Security Model Series 222EX.

B. General: Provide factory-assembled automatic gate operation system designed for

gate size, type, weight, construction, use, traffic-flow patterns, and operation frequency. Provide operation system for gate specified and shown on the Drawings, of size and capacity and with features, characteristics, and accessories suitable for Project conditions, recommended and provided by gate manufacturer complete with electric motor and factory pre-wired motor controls, remote-control stations, control devices, power disconnect switch, obstruction detection device, lockable weatherproof enclosures protecting controls and all operating parts, and accessories required for proper operation. Provide enclosures with corrosion--resistant-protective and decorative finish and two keys for each lock. Include wiring from motor controls to motor. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical characteristics with Project electrical system. 1. Provide operator designed so motor may be removed without disturbing

limit-switch adjustment and without affecting auxiliary emergency operator. 2. Provide operator in compliance with the OWNER'S requirements. 3. Provide electronic components with built-in troubleshooting diagnostic

feature. 4. Provide units designed and wired for both right-hand/left-hand opening,

permitting universal installation.

C. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6.


26866 18822-6 12/21/2018

D. Electromechanical Operation: Provide unit designed for concrete base/pad mounting; consisting of electric motor and factory pre-wired motor controls, starter, speed control device, brake, clutch or torque limiter, with enclosed worm gear reducer, wheel and rail drive.

E. Operation Cycle Requirements: Provide gate operator designed to operate for not

less than the following duty and cycles per hour. 1. Medium-Duty: Ten cycles per hour. 1. Heavy-Duty: Twenty-five cycles per hour. 1. Peak-Duty: Twenty cycles per hour at peak periods. 1. 50 cycles per hour

F. Gate Operation Speed:

1. 2 feet per second, minimum.

G. Electric Motors: High-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, insulated electric motors, complying with NEMA MG 1, sized to start and operate size and weight of gate considering Project's service conditions, without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 1. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Enclosure: Totally enclosed, nonventilated or fan-cooled motors, fitted with

plugged drain. 3. Thermal Protection: Internal manual reset. 4. Motors 1/2 hp and Larger: 3-phase, 240, 60 Hz. 4. Motors 1/2 hp and Larger: 24 VDC with UPS backup.

H. Remote Controls: Provide electric controls separated from gate and motor and

drive mechanism, with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure for concrete base/pad mounting, and with space for additional optional equipment. Provide the following remote-control devices: 1. Control Station: Keyed, three-position, switch-operated control station with

open and close functions and spring return to off position with stop button. Provide two keys for each station.

2. Telephone Entry System: Hands-free voice-communication system for connection to building telephone system with digital-entry code activation of gate operator. a. Multi-unit System: Designed to be wired to a dedicated telephone line,

with capacity to access 20 telephones and with electronic directory. 3. Vehicle Loop Detector System: Provide a complete system including

automatic closing timer with adjustable time delay before closing and loop detector designed to open and close gate and hold gate open until traffic clears. Provide electronic detector, with adjustable detection patterns, adjustable sensitivity and frequency settings, and panel indicator light designed to detect presence or transit of a vehicle over an embedded loop of wire and to emit a signal activating the gate operator. Provide number of


26866 18822-7 12/21/2018

loops consisting of multiple strands of wire, number of turns, loop size, and method of placement at location shown on the Drawings, as recommended, in writing, by detection system manufacturer for function indicated. a. Loop: Wire, in size indicated for on-site assembly, and sealant; style for

pave-over installation. a. Loop: Factory-preformed in size indicated; style for pave-over

installation.

I. Obstruction Detection Devices: Provide each motorized gate with automatic safety sensor(s). Activation of sensor causes operator to immediately function as follows: 1. Action: Reverse gate in both opening and closing cycles and hold until clear

of obstruction. 2. Internal Sensor: Built-in torque or current monitor senses gate is obstructed. 3. Sensor Edge: Contact-pressure-sensitive safety edge, profile, and sensitivity

designed for type of gate and component indicated, located on gate as follows. Connect to control circuit using gate edge transmitter and operator receiver system. a. Along entire gate leaf leading edge. b. Along entire gate leaf trailing edge. c. Across entire gate leaf bottom edge. d. Along entire length of gate posts. e. Along entire length of gate guide posts.

4. Photoelectric/Infrared Sensor System: Provide a complete system designed to detect an obstruction in gate leaf path by interruption of an infrared beam in the zone pattern without permitting obstruction to contact gate.

J. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to

automatically stop gate at fully retracted and fully extended positions. K. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick disconnect release of operator drive

system of the following type of mechanism, permitting manual operation if operator fails. Provide system configured such that control circuit power is disconnected during manual operation. 1. Type: Integral fail-safe release, allowing gate to be pushed open without

mechanical devices, keys, cranks, or special knowledge.

L. Operating Features: Include the following: 1. Digital Microprocessor Control: Electronic programmable means for setting,

changing, and adjusting control features with capability of monitoring and auditing gate activity. Provide unit that is isolated from voltage spikes and surges.

2. Fully Systems Compatible: With controlling circuit board capable of accepting any type of input from external devices.


26866 18822-8 12/21/2018

3. Master/Slave Capability: Control stations configured and wired for gate pair operation.

4. Automatic Closing Timer: Provide circuitry with adjustable time delay before closing and with timer cut-off switch.

5. Open Override Circuit: Provide circuitry configured to override closing commands.

6. Reversal Time Delay: Provide time delay circuitry to protect gate system from shock load on reversal in both directions.

7. Maximum Run Timer: Configure circuitry to prevent damage to gate system by shutting down system if normal time to open gate is exceeded.

8. Clock Timer: Seven-day programmable for regular events.

M. Accessories: Include the following: 1. Mounting kit including pedestal. 2. Audio Warning Module: Provide ADA-compliant audible alarm sounding

three to five seconds in advance of gate operation and continuing until gate stops moving.

3. Visual Warning Module: Provide ADA-compliant visible light alarm sounding three to five seconds in advance of gate operation and continuing until gate stops moving.

5. External electric-powered lock with delay timer allowing time for lock to release before gate operates. b. Type: Magnetic for slide gate.

6. Fire box. 7. Fire Strobe sensor. 8. Instructional, Safety, and Warning Labels and Signs: Manufacturer's standard

for components and features specified in section 10400 – Identification Devices.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION AND ERECTION

A. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of portland cement complying with ASTM

C 150, aggregates complying with ASTM C 33, and clean water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength 2500 pounds per square inch, using at least four sacks of cement per cubic yard, 1-inch maximum size aggregate, maximum 3-inch slump, and 2-percent to 4-percent entrained air.

B. Concrete Strength: Allow concrete to attain at least 75 percent of its minimum

28-day compressive strength. C. Gate Operators:

1. Mount and adjust operator and UPS DC Power System on concrete pad. 2. Connect to gate and adjust for proper operation.


26866 18822-9 12/21/2018

3. Install ENGINEER approved shade structure for UPS system. 4. Refer to Division 16, Electrical, for electrical connections. 5. Refer to Division 18, Security Systems, for access control connections.

3.2 SITE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Acceptance Testing: 1. Test and adjust automatic gate operators, controls, alarms, safety devices,

hardware, limit switches and other operable components. Replace damaged or malfunctioning operable components. a. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. b. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper

motor rotation and unit operation. Test controls, alarms, and safeties. 2. Remove damaged and malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and

retest. B. Manufacturer’s Services:

1. A factory trained representative shall be provided for installation supervision, start-up and test services and operation and maintenance personnel training services. The representative shall make a minimum of 2 visits, minimum 6 hours on-site for each visit, to the site. The first visit shall be for assistance in the installation of equipment. The second visit shall be for checking the completed installation and start-up of the system. Manufacturer's representative shall test the system in the presence of the ENGINEER and verify that the operator conforms to all requirements. Manufacturer's representative shall revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the installation is entirely satisfactory.

2. All costs, including travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, shall be considered as included in CONTRACTOR'S bid price.



26866 18910-1 1/24/2019

SECTION 18910

INTEGRATED SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Scope: 1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as necessary to

perform the security work as shown on drawings and as specified. 2. The Drawings and Specifications do not necessarily include every item of

work. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications that all software, equipment and devices, furnished and installed under this Contract, be properly connected and interconnected with other equipment and devices so as to render the installations complete for successful operation, regardless of whether all the connections and interconnections are specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings.

3. Device locations shown on drawings are schematic. All equipment locations, including cameras, controllers, I/O boards, servers, workstations, and all alarm and CCTV devices shall be field verified with the ENGINEER and/or OWNER.

B. Definitions:

1. ACS – Access Control System 2. CCTV – Closed Circuit Television 3. Connect – install all necessary patch cords or other wiring necessary to

complete installation 4. Security System Subcontractor – Security system integrator/installer, the

successful bidder on this project 5. IDS – Intrusion Detection System 6. LAN – Local Area Network 7. DVMS – Digital Video Management System 8. OWNER – City of Phoenix Water Services Department 9. Provide – to furnish, install, connect, test, and turn over to the OWNER,

complete and ready for operation 10. PTZ – Pan Tilt Zoom 11. SCADA – Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 12. SMS – Security Management System 13. WAN – Wide Area Network

C. System Intent – Electronic Security Component:

1. It is the intent of this project to have the CONTRACTOR provide a fully integrated, turnkey security system. The electronic security component generally consists of the following elements:


26866 18910-2 1/24/2019

a. Access Control System (ACS) b. CCTV / Digital Video Management System (CCTV / DVMS) c. Perimeter Intrusion Detection System (IDS) d. Interior Intrusion Detection

2. The ACS shall act as the overall Security Management System (SMS). It is therefore critical that the system be capable of performing the following functions: a. The ability to integrate at a controller level via software with other

components of the security system. This means that the SMS shall accept and provide instructions over serial and/or Ethernet data interfaces at the network controller level from the other systems. The SMS shall be capable of operating independently of the servers and workstations. The loss of a server or workstation shall not in any way degrade the functionality of the system. All interfaces between the systems shall be performed at the network controller level. All alarms shall continue to be received at the workstations via SNMP traps in the event of loss of communication with the server.

3. The SMS shall include devices and equipment to monitor and control access to restricted areas, detect and deny unauthorized entries within specific buildings or areas, annunciate alarms and generate reports. Once incorporated with the day-to-day operations of the designated facility, this system shall detect and deter unauthorized entry into restricted areas. The SMS shall be designed and configured to provide operational flexibility and reliable performance.

4. The SMS shall consist of equipment and devices placed at predetermined locations to ensure that only cardholders who are authorized to enter secured areas through certain doors or gates can do so. This shall be accomplished by means of a computer and electronic devices used in conjunction with door locks, gate systems, card readers, and/or closed circuit television, and/or intrusion detection equipment.

5. The SMS shall integrate access control, intrusion detection, CCTV, and DVMS into one coherent Security System capable of being controlled from any workstation on the system, including off site workstations. The various elements of the SMS (access control, CCTV, intrusion detection) shall be capable of being controlled through one interface. The SMS shall have the capability to be fully monitored from either on site or off site workstations.

6. The SMS shall provide the capability to import alarms presently on SCADA systems directly into an SMS controller. These alarms shall no longer reside on the SCADA system. This shall be accomplished by mounting a controller adjacent to the SCADA PLC presently hosting these alarms, and re-terminating the alarms in the controller.


26866 18910-3 1/24/2019


A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. UL 294 Access Control Systems. 3. UL 1076 Line Supervision. 4. FCC Rules and Regulations. 5. Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices. 6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 7. Applicable Federal, State and Local laws, regulations, codes. 8. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). 9. UL 497 Protectors for Paired Conductors Communications Circuit. 10. UL 444 Communications Cables. 11. UL 1863 Communications Circuit Accessories. 12. UL 1034 Burglary Resistant Electric locking Mechanisms. 13. UL 1066 Low Voltage AC & DC Power Circuit Breakers Used in

Enclosures. 14. UL 1778 Uninterrupted Power Supply Equipment. 15. UL 1998 Software in Programmable Components.

B. Permits and Inspections:

1. Material and workmanship shall conform to all applicable legal and code requirements, and as specified in the Contract Documents.

2. Perform all tests required to demonstrate conformance with the Contract Documents.

C. Job Conditions:

1. Ensure that all conduits, junction boxes, outlets, and other openings are kept covered to prevent foreign matter entry.

2. Ensure all equipment is kept safe from dirt, water, or other materials that could damage it during construction.

3. The installation is to be supervised on a regular basis by a person designated by the CONTRACTOR. This person shall be authorized and shall be competent to be in charge of the project.

D. This section does not detract in any way with Quality Assurance Provisions of

Section 18005, Integrated Security Management System General Requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit all items in accordance with the requirements of Section 18005, Integrated Security Management System General Requirements and shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. Model numbers of all components furnished on the job. 2. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions.


26866 18910-4 1/24/2019

3. Manufacturer’s catalog data sheets for all components. 4. Input power requirements for all components. 5. Complete engineered drawings indicating:

a. Layout, wiring diagrams and dimensions. b. Point-to-point wiring diagrams for all devices. c. Termination details for all devices. d. Single-line system architecture drawings representing the entire system.

6. Testing Procedures 7. Warranty.

B. Complete documentation shall be provided with the system. The documentation

shall completely describe all operations, each program, data sets and the hardware and peripherals. All updates, addendum and adjustments to the documentation shall be provided at no additional charge, in the same quantities as originally required. Ten copies of the following documents shall be provided to the OWNER: 1. System Administrator Manual - Overview and step by step guide and

instructions detailing all System Administrator responsibility and authority. 2. User Manual - Step by step guide and instructions detailing all system user

functions and responsibilities. 3. Alarm Monitoring Manual - Step by step guide and instructions detailing all

alarm monitoring system user functions and responsibilities. 4. Technical Maintenance Manual - Shall be a comprehensive and detailed

document providing all maintenance action, system testing schedules, troubleshooting flowcharts, functional system layout and block diagrams and schematic diagrams of all system wiring.

5. Complete backup of all initial system programming shall be provided with the system documentation.

1.4 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide off-line maintenance aids and on-line diagnostics to check the performance of the SMS interfaces and devices.

1.5 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE

A. Refer to Section 18007, Integrated Security Management System Start-up Commissioning and Field Testing.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Guarantee all labor, workmanship and materials for a period of 1 year from the date of final acceptance. Should a failure occur within the first year to the SMS or any of its components, provide all labor and materials necessary to perform system diagnostics to isolate the source of the failure and restore the system and its components to a complete operating condition, at no cost to the OWNER.


26866 18910-5 1/24/2019

B. Honor any extended warranties provided by the equipment manufacturers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL SECURITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (SMS) REQUIREMENTS

A. General Requirements: 1. SMS shall be furnished complete, installed, programmed, tested, and

operational. The SMS shall be installed properly to secure the designated OWNER facilities. The work to be provided, in addition to integrating, furnishing and installing the SMS, shall include the following: a. Provide software that meets specified contract requirements and the

necessary programming of the software. b. This software shall be integrated into the existing Enterprise Wide

Security Management System. c. Verify that proposed equipment and devices furnished are adequate for

the intended purpose. d. Perform a layout check to ensure that adequate access is available for

construction, installation and maintenance of equipment and devices furnished.

e. Perform acceptance testing to show the system is properly installed and that it meets the specifications, drawings and applicable codes.

f. Upon final acceptance of the completed system, the OWNER Systems Administrator shall be responsible for further programming and system administration functions.

g. Provide all necessary system utilities for the System Administrator to use for further programming and system administration functions.

h. Provide all necessary software for backups and log file maintenance. 2. Base System: Provide the SMS, as shown on the drawing and specifications

herein, including but not limited to the following: a. Alarm Monitoring and Display Workstation(s). b. File Server. c. Workstation Peripherals. d. Access Control and Alarm Monitoring Controllers. e. Network Controllers. f. Site Network Controllers. g. LON I/O Modules. h. Field Hardware Devices. i. Software Modules Required for Specification Operation.

3. Provide accurate GIS maps of the entire project site and integrate the GIS maps into the DVMS systems.

4. All SMS applications provided by the CONTRACTOR shall be easy, quick and efficient to use. The system shall combine keyboard and mouse operations with graphical presentations of screen information. Each


26866 18910-6 1/24/2019

application shall provide consistent user interfaces across all operations of the system.

5. Provide a SMS configuration that uses practical methods of generating help options, standard terminology, and drop down menus. All routine information displayed and requiring input shall be in English language prose. No operation shall require the interpretation of machine code and/or the use of mnemonics.

B. SMS Functional Requirements – The following SMS functional requirements

include system configuration requirements that need to be performed by the CONTRACTOR; as well as, general requirements of the existing enterprise wide SMS components that the CONTRACTOR needs to know in order to properly integrate and configure the facilities SMS components into the overall enterprise wide SMS architecture: 1. Basic System Characteristics:

a. This system shall be based on the capabilities of Andover Controls Continuum Security Management System and the CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary upgrades to the Andover Controls Continuum Security Management System to achieve the level of integration and functional requirements identified in this specification.

b. The SMS shall provide for full intelligent integration via open architecture through the use of processor based control hardware and field controller, file server, and workstation based software for Access Control, Intrusion detection, CCTV/DVMS integration and photo imaging.

c. This SMS shall provide a true multi-tasking, multi-workstation client-server arrangement based on PC-based client platforms running Windows XP operating system or approved equivalent and PC-based server(s) running Microsoft Windows Server and Microsoft’s SQL Server or approved equivalent.

d. The SMS client-server arrangement shall communicate with native TCP/IP Primary Network Controllers over an Ethernet TCP/IP enterprise network.

2. Perimeter Breach: a. The perimeter of the site shall be protected by a combination of

technologies, including fence cable, buried cable, optical beams, and video motion detection. A breach on the fence line or at the gate activates the perimeter intrusion detection system. The perimeter breach shall activate the DVMS systems.

b. The SMS controller shall interpret the event, and send information to the alarm monitoring station, to record the event.

c. The event to the DVMS shall activate specific pre-programmed cameras in the immediate vicinity of the detected breach to pan, tilt, and zoom to observe the breach. There may be multiple cameras for each area considered.


26866 18910-7 1/24/2019

d. The DVMS shall engage its own video motion detection and, if applicable, shall create an alarm. This alarm shall also be sent to the monitoring workstation(s) for assessment and response.

e. The operator shall be capable of taking over full control of the CCTV system when an alarm occurs through the graphical user interface on the monitoring workstations, but if another alarm is received the system shall have priority over the CCTV controls.

f. The zones of the perimeter intrusion system shall be configured to be armed or disarmed either on schedule or with an authorized card swipe via the ACS.

g. The perimeter intrusion alarm system shall be configured to identify a breach to the perimeter within ten (10) feet of the occurrence on chain link fence. The location of this breach shall be displayed on the map with the SMS workstation graphics.

3. Access Control Alarms: a. The ACS component shall operate in such a fashion that any access

event or alarm can be noted by the monitoring personnel, as well as forwarded via numerous technologies specified herein.

b. The CCTV integration capability, through the serial and/or Ethernet interface, shall instruct the DVMS to operate cameras in such a way as to provide images of the event, offer command and control, and playback review including full function control of the camera, through the DVMS system.

4. Internal Building Alarms: a. Certain areas of the site shall have internal alarms in the form of door

contacts, motion detectors (PIR) and glass break sensors. b. The SMS shall be used to receive and process all internal building

alarms, without using a separate third party intrusion alarm panel, and the SMS shall be used to note and respond to all internal building alarms, as required by the OWNER.

c. The SMS shall be capable of arming and disarming zones with either a valid card swipe, a schedule, or alternatively via an integrated card reader/keypad unit.

d. The system shall also be capable of arming and disarming on schedule. 5. Gates:

a. Exterior perimeter gates at the site are intended to require card readers to enter and exit, with the capability to employ antipassback procedures.

6. Off Site System Monitoring: a. The system shall have the capability of being monitored by off site

OWNER staff and on site OWNER staff with a notebook computer running the SMS software application.

b. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with City of Phoenix Information Technology Services and Water Services Department to obtain the appropriate type of communications link to offsite OWNER locations.

c. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all necessary connections to the City of Phoenix, Information Technology Services


26866 18910-8 1/24/2019

provided communication devices. This includes furnishing and installing instrumentation cables between City of Phoenix, Information Technology Services provided communications devices and CONTRACTOR provided security system LAN devices on site, as well as furnishing and installing instrumentation cables between City of Phoenix, Information Technology Services provided communications devices and security system monitoring devices that are provided by others at off site locations, as needed, to integrate the site security system with the existing enterprise wide SMS components located off site.

d. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all necessary system configurations (on site and off site) to allow the off site locations to properly monitor the on site security system.

7 Access Control: a. Access Privileges - All cardholders shall have facility access based on

privileges assigned by controlled area, time and date. For example, some badges shall only allow access to the facility on weekdays between 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., while others allow access on weekends between 1 p.m. to 5 p.m. and so on. These time zones for each day are to be pre-defined by COP and shall have the ability to be modified quickly by authorized employees without vendor intervention. There shall be an unlimited number of user-definable access privileges.

b. Holidays - The holidays application shall allow the System Administrator to create holiday schedules that designate individual days as holidays, or special days to cover vacations, maintenance shutdowns, or other events, indefinitely into the future. Holidays or special days can signal that the system shall operate on a schedule different from the normal schedule. The system shall not limit the number of holiday or special schedules that can be created.

c. Time / Date - The time and date of the system shall be set by a centralized time synchronization system set up by the City of Phoenix. Dates for Daylight Savings Time shall automatically take effect by time zones. Holiday schedules shall be capable of overriding normal schedules in effect.

d. Global Data Exchange and Operating Strategies - The SMS shall provide global data exchange and operating strategies. The system shall allow any input point configured in the system (i.e., door tamper, duress, etc.) to permit activation of any control output point, such as a relay(s) that opens a door and/or sounds an alarm. The logic shall be developed using an application programming language that shall be capable of incorporating other parameters such as date and time; it shall not be limited by a fixed number of rules, or the simple linking of inputs to outputs. The global operating strategies feature shall provide the ability to drive any system output or outputs from single or multiple inputs, access events, alarms, etc. Each output point shall be controllable by the system and be configurable individually for the following responses:


26866 18910-9 1/24/2019

e. Output relays (and groups) shall be capable of responding to: 1) Input alarms from any I/O module or card reader point in the

system, or any combination thereof. 2) Access events. 3) Date and time parameters.

f. Output relays (and groups) shall be capable of: 1) Pulsing for a predetermined duration; duration shall be

programmable for each relay individually. 2) "Following" any input point from any I/O module, or card reader

input in the system (on with alarm, off when clear, or as required). 3) Locking On with alarm, requiring user intervention to reset the

output relay. 4) The system shall permit output relays to be ordered on, off, pulsed

or reset back to a default setting. 8. Shunt Time:

a. Shunt Time feature shall be provided to allow users to program, at the door level, a length of time to hold a door open without creating an alarm condition at the monitoring workstation. The shunt time feature shall be usable by any cardholder with an active badge and appropriate access rights. Valid open times shall range from 0-9999 seconds. If the door fails to close prior to the expiration of the shunt period, a "door held open" alarm shall occur at the system's monitoring workstation. If the door is closed prior to the expiration of the shunt period, the door position switch shall become active immediately, allowing a “door forced open” alarm to be annunciated in the event of an intrusion.

9. Area Control: a. The SMS shall provide five (5) area control features: Hard Anti-

passback, Soft Anti-passback, Timed Anti-passback, Multiple-Man Rule, and Occupancy Limit. Area control shall be a security method of preventing a person from passing their badge to another person for dual entry into a location utilizing one card. 1) Hard Anti-passback - The Hard Anti-passback feature shall require

that a badge always be used to enter and exit an area. Areas shall be logically defined under the SMS, and area control shall not be required at all areas of OWNER facility to be utilized. The system shall allow persons whose cards are appropriately configured to be exempt from this feature as configured by the System Administrator.

2) Soft Anti-passback - The Soft Anti-passback feature shall require that a badge be used to enter and exit an area, but access shall not be denied if the badge was not presented in the correct order. The system shall automatically generate an anti-passback violation event and can trigger an alarm to be generated. The controlled areas shall have both entry and exit readers at all portals. When a cardholder uses a card reader for entrance, and has not swiped out, an anti-passback alarm shall notify the user. Areas shall be logically


26866 18910-10 1/24/2019

defined under the SMS, and area control shall not be required at all areas of the facility to be utilized. The system shall allow persons whose cards are appropriately configured to be exempt from this feature as configured by the System Administrator.

3) Timed Anti-passback - This anti-passback feature shall allow the System Administrator to decide how long after a cardholder has swiped will they have to wait before the same card will be accepted again at the same reader, or globally at any other reader defined in the area. This helps prevent multiple swipes by an individual to allow access to others through turnstile doors.

4) Multiple-Man Rule - shall be provided through application programming to restrict access to certain areas unless there is more than one cardholder present. Individual exit shall be permitted until the required number of people to originally gain access is reached, at which point the Multiple-Man Rule applies for exiting.

5) Occupancy Limit - Occupancy Limit shall restrict the number of cardholders that will be present in an area at any given time. The Occupancy Limit shall be able to be defined by the System Administrator for each controlled area. Each area for which Occupancy Limit is enabled shall be definable at all controlled areas equipped with entry and exit card readers.

10. Remote Dial-Up and Internet Communications: a. The SMS network/site controllers and DVMS components at the site

shall be capable of being connected to the enterprise wide SMS components located off site via a secure dial-up communications link and a WAN communications link. The SMS shall allow a modem on a remote SMS workstation to communicate with site components via a serial/ethernet connection to the network controller(s) at the site.

b. The enterprise wide SMS components located off site shall initiate communications to the network and site controllers under the following conditions: 1) Upon user request. 2) At preconfigured intervals. 3) When access control configuration changes are made. 4) When changes in cardholders are made affecting the remote field

controllers. c. The NET controller(s) at the facility shall initiate communications to the

remote enterprise wide SMS component under any of the following conditions: 1) At preconfigured intervals. 2) When specific events occur on the field hardware. 3) When the event buffer reaches a configured percentage of capacity. 4) When specific event/alarm types occur (e.g.: access denied).

d. One (1) standard dial-up telephone line per remote site shall be required and will be provisioned by the OWNER, regardless of the number of network/site controllers and I/O modules.


26866 18910-11 1/24/2019

11. Manual Control: a. A user shall have the ability to easily dictate manual control of all output

points connected to the system via color graphic maps. Control points are defined as any door strike or any other relay output point of an I/O module. The System Administrator shall have the option to group these outputs to simplify common output command procedures.

b. All system outputs shall display upon command from the user in a list window or graphic map. The list of commands shall be operational without interfering with alarm monitoring operations. If an output is ordered to a setting, and is also on time zone control, the last command shall always override.

c. All manual control commands shall be recorded into the activity log for viewing by any user given proper privileges to do so.

d. Manual control for doors, or any relay output, shall allow the user to disable the door/output (to not accept any cards), unlock the door/output (leaving the door strike unlocked), pulse the door/output open or reset the door/output to a pre-defined default setting.

12. Arm-Disarm: a. The user shall have the ability to determine the current status (armed or

disarmed) as well as the current state (alarm/normal/fault) of an input point from an input list view at any time.

b. The user shall have a “Status” item in the list view. Both the current status and state shall be reflected by the color of the respective columns in the list view.

c. Arm-Disarm shall be accomplished by a user through a simple click of the mouse on the individual point. Once a user arms an input point, events from the respective area permit the display of alarms at an alarm monitoring workstation from that point forward.

d. All input points shall be grouped for ease of operation into arm-disarm groups.

e. Arm-Disarm list views shall be viewable at any time. 13. Alarm Management:

a. The SMS software shall be capable of accepting alarms directly from controllers, or generating alarms based on polling of data in controllers and comparing to limits or conditional equations configured through the software. Any alarm (regardless of its origination) shall be integrated into the overall alarm management system and shall appear in all standard alarm reports, be available for user acknowledgment, and have the option for displaying graphics, or reports. Alarm management features include: 1) Minimum of 255-alarm notification levels. Each notification level

shall establish a unique set of parameters for controlling alarm display, acknowledgment, keyboard annunciation, alarm printout and record keeping.

2) Automatic logging in the database of the alarm message, point name, point value, connected controller, timestamp, username, time


26866 18910-12 1/24/2019

of acknowledgement, and time of alarm silence (soft acknowledgement).

3) Automatic printing of the alarm information or alarm report to an alarm printer or report printer.

4) Sounding of an audible beep or playing an audio (.wav) or displaying a video (.avi) file on alarm initiation or return to normal.

5) Sending an email and/or alphanumeric page to anyone listed in a workstation’s email account address list on either the initial occurrence of an alarm and/or if the alarm is repeated because a user has not acknowledged the alarm within a user-configurable timeframe.

6) The ability to utilize email and alphanumeric paging of alarms shall be a standard feature of the software integrated with the operating system’s mail application interface (MAPI). No special software interfaces shall be required.

7) Sending a text message to an alphanumeric pager compliant with the TAPI protocol.

8) Individual alarms shall be able to be re-routed to a workstation or workstations at user-specified times and dates. For example, an invalid card read alarm can be configured to be routed to a system administrator workstation during normal working hours (7am-6pm, Mon-Fri) and to a Central Alarming workstation at all other times.

9) An active alarm viewer shall be configured for each user or user type to hide or display any alarm attribute, including the following: a) Date / Time of Alarm. b) Name of Alarm. c) Priority of Alarm. d) Type of Alarm. e) Alarm Message. f) User Text Input. g) User Action Drop-down list. h) Acknowledged by. i) Date / Time of Acknowledge. j) Silenced By. k) Date / Time of Silence.

b. The font type and color, and background color for each alarm notification level as seen in the active alarm viewer shall be customizable to allow easy identification of certain alarm types or alarm states.

c. The active alarm viewer shall be configured for critical alarms such that a user is required to type in text in an alarm entry field and/or pick from the user action drop-down list. This ensures accountability (audit trail) for the response to critical alarms.

d. The user shall have the ability to Soft Acknowledge (Silence) or Acknowledge the alarm, each of these actions shall be logged and date/time stamped.


26866 18910-13 1/24/2019

e. Each alarm shall be configured to be acknowledged under the following: 1) Acknowledge all of the same alarm type. 2) Acknowledge all of the same alarm types until a specified time. 3) Acknowledge only highlighted alarm.

f. The user shall have the ability to configure how alarms are removed from the active alarm view based on the following: 1) Acknowledged. 2) Return to Normal. 3) Acknowledged or Return to Normal. 4) Acknowledged and Return to Normal. 5) Acknowledged after Return to Normal.

g. The user shall have the ability to highlight a specific alarm and select a button to display an associated graphic map, or select a button to display an associated report.

h. Each alarm event shall be configured as either Single Entry or Multi-Entry. Alarm events that occur for the same point going into and out of the active alarm state may be designated as Single Entry and displayed in the active alarm view once only. Each time the alarm occurs, the time/date stamp of the single entry shall update in the active alarm view. In addition, each individual alarm event shall be logged into history with all respective times of occurrence. Alarm events designated as Multi-Entry shall be shown in the active alarm view and in the alarm history log for each occurrence.

i. Other alarms shall be displayed by the system while any alarm is being addressed. If another alarm occurs, the alarm pending counter shall increase by one, the new alarm shall enter into the alarm list box prioritized in an order as defined by the System Administrator.

14. The SMS shall allow journals to be retrieved, viewed and edited on screen. Journals shall be saved to DVD during back-ups for a permanent record as required by OWNER regulations.

15. Current Status Indication - The active alarm view shall provide a status indicator that displays the current status of alarms and field controllers. Selecting the graphic icon shall provide the user with a detailed list of the groups of devices offering a dynamic list view of the current status of the respective points.

16. Cardholder Record Call-up - The enterprise wide SMS components have the ability to allow a user to initiate the call-up of a cardholder record. This feature is provided at all Alarm and Display Monitoring Workstations to assist the user in determining access rights for an employee who may have forgotten his or her badge.

17. Utilizing a database search via the input of the cardholder's name, or other key search fields, the enterprise wide SMS components have the ability to provide access of the employee's personal file, containing pertinent information and the employee's image for identification by the user. This operation does not restrict the operation of monitoring alarms.

18. CCTV/Image Comparison:


26866 18910-14 1/24/2019

a. The recall of photo images taken by the SMS may be displayed in response to a card read alarm (e.g.: access denied, out of time zone, no access to area, badge voided, etc.), or any condition for that matter, at any user workstation. This shall be accomplished by selecting the event desired and displaying the record of the cardholder selected.

b. The enterprise wide SMS components shall be configured to automatically call-up a camera located near the card reader in alarm, implement the appropriate camera pre-set position, and display the live CCTV image on the workstation, or an adjacent video monitor for user comparison of the images.

d. This shall allow immediate user comparison of the cardholder at the reader and the image on record for the card number.

e. The enterprise wide SMS components shall be configured to provide a SMS user with the option to pulse the door/gate open, for the cardholder from this SMS workstation application window.

19. Cardholder or Card Reader Trace - The enterprise wide SMS components have the ability to allow a user to initiate several cardholder traces and/or card readers while monitoring alarms. This information is continuously accumulated in the trace window until the trace is stopped. The trace operations does not interfere with the operation of the alarm monitoring, and is continuous while alarms are monitored. Each trace operates independently, such that one trace may stop and start without interfering with another. A list of the last 25 access event transactions may be available in each personnel record.

20. Automatic User Logoff - The system shall automatically log the user out of the application after a specified period of inactivity, including keyboard input and mouse movement. The user shall have to log back into the system to handle an alarm. This feature shall be configurable on a workstation-by-workstation basis by the system administrator.

21. CCTV/DVMS Interface: a. The SMS shall be configured for automated control via an interface with

the Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) System and Digital Video Management System (DVMS) installed. When the SMS receives an alarm from any monitoring point connected to the system, the SMS shall send any required number of control commands relating to that alarm point to the DVMS System. These commands shall instruct a CCTV camera view to be displayed on the Workstation or the programmed monitor. The SMS shall be configured for the following signals to be sent per alarm input zone or card access alarm: 1) Receipt of alarm at the SMS Alarm Monitoring and Display

Workstation shall allow events to be viewed as alarms and shall initiate a sequence of events including the call-up of the camera to view the alarm area.

2) Alarm acknowledgment or clearing the alarm shall allow the camera to be setback to reset positions or normal operation automatically.


26866 18910-15 1/24/2019

b. The CCTV/DVMS system shall be configured to interface the ACS via a serial and/or Ethernet data link to an ACS Network Controller; as well as, a user Workstation/notebook computer via RS-232 or TCP/IP, as applicable.

22. Receipt of site alarms at the enterprise wide SMS Alarm Monitoring and Display Workstations shall allow events to be viewed as alarms, and shall initiate a sequence of events including the call-up of the camera to view the alarm area and starting of the DVMS to record the alarm event. Alarm acknowledgment or clearing the alarm shall allow the camera, monitor and DVMS to be setback to reset positions or normal operation automatically.

23. Scheduling: a. Time of day schedules shall be in a calendar style and shall be

programmable up to ten years in advance. Each standard day of the week and user-defined day types shall be able to be associated with a color so that when the schedule is viewed it is very easy, at-a-glance, to determine the schedule for a particular day even from the yearly view.

b. To change the schedule for a particular day, a user shall simply click on the day and then click on the day type.

c. Each schedule shall appear on the screen viewable as an entire year, month, week and day. A simple mouse click shall allow switching between views. It shall also be possible to scroll from one month to the next and view or alter any of the schedule times.

d. Schedules shall be assigned to specific controllers and stored in their local RAM memory.

e. Any changes made at a workstation shall be automatically updated to the corresponding schedule in the controller.

f. Schedules shall be downloaded to the respective controller on a weekly basis.

24. Cardholder Management and Enrollment: a. All Cardholder Management and Enrollment is provided by the other

system components that are not part of this project. b. The SMS shall be integrated to the Cardholder Management and

Enrollment Head End system. c. The SMS shall be capable of receiving and using all cardholder

information generated elsewhere on the Enterprise System. d. The SMS shall allow cardholder management from any workstation that

is part of the project. 25. Search Records:

a. The SMS shall allow the user to search for records and images using search criteria on any field(s) in the database.

b. The user shall be able to enter the search criteria for one or a combination of fields.

c. The user shall be able to perform partial searches by typing a wild card symbol (*) at the end of a partial string. For example, a partial string search on Smi* might return "Smiley," "Smith," or "Smitts." Using the wildcard symbol alone in a key field (i.e. typing an asterisk in and


26866 18910-16 1/24/2019

selecting the search function) shall return every record in the database which contains information in the respective field.

26. System Administration: a. The SMS workstation software uses Windows Explorer-style

configuration interface for a system administration user or programmer to view and/or edit any object (controller, point, alarm, report, schedule, etc.) in the entire system. This interface shall be configured to present a “network map” of all controllers and their associated points, programs, graphics, alarms, and reports in an easy to understand structure.

b. The workstation software configuration interface also includes support for template objects as follows: 1) Template objects shall be used as building blocks for the creation of

the SMS database. 2) The types of template objects supported shall include all data point

types (input, output, string variables, etc.), Personnel records, doors, alarm algorithms, alarm notification objects, reports, graphics displays, schedules, and programs.

3) Groups of template object types shall be set up as template systems and subsystems.

4) The template system shall prompt for data entry. The template system shall maintain a link to all “child” objects created by each template. If a user wishes to make a change to a template object, the software shall ask the user if he/she wants to update all of child objects with the change.

5) This template system shall facilitate configuration and programming consistency and afford the user a fast and simple method to make global changes to the SMS.

c. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the OWNER representatives when assigning object names and filename conventions to be consistent with other existing conventions in the enterprise wide system.

d. The SMS shall allow all objects (door, personnel record, alarm, etc.) to be created with a unique 128-character name to provide the user with a fully descriptive object identifier.

e. The system shall automatically create up to a 16-character alias from the object name to simplify the object's use in reports, applications, programs, and alarms, for example.

f. System administration is intended to be performed from the enterprise wide SMS components located off site.

27. Workstation and Password Privileges: a. Workstation and password privileges shall be coordinated with the

OWNER. 28. Create and Maintain Door Objects:

a. The CONTRACTOR shall create door/gate objects through the use of templates (as described in the System Configuration section) or by direct input by the user. The door object editor shall be tabular in design for easy navigation through the attribute fields.


26866 18910-17 1/24/2019

b. The SMS shall be configured to allow a user to do the following from the door record: 1) Document a description of the door. 2) View or change the door’s current state from unlocked to locked

and vice-versa. 3) Momentarily unlock the associated door. 4) View the state of the door switch. 5) Enable or disable the door state. 6) Specify up to four (4) acceptable site codes. 7) Designate a general PIN. 8) Choose between Wiegand or ABA card type and select the

appropriate bit format. 9) Associate door hardware wiring to the appropriate input/output

channels. 10) Specify whether the door shall lock or shall not lock upon closure. 11) Attach specific door unlock and door lock schedules. 12) Define anti-passback rules. 13) Define readers and attach associated controlled areas. 14) View a dynamically updated list of the last 25 events associated

with the door. 29. User Activity Logging:

a. The SMS system can provide full user activity tracking of all keyboard functions. The SMS shall be configured to record all changes to the database fields made by any user.

b. SMS shall log over 200 separate functions, including: 1) User Log-in and User Log-out. 2) Additions, Changes, and Deletions to Cardholder Management. 3) Temporary Pass Add and Delete. 4) Other critical database functions.

c. SMS shall be configured to log all activity including alarms, alarms acknowledged, cleared, output control activity, trace, and other functions associated with the site. The SMS shall log a minimum of 1,000,000 events before the system history overwrites the oldest data.

d. The SMS shall be configured to provide a user activity report to query the information available in the SMS System activity log. The report shall be sorted by workstation, user, date and time or other selection criteria. On those occasions when historical data shall be needed, the user activity report shall be generated from an archived log as well as from the active SMS database.

30. Screen Format Design: a. The screen format design for the site shall be consistent with other

remote sites. b. Sixty-four (64) user-defined data fields shall be available.

31. Integrated Development Environment: a. Each Alarm, Display, and Integrated workstation shall be equipped with

an integrated development environment (IDE) to allow only the Systems


26866 18910-18 1/24/2019

Administrators the ability to write, edit, and de-bug the application programs resident in the network and site controllers.

b. The IDE allows the display of multiple windows of application programs so Systems Administrators can quickly and easily “copy and paste” programming code using simple mouse clicks from one to another.

c. The IDE shall provide a tool set to allow users to quickly access libraries of commonly used object names, functions, values, and application programming keywords.

d. An IDE wizard shall be provided that permits the use of pre-written application programs and creation of new programs that prompt for key values and create the program code automatically.

32. Reports: a. The SMS shall have the capability to provide, as a minimum, the

following standard reports: 1) User Activity Log. 2) Alarm History Log. 3) Door Status Report. 4) Alarm Point Status Report. 5) Controller Status Report. 6) Workstation Status Report. 7) Event History Log. 8) Invalid Attempt Log. 9) Valid Access Log. 10) All Personnel Report. 11) Disabled Personnel Report. 12) Personnel By Department Report. 13) Personnel By Area Privileges Report. 14) Lost Card Report. 15) Input/Output Status Report. 16) Schedules Report. 17) Company Listing Report. 18) Termination Report. 19) Badge Pending Expiration Report. 20) Cards Not Used in X days (Deadbeat Report). 21) All Doors Report. 22) All Events Sorted By Door. 23) All Events Sorted By Person. 24) Anti-passback violation. 25) Muster. 26) Area loading.

b. Each report shall be configured to print the date and time that the report was run.

c. Reports shall be viewed on the screen when the report is run and the data has been compiled.

33. Custom Report Generation:


26866 18910-19 1/24/2019

a. The software shall contain a built-in custom report generator, featuring word processing and Visual Basic tools for the creation of custom reports.

b. The custom reports shall be setup to automatically run or be generated on demand.

c. Workstations shall display reports in Adobe (.PDF) format. d. Reports can be of any length and contain any attributes from any

controller on the network. e. The report generator shall have access to the user programming language

in order to perform mathematical calculations inside the body of the report, control the display output of the report, or prompt the user for additional information needed by the report.

f. It shall be possible to run other executable programs whenever a report is initiated.

g. Report Generator activity shall be tied to the alarm management system, so that any of the configured reports can be displayed in response to an alarm condition.

h. The software shall allow the simple configuration of row/column (spreadsheet-style) reports on any class of object in the system.

i. The reports shall be user-configurable and able to extract live (controller) data and/or data from the database.

j. The user shall be able to setup each report to display in any text font, color and background color.

k. Reports shall be able to be configured to filter data, sort data and highlight data which meets user-defined criteria.

l. HTML Reporting - Spreadsheet-style reports shall be able to be run to an HTML template file. This feature creates an HTML “results” file in the directory of the HTML template. This directory is shared with other computer users, which allow those users with access to the directory to “point” their web browser at the file and view the report.

m. Access privileges shall be provided to allow the user the privilege of creating, deleting, updating, saving, processing, viewing and printing reports.

n. The reports shall be able to be printed on a printer, or exported to an electronic file.

o. Once a report is developed and saved, the user shall have the option to permanently incorporate the report into the system's application by compiling the report definition into a report list available to any system Workstation.

p. The database report configuration is an option available for any Workstation.

34. System DVD Backup a. The SMS shall provide DVD backup and restore programs utilizing the

multi-tasking capabilities of the SMS system which run concurrent with any other application of the system and in no way inhibit other use of the terminal.


26866 18910-20 1/24/2019

b. Database backup shall occur dynamically while other alarm monitoring, Photo Imaging, access control applications remain active.

c. The number of active events to be stored is user-definable. If the event log is filled to capacity before an archive backup is done, the system starts to overwrite the oldest events to make room for the newer events.

d. The following functions are provided for the backup procedure of the system application: 1) Archive Information - This function shall indicate how many days

worth of event history is to be maintained on the system. 2) Warnings - The SMS shall provide a configurable warning to allow

a System Administrator to enable and define automatic system warnings. These warnings are sent to all currently active Alarm Monitoring workstations to notify the users when the event log is starting to get full.

3) Capacity - The event queue storage capacity is displayed as a number up to 8 digits long that specifies the number of event records that can be stored on the system. This number is determined by the size of the fixed disk drive installed and is generated by the system's database.

35. Color Graphic Map Configuration: a. The system shall have the ability to draw, edit and copy site color

graphic maps using any third-party system software. b. The map configuration software shall import map drawings from JPEG

(.JPG) and Bitmap (.BMP) and AutoCAD (.DWG) file formats as a minimum.

c. Architectural-type maps shall allow the detailed layout of an entire structure, part of a structure, a floor or department within a building, or layout the periphery of a facility.

d. Overview maps of an entire facility or campus shall be viewable as requested, or a specific entry point of a facility can be accessed via graphic panel objects that shall be able to be configured with multiple “tabbed” pages allowing a user to quickly view individual graphics of equipment, which make up a subsystem or system.

e. Once a map has been drawn, the user shall have the ability to place system level icons of card readers and input points in the appropriate area to indicate their respective location on the map. This is to be accomplished by simply dragging the icon with the mouse to the appropriate location on the map.

f. The SMS shall permit use of OCXs, and a full library of these controls including knobs, dials, gauges, switches, peripheral devices such as lights, motion detectors, doors, etc., shall be provided as part of the SMS software.

g. The CONTRACTOR shall provide various maps to be associated with each area and create a hierarchy of maps for the site.

h. The SMS shall support graphic maps having a resolution of 1024x768 pixels.


26866 18910-21 1/24/2019

36. Remote System Support: a. The SMS shall include remote system support from the system

manufacturer and/or local support dealer with remote diagnostics equipment that is included in at least one system Workstation.

b. The SMS shall support the capability to allow a remote technical assistance center analyze and perform any system diagnostic function using a modem and remote communications software, in support of personnel troubleshooting and correct problems via a standard dial-up phone line or internet over a DSL modem.

37. SMS Data Exchange: a. Data Import/Export - The SMS shall provide a function that shall allow

the end user, and/or CONTRACTOR, to create import and/or export scripts to/from the SMS.

b. Inherent to this utility is an automated import process, including “insert record,” “update record,” “update/insert record,” and “delete record” (i.e. the assignment of access privileges).

c. This utility shall allow the export of SMS System records into OWNER defined formats for use in external applications and systems.

d. This utility shall allow the user to specify options, including files, fields, delimiters and/or fixed field lengths, formats, import/export mode, rules, and criteria.

e. The user shall be able to indicate where the import or export file shall be located; on hard disk drive or removable media (i.e. external hard drive, memory stick, etc).

f. Once these ASCII-based files are received, the SMS shall automatically import these records into the database without requiring user interaction.

g. An application program within the SMS shall continuously query any shared resource on the network to which the HR generated file is to be written; and once a file is detected, the program shall initiate the reload of this file into the database using OLE servers at a user workstation.

h. Records shall be capable of being added, deleted, and modified from the SMS database using this procedure.

i. The SMS shall delete the file written to the shared resource immediately upon its import into the database.

38. Distributed Intelligence: a. In the event system communications is lost or the file server fails, all

network and site controllers shall be configured to provide complete control, operation and supervision of all monitoring and control points.

b. Upon failure of both servers (or the communications paths to those servers) the SMS shall be configured to allow any workstation in the network the ablity to communicate directly to any network/site controller at the facility, and provide complete control, operation, and supervision of all alarm monitoring and control points from that workstation.

c. The network/site controllers shall be configured with a UPS battery which shall support the controllers for a minimum of 4 hours.


26866 18910-22 1/24/2019

d. The network/site controllers shall be installed with enough memory to support 78,000 cardholders.

e. The SMS shall incorporate performance tests and precautions so as to avoid system failure.

f. In the event of a failure, transactions are to be stored in a buffer until the field controller comes back on-line, at which time all data is uploaded to a Workstation for reporting and delivery to the file server.

g. The network/site controllers shall register as on-line with the Workstations when communications are re-established.

h. A complete download of database and access information shall not be required because of off-line operation.

39. Other: a. The site SMS components shall be configured to allow all security

information (Access, Intrusion, CCTV alarms, images, and events) to be transmitted over a TCP/IP network to the remote monitoring stations.

b. All security system software and hardware provided by the CONTRACTOR shall be scalable.

C. ACS Functional Requirements:

1. Primary Function: The ACS primary function shall be to regulate access through specific doors and gates to secured areas of the facility. The ACS shall utilize a single database which is integrated to the existing databases previously established under prior OWNER projects. The CONTRACTOR shall integrate the facility’s security improvement components into the existing databases, using standard naming conventions that provide a common database configuration management operating environment with previously established field defined conventions under prior OWNER projects.

2. All on site ACS network/site controllers shall be connected via high-speed IEEE 802.3 Ethernet LAN (within the site) and the WAN (to remote system components) running TCP/IP protocol.

3. All data shall reside on a single database (enterprise wide) and the data stored within this database shall be instantly accessible by every Workstation (on site and off site) connected to the network. Each onsite ACS network/site controller shall maintain a database in real time, such that the failure of the network (local or remote) at any time shall not impact the functioning of the site security systems.

4. The ACS network controllers shall support multiple communication ports from which up to 32 I/O modules may be accessed.

5. The CONTRACTOR shall configure the Alarm Monitoring and Display Workstations to monitor all site security devices, such as card readers, controllers, and I/O modules.

6. The CONTRACTOR shall perform administrative configuration tasks such as assigning areas/zones with the site, developing schedules for the site, report generation for security events, displaying color graphic maps, etc, as


26866 18910-23 1/24/2019

necessary to fully integrate and configure the site into the overall enterprise wide SMS.

7. The CONTRACTOR shall configure the system database to contain all point configurations and programs in each of the ACS controllers that have been assigned to the network.

8. The ACS shall be integrated and configured to perform a wide variety of features and functions. These system functions are categorized into two (2) primary "system departments" which include: a. Access Control: The ACS's primary purpose shall be to provide access

control. The system shall be able to make access granted or denied decisions, authenticate access privileges, and to set schedules and holiday groups. All inputs and outputs shall be configured to be transmitted globally across the enterprise wide SMS network. Through the use of application programming, these inputs and outputs shall be linked at all field controllers for purposes of implementing system-wide control strategies. The system shall support features such as area control, anti-passback, dial-up field hardware communications, extended shunt time, multiple-man rule, mustering, and area loading.

b. Alarm Management: The CONTRACTOR shall provide and import customized color graphic maps of the facility and attach alarm icons to these maps. Initial maps and associated alarm icons for all facilities and system devices shall be created and entered into the system by the CONTRACTOR. Alarms are to be assigned priority levels. A status window shall be configured to provide information about the specific alarm including date, time and location of the alarm. The ACS shall be configured with unique emergency instructions to be specified for each type of alarm. Output control operations shall be configured to lock, unlock or pulse control points, or groups of points. The ACS components shall be properly integrated/configured into the following existing enterprise wide SMS functions: 1) Cardholder call-up function that provides a quick search and display

of images in the database. 2) A trace function that is available for users to locate and track

activity on specific cardholders or card readers. 3) An image comparison feature for use in conjunction with a

CCTV/DVMS technology interface. 4) System data back-up and remote diagnostic functions.

2.4 SMS FIELD HARDWARE DEVICES GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The SMS shall be equipped with the field hardware required to receive alarms, administer all access granted/denied decisions, provide direct intelligent software interface capability via RS-232 to third-party systems, and implement global operation strategies. Depending upon the configuration, the SMS field hardware shall be able to include any or all of the following features:


26866 18910-24 1/24/2019

1. Real Time Clock (RTC) - A battery backed RTC shall provide the following information: time-of-day, day, month, year, and day-of-week. In normal operation the system clock shall be based on the frequency of the AC power. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years. The system shall provide means to synchronize the time between all controllers and workstations on the network via centralized clock system provided by the City of Phoenix, Water Services Department.

2. Automatic Restart after Power Failure Upon Restoration of Power - All controllers shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored functions; resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as required.

3. Approval Listings - As a minimum, all controllers shall be listed to comply with UL Standards 294 and 1076, and FCC.

4. Indicator Lamps - As a minimum, all controllers shall have LED indication of Power Status, CPU/Activity status, Communications status and Error status.

5. Packaging - The Primary Network Controller and I/O modules shall be cased in a sleek, lightweight plastic housing. Built-in quick-release fasteners at the back of the module shall be provided for DIN rail mounting. These fasteners shall also permit panel mounting in a NEMA-1 style enclosure. The mechanical design shall incorporate built-in cable management troughs for wiring runs.

2.5 NETWORK CONTROLLERS

A. The Network Controllers (NET) shall provide overall system coordination, accept control programs, perform automated control functions and security management and perform all necessary mathematical functions.

B. All NET controllers shall permit multi-user operation from workstations and

laptop service tools connected either locally or globally. C. All NET controllers shall be provided with both RJ45 copper based ports and

Multimode fiber based ports that support IEEE 802.11 Ethernet Standards at 10 Mbps or greater.

D. The NET controller shall be a native TCP/IP device and shall not require use of

terminal servers or other devices to allow direct Ethernet connectivity. Use of PCs that serve as Ethernet gateways to the field controllers shall not be acceptable.

E. The interface link to other security systems shall take place at the NET controller

and not at a central computer, so that in the event of failure of the controller the rest of the system shall continue to function correctly.


26866 18910-25 1/24/2019

F. The interface links shall be provided to other systems as necessary such as fire detection, intrusion alarming, public address, and vehicle management, with the NET controller mounted adjacent to these systems’ central processing units.

G. The system protocols shall be transferred via embedded programmed

communications drivers or the SMS application software programming, which shall be resident within the NET controller.

H. This interface shall provide bi-directional communications between the SMS and

the other systems so that complete integrated control and monitoring could be performed for all systems.

I. All NET controllers shall be microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, multi-user, and

use real-time, digital control processors. J. All NET controllers shall be provided with control panels that consist of modular

hardware including power supply, CPU board, and input/output modules. K. NET devices provided for telephone dial-up sites shall be interchangeable (same

make and model) as the NET devices provided for Ethernet based sites. L. All NET controllers on the Ethernet TCP/IP LAN/WAN shall be capable, out-of-

the box, to be set up as a Web Server. M. All NET controllers shall have the ability to store HTML code and “serve” pages

to a browser. 1. Any computer on the network running any operating system capable of

running a standard Internet browser shall allow the user to access real-time data from the NET controllers via a standard Internet browser (Internet Explorer/Firefox) utilizing a TCP/IP Ethernet connection.

2. The WEB interface shall be capable of password security, including validation of the requesting PC’s IP address.

3. The WEB interface shall allow the sharing of data or information between any controller, or process or network interface (BACnet, LON and TCP/IP) that the SMS has knowledge of, regardless of where the point is connected on the SMS network or where it is acquired from.

N. All NET controllers shall be equipped with an application programming

environment to allow users to create custom applications. 1. All application programs are to be developed using an easy-to-use plain

English oriented programming language inclusive of a complete set of Boolean logical expressions.

2. Use of high level programming languages such as C or C++, or system manufacturer defined “canned” application programs will not be permitted. Application programs shall be used to enhance the functionality of the SMS


26866 18910-26 1/24/2019

by permitting custom control strategies and third-party user interfaces to be implemented.

3. All programs shall be self-documenting by allowing the users to place comments anywhere within the body of the program.

4. All global data shall be capable of being referenced at any NET or I/O Module and used in application specific programs to control an output, or multiple outputs at that controller.

5. Use of simple matrices to allow linking of inputs to outputs to meet this intent is not acceptable.

O. All NET controllers shall be equipped with the following:

1. A minimum of 8MB of RAM with math coprocessor 2. A minimum of 4MB of ‘Flash EEPROM’ memory for the system firmware. 3. Firmware shall be updated on-line or over a standard dial-up modem

connection. 4. Use of EPROM-based firmware requiring chip change-out to perform

upgrades is not acceptable. P. All NET controllers shall provide a powerful multi-user solution for network

communications and information management across a high speed Ethernet based network at 10/100 Mbps.

Q. Backbone based controllers shall provide communications to both the high speed

Ethernet LAN and a LON communications field bus. The LON communications bus shall support a family of application oriented I/O modules. The I/O bus shall permit LON communications using RS-485 or FTT-10. For Ethernet based Controllers, connections shall be provided with 10/100Base-T, if available at the time of purchase. If 10/100Base-T is not available at the time of purchase, then a 10Base-T interface shall be provided.

R. All NET controllers shall have built-in network communications error checking to

the International Standard CRC16. S. All NET controllers shall be provided with 4 programmable RS-232 ports for

printers, modems, terminals, and third-party software interfaces. T. All NET controllers shall be able to exchange information with other NETs over

the LAN. The network structure shall be transparent such that each controller may store and reference all global variables available in the network for use in the NETs calculations or programs.

U. Each NET controller shall have access to any of the readers, inputs, outputs, and

calculated variables contained in I/O modules that are connected to it through its local field bus.


26866 18910-27 1/24/2019

V. All NET controllers shall operate from 100 to 240 VAC 50/60 Hz power. Line voltage below the operating range of the system shall be considered outages. The controller shall contain over voltage surge protection, and require no additional AC power signal conditioning.

W. Battery Back-up - The NET controllers shall be provided with battery backup

UPS circuit with batteries and built-in battery charger that provides automatic battery backup UPS power in event of AC line failure. Each NET shall provide programmable battery back-up controls which include a choice of shutdown options. Each network and site controllers shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to support 72 hours of battery backup to maintain all volatile memory and real-time clock, and rechargeable UPS battery backup for full systems operation for a minimum of four (4) hours.

X. All NET controllers shall be capable of Simple Network Management Protocol

communications

2.6 SITE CONTROLLER

A. All Site Controller (SNET) shall provide intelligent, stand-alone or networked electronic access control and alarm monitoring control of a facility. They shall contain their own internal RAM memory and continue to operate all local control functions even in the event of a Network Server failure. In addition, the SNET's shall be able to communicate to other controllers on its Field Bus even in the event of Network Server failure. The SNET's shall maintain data integrity during a power failure through UPS or battery backed RAM.

B. The SNET shall include:

1. Integrated testing and diagnostics for self-testing. 2. Suitable interfaces and appropriate universal inputs and outputs to allow the

connection of mechanical or electrical signals. 3. Manual override facilities on all universal outputs for testing and

commissioning purposes. 4. Unique software address point on the network that does not require the

manual setting of DIP or DIL switches. 5. The provision of a service port facility to permit local access to be

established as well as global networking data interrogation facilities. C. The SNET shall incorporate card reader inputs and two lock outputs for door

control; as well as, the ability to monitor up to four supervised alarm contacts and four universal alarm inputs. There shall be two digital outputs available for further functionality. The SNET shall provide power for locks, readers, and other peripheral equipment.


26866 18910-28 1/24/2019

D. The card reader inputs shall be capable of reading Wiegand Proximity readers or ABA magstripe readers, and shall allow the use of keypads integral to those readers. The SNET shall include inputs for door switch and Request to Exit, as well as a door strike relay output.

E. The SNET shall be expandable with the addition of further controllers. The SNET

shall be monitored through the SMS operator workstations.

F. The SNET shall incorporate on board Ethernet 10/100base-T interface, using native TCP/IP protocol to communicate to workstations. The SNET shall have on board SNMP management. If no high-speed network is available, the SNET shall support standard auto-dial modem connectivity. The network structure shall be transparent such that each SNET may store and reference any global variables available in the network for use in the local controller’s calculations or programs.

G. The SNET shall feature flash memory eliminating the requirement for field

EPROM changes. H. The four universal inputs shall be capable of monitoring analog, digital, or

supervised signals.

I. Each SNET shall manage its own personnel records, alarm and event buffering, history logging, and control sequences. On loss of communication to the Head End, the SNET shall buffer all alarms and events, and upload on restoration of communications.

J. The SNET shall incorporate battery back up. If power is lost, this back up shall

support full operation for four hours. 2.7 I/O MODULES

A. I/O Modules - I/O modules shall be provided in a distributed or centrally located fashion. The I/O modules shall contain their own internal ROM, EEPROM, and SRAM. The I/O Modules shall maintain data integrity and full operation during a power failure through UPS or battery backed RAM.

B. Local I/O modules shall have the following:

1. Integrated testing and diagnostics for self-testing. 2. Suitable interfaces and appropriate universal inputs and outputs to allow the

connection of mechanical or electrical signals. 3. Manual override facilities on all universal outputs for testing and

commissioning purposes. 4. Unique software address point on the network that does not require the

manual setting of DIP or DIL switches.

C. The I/O Modules shall cover the following range of types:


26866 18910-29 1/24/2019

1. Access Control 2. Intrusion Detection and Digital Control 3. Voice Annunciation 4. Video Switching

D. All modules shall be able to exchange information between other I/O Modules

and NET Controllers during each field bus scan. This peer-to-peer capability shall permit full entry/egress operation across any controllers on the network.

E. Indicator Lamps - As a minimum, all I/O modules shall have LED indication of

Power Status, CPU/Activity status, Communications status and Error status. F. Packaging - I/O modules shall be cased in a sleek, lightweight plastic housing.

Built-in quick-release fasteners at the back of the module shall be provided for DIN rail mounting. These fasteners shall also permit panel mounting in a NEMA-4 style enclosure. The mechanical design shall incorporate built-in cable management troughs for wiring runs. The enclosure shall include a ruggedized key lock to prevent unauthorized access, and be rated for outdoor use if mounted outside. Manual override facilities on all outputs shall be provided for testing and commissioning purposes.

2.8 ACCESS CONTROL MODULE

A. The access control modules shall provide the interface for one card reader/keypad controlled door, and the NET Controller. Each access controller shall include a Wiegand or ABA style card reader input; at least three supervised inputs for door status, exit request, and other inputs; and at least two relay outputs for the door lock and an optional auxiliary controlled point.

B. Each access control module shall have the intelligence to perform all degrade-

mode access control strategies stored in the access control modules non-volatile EEPROM, without communication to other modules, in the event of a communications loss to the NET Controller.

C. Each access control module shall complete its internal scan in less than one

second. Each scan shall consist of updating of readers and keypads, supervised inputs, importing of data from other controllers, performing mathematical calculations and sequencing appropriate outputs for local control of doors, elevators, and other related devices. The maximum time for door opening from the proper presentation of a card shall be less than 1 second.

D. The access control module shall be fed from a low voltage, 24 VDC power supply

with battery backup for a minimum of four (4) hours. E. Inputs - The input section of the access control modules shall provide a minimum

of 1 card reader channel and 1 keypad channel. It shall be possible to expand the


26866 18910-30 1/24/2019

number of card readers by simply adding access control modules to the NET controller. In addition, there shall be 3 supervised inputs on the base controller for request-to-exit devices, door status devices, and general supervised input monitoring. 1. The card reader inputs shall accept Wiegand or Magnetic Stripe style readers.

Up to 64 bits per card formats shall be supported for Wiegand applications and up to 255 bits per card formats shall be supported in ABA applications.

2. Each supervised input shall be able to distinguish among normal operation, a short, open circuit, or a fault. Inputs shall be able to use double resistor-based supervised circuits.

3. A normally open momentary switch shall be used for external tamper detection. This switch shall detect whenever the cabinet of the access control module has been opened.

4. The access control module shall support Wiegand output or ABA output keypads. The keypad data shall be superimposed onto the Wiegand or ABA data lines.

F. Outputs - Output types shall be digital for control of doors. In addition to the

door output, the control module shall contain one auxiliary output for ON/OFF control of annunciators, lights, etc. Outputs shall be available with built-in override switches. 1. The digital outputs shall be rated for 24 VAC/DC operation at 5 amps

minimum. Each output shall have a corresponding LED for visual indication of its state.

2. A board-mounted 3-position switch shall be provided for each output allowing local overrides. The position of the switch shall be detectable in software and available for alarm annunciation. If override switches are not provided on board, external switches shall be provided and wired to include feedback and alarming of the switch position, and shall be mounted in a locked enclosure.

2.9 PROXIMITY CARD READERS

A. COP requires the SMS to provide Motorola Indala Triple Technology readers per current COP standard. The reader needs to be programmed with the COP current protocol. Each reader shall offer a low profile, rugged, weatherized polycarbonate sealed enclosure with multi-color LED’s and an audio function for access granted and denied indications. Each shall be mountable indoor or outdoor.

2.10 FIELD HARDWARE POWER SUPPLIES

A. Power Supplies for field hardware shall be compatible with the SMS equipment installed. Power supplies shall be regulated, linear and isolated versions for the field controllers and other equipment and shall be UL listed for specific


26866 18910-31 1/24/2019

application. Each version shall be available in UPS with battery back-up models only. All power supplies shall be housed in tampered, locked enclosures.

2.11 DOOR HARDWARE AND SWITCHES

A. Ancillary door hardware shall meet the following minimum specifications: 1. A surface mounted magnetic switch shall be used for roof hatch alarms. 2. A wide gap overhead door contact shall be used for overhead loading dock

doors. A low profile rugged aluminum housing shall mount directly to the floor. Connection to the alarm circuit junction box shall be armored cable to protect the wiring. The magnet shall also be protected by a rugged aluminum housing mounted on the bottom of the overhead door. Both the switch and the magnet assembly shall be weatherproofed and resistant to shock with multiple layers of protection.

3. All exterior doors without electric door strikes shall be provided with a latch position indicating switch (monitor strike) which shall be internal to the door and concealed from view.

4. An electro-mechanical lockset shall be used for specific doors, with an access control CR. The strikes shall operate on 24 VDC signal. A double signal switch shall be provided for the purpose of indicating the status condition of the latch but when not energized, and to activate a local alarm. The types of electric door latch shall be as follows: a. Fail secure: At the loss of electric energy, these locks doors shall lock.

At restoration of electrical energy, these locks doors shall automatically return to open default configuration.

b. Fail safe: At the loss of electric energy, these locks doors shall open unlock. At the restoration of electric energy, the locks doors shall automatically lock return to default configuration.

5. The local alarm buzzer shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for all doors with panic hardware and other specific doors, as noted on the Contract Drawings. The buzzer shall operate on a 24 VDC signal and shall be at least 10dBA above ambient noise. It shall be flush mounted on the secured side of the door. Its appearance shall be unobtrusive to its immediate surroundings.

B. Magnetic door switches, door strikes, door strike indicators, panic hardware, door

closures, etc., to complete the system. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all necessary hardware, and for the complete operation of all related hardware.

C. Input Power Requirements:

Major components of the door locking system, such as electronic locks, shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, single phase input power. Monitoring alarm devices and access control devices, such as door strikes, latches, etc., shall be powered by 24 VDC (2 wire-ungrounded), class 1 power limited circuits. Appropriate sized transformer(s), rectifier(s) or power supplies shall be provided for monitoring alarm devices by the CONTRACTOR, which


26866 18910-32 1/24/2019

shall receive its electricity from the building. Appropriate power supplies shall be provided for access control devices which shall receive their electricity from the building.

D. Spare Parts - A recommended spare parts list shall be provided, including part

price and quantity of each item and for the lot. Where appropriate, spare parts shall be quoted as sub-system modular replacements.

E. Door Types:

1. Door types for the Project have been grouped as follows:

TYPE CONFIGURATION STRIKE TYPE EXIT CONTROL OPERATION LOCAL ALARM

A Double Lockset REX in lockset Fail-Closed No B Single Lockset REX in lockset Fail-Closed No C Double Crashbar Microswitch Fail Closed No D Single Strike PIR/REX switch Fail Closed No

2. Secured door type “A and C” (Double doors to the facility):

a. Opening either door of secured door type “A” or “C” shall cause a change in state of the magnetic switch (MS) or the monitor strike (MST) and an alarm condition shall be generated by the SMS. Only one device shall be required to generate an alarm condition.

b. Entry through a secured door type “A” or “C” shall require the use of an authorized access card. The access card shall be presented to the CR and the SMS shall verify that the individual is authorized for the particular access point at that particular time of day and day of the week. If the individual is authorized the SMS shall grant access by momentarily energizing the electro-mechanical lockset or energizing the latch retraction solenoid and shunting the alarm condition that shall be generated by the MS and MST when the door is opened. The alarm condition shunt shall only be effective for a maximum of 30 seconds to prevent the door from being propped open after a valid access. If the door remains open 30 seconds after a valid access the SMS shall generate a “Held Open” alarm condition and display this alarm on the workstation.

c. Exit through a secured door type “A” shall be similar to the entry procedure, except that a Request-to-Exit (REX) device shall be used in place of the CR. In an emergency the exit shall Fail-Open, but shall cause the SMS to generate an alarm condition.

d. Exit through a secured door type “C” shall be similar to the entry procedure, except that the change of state of a Crash-bar mounted micro-switch shall be used in place of the CR. In an emergency, the exit shall Fail-Close.

3. Secured door type “B” and “D” ( Single door to the facility):


26866 18910-33 1/24/2019

a. Opening the door of secured door type “B” or “D” shall cause a change in state of the magnetic switch (MS) or the monitor strike (MST) and an alarm condition shall be generated by the SMS.

b. Entry through a secured door type “B” or “D” shall require the use of an authorized access card. The access card shall be presented to the CR and the SMS shall verify that the individual is authorized for the particular access point at that particular time of day and day of the week. If the individual is authorized the SMS shall grant access by momentarily energizing the electro-mechanical lockset or energizing the latch retraction solenoid and shunting the alarm condition that shall be generated by the MS and MST when the door is opened. The alarm condition shunt shall only be effective for a maximum of 30 seconds to prevent the door from being propped open after a valid access. If the door remains open 30 seconds after a valid access the SMS shall generate a “Held Open” alarm condition and display this alarm on the workstation.

c. Exit through a secured door type “B” or “D” shall be similar to the entry procedure, except that a REX device shall be used in place of the CR. In an emergency, the exit shall Fail-Close.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of the SMS shall include the appropriate equipment and shall be performed by a pre-qualified security integrator. The installation shall be completed to these specifications and project plans as required by the OWNER. A comprehensive OWNER site-planning guide for the SMS shall be provided. Adherence to the specific requirements of this document will assist in ensuring a successful system installation. The installation shall include the following: 1. Site planning and system configuration of field hardware and SMS.

CONTRACTOR shall consult with the OWNER for required camera pre-sets, access level configuration, and other systems programming.

2. Complete system setup at the Head End. 3. Setup of specific network software configuration requirements. 4. Complete system diagnostics verification. 5. Complete system operation verification. 6. Problem reporting and tracking. 7. Project specific installation log. 8. Completion of specific OWNER acceptance test plans. 9. Formal turnover of the specific project installation documentation to

OWNER. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE


26866 18910-34 1/24/2019

A. Performance Specification Requirements: Where specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated.

B. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is

specified for a specific application. All equipment shall be installed per applicable UL listing for that device or component.

C. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations for installation of

product in the applications indicated. Anchor products securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other work.

3.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Acceptance testing shall be per Section 18007, Integrated Security Management System Start-up Commissioning and Field Testing.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall test all system requirements to ensure proper operation

and configuration of the SMS. These requirements shall apply to all integrated system components and software, including, but not limited to all system computers, field controllers, card reader devices, CCTV cameras and equipment and interface capability.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall develop operational scenarios to simulate the actual

use of the system in the normal environment of the facility, as part of the acceptance testing. The OWNER reserves the right to modify the CONTRACTOR’S test plan or require the CONTRACTOR to add additional operational test procedures to effectively exercise all system operations.

3.4 SYSTEM TRAINING

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide training in accordance with Section 18008, Integrated Security Management System Training.
